DICKINSON COLLEGE COMMENTARIES FOR...

SOURCES:Allen-Greenough (A-G)AnthonHarknessHarper-Tolman (H-T)

HodgesHolmesKelseyLowe-Ewing (L-E)Spencer

Merryweather-Tancock (M-T)MoberlyStockWalkerWalpole

Content

s

BOOK 1, Chapter 8:........................................................................................................................3

BOOK 1, Chapter 9:......................................................................................................................11

BOOK 1, Chapter 10:....................................................................................................................16

BOOK 1, Chapter 24:..................................................................................................................116

BOOK 1, Chapter 25:..................................................................................................................122

BOOK 1, Chapter 26:..................................................................................................................129

BOOK 1, Chapter 27:..................................................................................................................137

BOOK 1, Chapter 28:..................................................................................................................141

BOOK 1, Chapter 29:..................................................................................................................147

BOOK 1, INTRO. TO CHAPTERS 30 TO 54: CAMPAIGN AGAINST ARIOVISTUS.........151

BOOK 1, Chapter 30:..................................................................................................................153

BOOK 1, Chapter 31:..................................................................................................................159

BOOK 1, Chapter 32:..................................................................................................................178

BOOK 1, Chapter 33:..................................................................................................................183

BOOK 1, Chapter 34:..................................................................................................................190

BOOK 1, Chapter 35:..................................................................................................................195

BOOK 1, Chapter 36:..................................................................................................................201

BOOK 1, Chapter 37:..................................................................................................................208

BOOK 1, Chapter 38:..................................................................................................................212

BOOK 1, Chapter 39:..................................................................................................................218

BOOK 1, Chapter 40:..................................................................................................................228

BOOK 1, Chapter 41:..................................................................................................................246

BOOK 1, Chapter 42:..................................................................................................................251

Notes compiled by JoAnne Miller

DICKINSON COLLEGE COMMENTARIES FOR CAESAR’S GALLIC WARS, BOOK 1

BOOK 1, Chapter 43:..................................................................................................................258

BOOK 1, Chapter 44:..................................................................................................................266

BOOK 1, Chapter 45:..................................................................................................................279

BOOK 1, Chapter 46:..................................................................................................................284

BOOK 1, Chapter 47:..................................................................................................................288

BOOK 1, Chapter 48:..................................................................................................................295

BOOK 1, Chapter 49:..................................................................................................................302

BOOK 1, Chapter 50:..................................................................................................................306

BOOK 1, Chapter 51:..................................................................................................................311

BOOK 1, Chapter 52:..................................................................................................................316

BOOK 1, Chapter 53:..................................................................................................................322

BOOK 1, Chapter 54:..................................................................................................................329



BOOK 1, Chapter 8:

Intereā eā legiōne quam sēcum habēbat mīlitibusque, quī ex prōvinciā convēnerant, ā lacū

Lemannō, quī in flūmen Rhōdānum influit, ad montem Iūram, quī fīnēs Sequānōrum ab Helvētiīs

dīvidit, mīlia passuum decem novem mūrum in altitūdinem pedum sēdecim fossamque perdūcit.

Eō opere perfectō praesidia dispōnit, castella commūnit, quō facilius, sī sē invītō transīre

cōnārentur, prohibēre possit. Ubi ea diēs quam constituerat cum lēgātīs vēnit et lēgātī ad eum

revertērunt, negat sē mōre et exemplō populī Rōmānī posse iter ūllī per prōvinciam dare et, sī

vim facere cōnentur, prohibitūrum ostendit. Helvētiī eā spē dēiectī nāvibus iunctīs rātibusque

complūribus factīs, aliī vadīs Rhodānī, quā minima altitūdō flūminis erat, nōn numquam interdiū,

saepius noctū, sī perrumpere possent cōnātī, operis mūnitiōne et mīlitum concursū et tēlīs repulsī,

hōc cōnātū dēstitērunt.

Caesar fortifies the left bank of the Rhone; the Helvetii make futile attempts to force a passage

(Holmes).

intereā: “meanwhile,” while the more distant troops levied on the Province were gathering at the

Rhone, and the Helvetians were waiting for Caesar’s answer (Kelsey).

eā legiōne: “with that legion”; ablative of means (AG 409). The ablative of means is often used

instead of the ablative of agent with ā/ab in speaking of bodies of troops (M-T), being a kind of

warlike implement (Moberly). The legion referred to is the tenth (Finch), afterwards Caesar’s

favorite legion (L-E).



mīlitibus: i.e., the new levies, ablative of means (AG 409), like eā legiōne above; the soldiers

are regarded as instruments in the hands of the general (Hodges).

quī in flūmen Rhōdānum influit: The Rhone flows into the lake at one end and out at the other

(Hodges). Caesar imagined that the lake flowed into the Rhone. He had in view the point at

which the river made its egress from the lake, and where a portion of the waters would flow into

the river. Some editors have changed the text to quem in flūmen Rhodānus influit, “into which

the river Rhone flows”; but this is unsatisfactory and artificial (H-T). While Caesar’s statement is

not incorrect, modern geographers consider Lake Geneva as an enlargement of the Rhone,

applying the name “Rhone” also to the principal feeder entering the lake at the upper end

(Kelsey). So, strangely enough, in 7.57.4. Caesar talks of a “marsh which flowed into the Seine”

(Walpole).

ā lacū…ad montem Iuram: These defenses extended along the southern side of the Rhone,

from the Lake of Geneva (Lemannus) to Mount Jura, and commanded all the fords of the Rhone

by which the Helvetii could enter the Roman province (Harkness). It will be remembered that

there were only two ways by which the Helvetii could leave home; one by the fords of the Rhone

into the Roman province, the other by the narrow pass between Mount Jura and the Rhone, and

which led through the territories of the Sequani. Of these two, that which led into the province

most required the attention of Caesar; and as he could not expect to keep off the vast numbers of

the Helvetii by the small force which he had with him, he drew a wall along the lower bank of

the Rhone, in a line with the fords, from the point where the Lake of Geneva emptied into that

river, to the spot where the Rhone divides, as it were, the chain of Jura into two parts, and forms

the pass already mentioned between the river and the mountain. This narrow passage, moreover,



would only lead the Helvetii into the territory of the Sequani; whereas the other, by the fords of

the Rhone, would have carried them at once into the Roman province (Anthon).

Helvētiīs: = Helvētiōrum fīnibus (Hodges).

decem novem: = ūndēvīgintī (Kelsey), contrary to the usual rule of compound numbers under

twenty (M-T).

mīlia decem novem: “nineteen miles in length,” literally “nineteen thousand paces,” = 17 ½

English miles following the winding of the stream, L-Ethe distance from the lake to Pas de

l’Ecluse (L-E, Walker). The Roman passus, or “pace,” was one yard (1.85375 ft.); and as 1000

of them went to the milliāre, or “mile,” the latter was equivalent to 1617 yards 2.75 feet

(Anthon).

in altitūdinem pedum sēdecim: “sixteen feet high,” literally, “of sixteen feet into height,”

(Walker). The height is regarded as a quality or characteristic (AG 345) of the wall. Caesar’s

barricade was not continuous, but was built only where the nature of the ground rendered it

necessary. For five-sixths of the entire distance the bank of the river is so steep that no defenses

were needed. Where the slope was gentler, the bank was cut down perpendicularly, or nearly so,

to the distance of sixteen feet from the top. The earth was thrown out to the side towards the

river; this produced the effect of a trench (Hodges).

mūrum: this rampart, or earthwork, was on the south side of the river, leaving the passage

undisputed along the northern bank. The banks of the Rhone in this part are generally rugged and

steep, with sharp ravines; there are only five short reaches—a little over three miles in all—

requiring defenses. The current is in general quite rapid. According to Caesar’s statement, the

work was continuous (this is the meaning of perdūcit). This undoubtedly means that, after the



Francese, Christopher, 12/31/15,

For dashes use the 3em dash, and no space between the dashes and the words.

five accessible points were strengthened by artificial defenses, the entire left bank of the Rhone,

from Geneva to Pas-de-l’Ecluse (17 ½ English miles), formed a continuous barrier against the

Helvetians. The construction of any one of the fortifications may be described as follows: Along

the crest of the ridge facing the river the slope was cut so as to be vertical, or nearly so, and then

a trench was hollowed. The earth dug out was partly thrown up to increase the height of the wall,

and quite likely in part thrown down the hill. At all events, it seems probable that the measure of

16 feet is the distance from the bottom of the ditch to the top of the wall. Thus the work formed

really little more than a trench with scarp higher than the counterscarp. Then the crest was

fortified with a breastwork of palisades, behind which the soldiers were protected while hurling

their missiles at the enemy. This entire series of works, with the force at Caesar’s command,

could not have occupied more than two or three days (A-G). That no traces of any stone

fortifications are to be found makes it almost certain that Caesar only strengthened the weak

points of the line by earthworks (M-T).

fossam: the “ditch” was simply the depression at the foot of the slope formed by throwing the

earth away from the slope toward the river (L-E).

perdūcit: “he constructs” (Harkness), the main verb governing the direct objects mūrum and

fossam (A-G). Perdūcit, literally “he leads [all the way] through” is not to be understood

literally; evidently he threw up earthworks only in the places where the bank was not so steep as

to form a natural fortification. Caesar was not writing a treatise for military engineers, but a

popular narrative, and as such, he expressed himself loosely (Holmes).

eō opere perfectō: “when this work had been finished” (Kelsey); ablative absolute (AG 419).

dispōnit: “he stationed at intervals” (Kelsey).



castella: a diminutive (AG 243) of castrum (M-T), literally “little fortifications,” “redoubts,”

probably of earth (Harkness), constructed at intervals along the line of earthworks and garrisoned

by the praesidia (“detachments” of troops ) (Holmes). The fortifications were sufficiently

numerous that the guards from one or another could quickly reach any point in the lines that

might be threatened (A-G). Caesar did not have troops enough to man the fortifications at all

points (L-E).

commūnit: equivalent to valdē mūnīre, “carefully fortifies” (Anthon). The force of com- is

intensive, “he fortifies completely” (Hodges).

quō facilius…possit: “[in order] that (literally “by which”) more easily he might be able”

(Hodges): quō is the usual construction for a purpose clause in which a comparative is used (AG

531); without the comparative it would be ut…possit (A-G).

sē invītō: literally, “he himself being unwilling” (Anthon); “without his consent” (Harkness);

“against his will”; ablative absolute: the reflexive pronoun sē is used because this is a part of

what Caesar had in his mind (A-G).

sī cōnārentur, possit: When a subjunctive (possit) dependent on an historical present

(commūnit) has another subjunctive dependent on it (cōnārentur), the former is often in a

primary tense (AG 485) (M-T).

ubi…vēnit: notice the difference between this clause and those noted with cum and the

subjunctive. This one expresses a real time and not circumstance like the others (AG 543) (A-G).

ea diēs: the Ides of April (Hodges), April 13 (Kelsey).



quam constituerat: “which he had appointed.” The allusion is to the day before the Ides

(Anthon).

revertērunt: in tenses from the present stem this verb is usually deponent, revertor, revertī, but

not here (Hodges).

negat sē…posse dare: “says that he cannot grant”; literally, “he denies that he is able to give”

(Harkness). Negō is regularly used instead of dīcō…nōn (Hodges). His direct words would be:

Mōre et exemplō populī Rōmānī nōn possum iter ūlli per prōvinciam dare; sī vim facere

cōnābiminī, prohibēbō (A-G).

mōre et exemplō: “according to the custom and precedents”: always constituting the rule of

conduct with the conservative Romans (A-G); mōs denotes established usage, exemplum simply

an example or precedent (Harkess), the behavior of the Romans on similar previous occasions. It

was an unusual and unprecedented thing for the Roman people to grant anyone a passage

through their province (Anthon).

iter: “right of way” (Kelsey), i.e., permission to go (Hodges).

ūllī: used here (in a rare instance) as a noun, “to anyone” (Kelsey), equivalent here to cuiquam.

Both quisquam and ūllus are seldom used except in negative sentences, sentences implying a

negative (Hodges), or with comparative adjectives (M-T).

sī…cōnentur: future condition in indirect discourse (AG 589) (A-G).

vim facere: “to use force,” literally “to make force” (Harkness); a remote supposition, “if they

were to attempt the passage by force” (Moberly).



prohibitūrum: sc. esse, sē as the subject and eōs as the direct object (A-G); infinitive in indirect

discourse dependent on the main verb ostendit (AG 577).

ostendit: “he shows them plainly,” i.e., he explicitly declares (Anthon).

Helvētiī…cōnātī: These attacks were doubtless made only by impatient isolated bands. The

Helvetian commander would not have sanctioned such folly (Holmes).

eā spē dēiectī: “disappointed in this hope (or “expectation” (L-E)),” i.e., in the hope of being

permitted peaceably to pass through the province (Harkness). Dēiectī, literally “cast down from

this hope” (H-T); dē- in composition generally has the meaning “down” (A-G), with eā spē as an

ablative of separation (AG 381).

nāvibus iunctīs rātibusque complūribus factīs: “some joined boats together,” attempting to

make a floating pontoon bridge, “and made a number of rafts,” for poling across (Kelsey);

ablatives absolute expressing means (Hodges). Before nāvibus we must understand aliī

(Anthon); the rafts were pieces of timber, or planks pinned together or fastened with cords,

having the appearance of a floating platform; of course they could be used only in smooth water.

The poets sometimes use rātis to signify a ship (Spencer).

aliī vadīs: We might have expected an aliī before nāvibus, i.e., some tried to cross by bridges of

boats and by rafts, “others” by fording at the shallow places. But the omission indicates that only

a few tried to ford the river, while the main body tried to cross in other ways. The word aliī is in

partitive apposition with Helvetiī (Hodges).

quā minima altitūdō flūminis erat: “where the depth of the river was least” (Anthon).

nōn numquam: “sometimes” (A-G).



interdiū, noctū: adverbs, “by day” (Kelsey), “by night.” Diū is ablative of an old word dius =

diēs (M-T).

sī perrumpere possent: dependent clauses containing an indirect question take the subjunctive

(Spencer). This clause is practically an indirect question (AG 575) depending on cōnātī, “trying

[to see] if (whether) they could break through (A-G); “having attempted to force a passage,”

literally, “having tried whether (if) they were able to break through” (Harkness).

cōnātī: perfect participle of cōnor, but best translated as “tried” (Kelsey).

operis mūnitiōne: “by the strength of the fortifications” (Kelsey), alluding to the wall (mūrum)

which had been constructed between the lake and Jura, together with its ditch (fossam) and

numerous fortifications (castella) (Anthon).

concursū: “by the rapid massing” at points attacked (Kelsey).

tēlīs: “by (their) missiles” (Kelsey); ablative of means (AG 410).

repulsī: “forced back” (Kelsey).

cōnātū dēstitērunt: the subject is Helvētiī (Hodges). Cōnātū is ablative of separation (AG 381),

“they gave up (literally ‘desisted from’) the attempt” (Kelsey).



BOOK 1, Chapter 9:

Relinquēbātur ūnā per Sēquanōs viā, quā Sēquanīs invītīs propter angustiās īre nōn

poterant. Hīs cum suā sponte persuādēre nōn possent, lēgātōs ad Dumnorigem Haeduum mittunt,

ut eō dēprecātōre ā Sēquanīs impetrārent. Dumnorix grātiā et largītiōne apud Sēquanōs plūrimum

poterat et Helvētiīs erat amīcus, quod ex eā cīvitāte Orgetorigis fīliam in mātrimōnium dūxerat,

et cupiditāte rēgnī adductus novīs rēbus studēbat et quam plūrimās cīvitātēs suō beneficiō habēre

obstrictās volēbat. Itaque rem suscipit et ā Sēquanīs impetrat ut per fīnēs suōs Helvētiōs īre

patiantur, obsidēsque utī inter sēsē dent perficit: Sēquanī, nē itinere Helvētiōs prohibeant,

Helvētiī, ut sine maleficiō et iniūriā trānseant.

The Helvetians obtain permission from the Sequani to pass through their country (L-E).

relinquēbātur: “there was left” (Kelsey).

ūna per Sēquanōs via: ūna is emphatic (A-G): “one, and only one way, through the Sequani”

(M-T) (see Chapter 6 (Kelsey)), i.e., the narrow pass along the right bank of the Rhone, between

the mountains and the river (Harkness). The order of words is noticeable: per Sēquanōs separates

the adjective ūna from its noun via, to show that the prepositional phrase qualifies the noun and

not the verb relinquēbātur (M-T).

quā: “and by this” (Walker); ablative of route / way by which (AG 429.4a) (A-G).



Sequanīs invītīs: ablative absolute expressing a condition (AG 420.4), “in case the Sequani were

unwilling” (A-G); “against the Sequanians’ will,” “if the Sequani should refuse” (L-E); “without

the leave of the Sequani” (M-T).

propter angustiās: “on account of the narrowness of the pass” (Anthon). The Pas de l’Écluse,

nineteen Roman miles from Geneva; at this point the Sequani, if so disposed, could easily stop

the progress of the Helvetii (Hodges).

hīs cum…persuādēre nōn possent: “since they could not persuade them” (L-E); “not being

able to persuade them”; the position of hīs emphasizes its connecting force (Hodges); hīs is the

dative object of persuādere (AG 367). The conjunction cum with a subjunctive puts before us the

circumstances in which the action represented by the principal verb takes place, whereas cum

with the indicative tells only how one action is related to another with regard to the time of its

occurrence (AG 549) (Holmes).

suā sponte: = per sē: “of themselves,” i.e., by their own unaided efforts (Harkness), by the

means they had at their command (Spencer); “on their own responsibility” (M-T); “by their own

influence,” a rare meaning of this phrase (A-G). Sponte and spondeō belong to the same root.

Two uses of the phrase suā sponte are to be distinguished, as equivalent to (1) “voluntarily,” of

an action not forced on the actors by others; (2) “singly” of an action done without others’ help.

The latter, which is the rarer use, belongs to this passage (M-T).

Dumnorigem: A fuller account of Dumnorix is given in Chapter 18, where we learn that he had

practical control of the revenues of the Aeduans and was bitterly opposed to Caesar (Kelsey). He

is mentioned in 3.13 as having conspired with Orgetorix; although that plot had failed, he was

still seeking a chance to make himself king (Walker).



eō dēprecātōre: ablative absolute denoting means (AG 420): literally “he being the intercessor,”

i.e., through his intervention or mediation (Anthon); “by his intercession” (M-T); “by his means

as advocate” (A-G). A dēprecātor is literally an “agent or “doer” (-tor) who “prays away” (dē +

precor) or averts something; in this case Dumnorix is to try to overcome the refusal of the

Sequani to allow the Helvetii to pass (Hodges).

ut impetrārent: sc. hoc, as referring to the passage through their territories (Anthon): “that they

might obtain [it, what they wanted]” (Moberley); purpose clause (AG 531); impetrārent is

imperfect subjunctive depending on mittunt, the historical present (AG 485) (Spencer).

grātiā et largitiōne: “on account of his popularity and generosity” (Harkness); “by personal

influence and by lavish gifts and hospitalities,” like those of old chiefs of the clan (A-G);

ablatives of cause (AG 404).

plūrimum poterat: sc. facere: literally “he was able to a very great degree” (Kelsey); “he could

[accomplish] very much” (Anthon); “he had very great influence” (Harkness).

Helvētiīs: dative with amīcus (AG 385), “friendly with the Helvetians.”

eā cīvitāte: = eōrum cīvitāte (H-T).

in mātrimōnium dūxerat: “he had married,” literally “had led into matrimony.” The Romans

said in mātrimōnium dūcere and uxōrem dūcere, “to marry a wife,” because the female was

conducted, as a part of the ceremony, from her father’s house to that of her husband. Hence

uxōrem dūcere is for uxōrem domum dūcere, literally, “to lead a wife home.” So again, in

speaking of a female taking a husband, the Latin writers employ the verb nubō. Thus virō

nubere, “to marry a husband.” Here the ellipsis is sē virō nūbere, literally “to veil herself for a



husband,” alluding to the bride’s wearing a flame-colored veil during the marriage ceremony

(Anthon).

cupiditāte rēgnī: rēgnī is objective genitive (AG 348): “his lust for sovereignty,” i.e. his desire

to rule.

novīs rēbus studēbat: “was anxious for revolution” (Moberly), “was eager for a change in the

government” (L-E), i.e., was plotting a revolution in the state (Anthon); rēs novae is the idiom

for “revolution,” literally “new things” (A-G), a change in the state of political affairs (M-T).

Studeō takes a dative object (AG 368).

suō beneficiō: “by benefits conferred by himself” (M-T); “by reason of his kind offices towards

them” (Anthon); ablative of cause (AG 404) or means (AG 410).

quam plūrimās cīvitātēs: “as many states as possible” (Hodges): quam together with a

superlative denotes the highest possible degree, “as…as possible” (AG 291).

habēre obstrictās: sc. sibi: “to keep closely bound to himself” (A-G); “to have under

obligations” (L-E). He wished to have these states under strong obligations to himself, in order

that they might aid him in his ambitious designs (Anthon). This use of habēre is an anticipation

of the part the verb “to have” was to hold in verbal conjugation; habēre obstrictās differs from

obstrinxisse in the fact that the notion contained in the participle is looked upon as a possession

(H-T).

itaque: “accordingly” (Kelsey).

rem suscipit: rem = lēgātiōnem (L-E): “he undertakes the affair,” i.e. the negotiation between

both parties, the Helvetii and the Sequani (Anthon).



impetrat: “he obtained a promise” (Kelsey); “he gets the Sequani to permit” (L-E).

ut…patiantur: substantive result clause (AG 571), the object of impetrat, as is obsidēs uti…

dent of perficit. The arrangement of these clauses illustrates the chiastic order, named from the

Greek letter chi (Χ) (AG 598) (Hodges).

perficit: has for its object uti…dent, a substantive result clause (AG 571) (A-G): literally, “he

causes that they (the Helvetii and the Sequani) may give,” “he causes them to exchange”

(Harkness); “he brought about an exchange of hostages” (Kelsey).

obsidēs: hostages, usually children of prominent persons (A-G), were exchanged as a pledge of

good faith; if the agreement were violated, they were liable to be put to death with tortures

(Kelsey).

Sēquanī, Helvētiī: in partitive apposition with the implied subject of dent (Hodges), to be

supplied from the preceding line; sc. obsidēs as the object of dent (Anthon). He causes them to

exchange hostages, the Sequani pledging not to obstruct the Helvetii, the Helvetii pledging to

pass through without doing any damage (Hodges).

nē…prohibeant…ut…transeant: purpose clauses with subjunctive (AG 531) expressing the

terms of the agreement for the ratification of which the exchange of hostages was arranged

(Kelsey), dependent on the idea of agreement implied in obsidēs…dent (A-G).

itinere: ablative of separation (AG 381) (A-G).



BOOK 1, Chapter 10:

Caesarī renūntiātur Helvētiīs esse in animō per agrum Sēquanōrum et Haeduōrum iter in

Santonum fīnēs facere, quī nōn longē ā Tolōsātium fīnibus absunt, quae cīvitās est in prōvinciā.

Id sī fieret, intellegēbat magnō cum perīculō prōvinciae futūrum ut hominēs bellicōsōs, populī

Rōmānī inimīcōs, locīs patentibus maximēque frūmentāriīs fīnitimōs habēret. Ob eās causās eī

mūnītiōnī quam fēcerat T. Labiēnum lēgātum praeficit; ipse in Ītaliam magnīs itineribus

contendit duāsque ibi legiōnēs cōnscrībit et trēs, quae circum Aquilēiam hiemābant, ex hībernīs

ēdūcit et, quā proximum iter in ulteriōrem Galliam per Alpēs erat, cum hīs quīnque legiōnibus īre

contendit. Ibi Ceutronēs et Grāiocelī et Caturigēs locīs superiōribus occupātīs itinere exercitum

prohibēre cōnantur. Complūribus hīs proeliīs pulsīs ab Ōcelō, quod est oppidum citeriōris

prōvinciae extrēmum, in fīnēs Vocontiōrum ulteriōris prōvinciae diē septimō pervēnit; inde in

Allobrogum fīnēs, ab Allobrogibus in Segūsiāvōs exercitum dūcit. Hī sunt extrā prōvinciam trāns

Rhodanum prīmī.

Caesar, learning that the Helvetians intend to pass through the country of the Santoni, goes back

to Cisalpine Gaul and returns with reinforcements (Holmes).

Caesarī renūntiātur: “word is brought back to Caesar,” i.e., by messengers sent to ascertain, as

the prefix re- implies (A-G). Caesar kept himself informed of the movements of the Helvetii (L-

E), probably through spies whom Caesar had himself sent out (Holmes). Renūntiāre is properly

applied to intelligence that is brought to one who had been previously expecting something of

the kind; and it is therefore the very term that is required here (Anthon).



Helvētiīs esse in animō: “that the Helvetians had in mind,” the subject of renūntiātur (L-E).

Helvētiīs is dative of possession (AG 373).

Haeduōrum: across the Arar from the Sequani (Hodges). Their territory lay between the Saône

and the Loire. Its stronghold was Bibracte. A society of antiquaries at Autun, calling themselves

the Société Eduenne, still celebrate the ancient glories of the Aedui (Stock).

Santonum: = Santonōrum; Caesar, in talking of the Teutoni and Santoni, uses the older and

shorter form of the genitive plural (Walpole). They were a people north of the Garonne, on the

Bay of Biscay, and the town of Tolosa was situated on the upper part of the Garonne, and a

considerable distance from the Santones (Spencer). This is so far from the borders of the

province as to show that Caesar was only searching for a pretext. But the conquest of Gaul was

already determined upon, and the warlike Helvetii were too dangerous a people to be allowed to

add their strength to that of the present inhabitants (A-G).

nōn longē absunt: The distance seems to have been greater (really about 130 miles (Walker)),

others believe much less, possibly 40 miles (Walpole), and Caesar seems to have understated it

on purpose, so as to exaggerate the danger (Moberly). The Helvetii would be more dangerous in

the territory of the Santones than in their own country, because they would no longer be hemmed

in by natural barriers. Caesar had reason to fear that either the Helvetii or the Gauls whom they

should drive from their homes would raid the Province; and since it was his duty to protect the

Province he was justified in forcing the Helvetii to remain at home. He does not choose to add,

however, that this movement of the Helvetii gave him an excellent opportunity to interfere in the

affairs of Gaul, and thereby fitted in with his plans for the conquest of the country (Walker). The

indicative mood forms of the verbs absunt and est (AG 157) shows that they are not part of the



report (indirect discourse), but explanations added by the writer of the narrative for his readers’

sake (M-T).

Tolosatium: the people of Tolosa, the modern-day “Toulouse” (A-G). The Tolosates were

clients of the Romans (L-E).

quae cīvitās: (= gēns, populus) (L-E), a common idiom for cīvitātis quae, “a state which,”

literally “which state,” “a tribe which” (Hodges). The antecedent, which would otherwise be

cīvitātis, in apposition with Tolosatium, is inserted as the subject of the relative clause

(Harkness).

sī…fieret: subjunctive in a conditional clause that is part of an indirect discourse after

intellegēbat (AG 512) (A-G): “if this should be done” (H-T); “if this should be carried out”;

Caesar’s thought was, “if this shall be carried out (future indicative), it will…” (Walker).

id: refers to the Helvetii marching into the territory of the Santones (A-G). Its initial placement

in the clause is emphatic (Harkness).

magnō cum perīculō prōvinciae futūrum: sc. esse: “that it would be (attended) with great

danger to the province” (L-E). The periphrasis with futūrum [esse] and the subjunctive habēret,

instead of the future infinitive sēsē habitūrum, often indicates that the result expected will spring

from various causes unspecified. The meaning is therefore “that things would so turn out, that he

would find great danger in having…” (Moberly). Cum is in the favorite place for the preposition

when the adjective is at all emphatic: “great was the danger” (H-T). Prōvinciae is objective

genitive (AG 348), depending on periculō (Hodges).

ut hominēs…habēret: substantive result clause used as the subject of futūrum [esse] (AG 571);

the subject of habēret is prōvincia (H-T). Caesar’s direct thought would be: Id sī fīet, magnō



cum perīculō prōvinciae futūrum est ut populus Rōmānus…habeat (A-G): “that it should have a

warlike race of men in its immediate vicinity”; the race alluded to are the Helvetii (Anthon).

populī Rōmānī inimīcōs: “enemies of the Roman people.” Normally the adjective inimīcus

links with dative (AG 384), but here it is used substantively (i.e., as a noun) and therefore a

genitive depends on it (Walker).

locīs patentibus: locīs is dative with the adjective fīnitimōs (AG 384), or sc. in for ablative of

place where (AG 429.4): “in an open tract of country” (Anthon); “in undefended (“exposed”

(Hodges)) country,” i.e., with no protection, natural or artificial, against invaders (M-T). The

southwest part of Gaul is a broad river valley, giving easy access to the province (A-G). Caesar

had no reason to interfere with the passage of the Helvetians through the country of the Sequani

unless it was clear that Roman interests would be unfavorably affected by it (Kelsey).

maximēque frūmentāriīs: “productive” of grain (Kelsey); “very fertile” (Anton). The broad

valley of the Garonne was the most fertile part of the Province (L-E). Adjectives ending in –us

preceded by a vowel (like frūmentārius) form their comparison by means of the adverbs magis

(comparative degree) and maximē (superlative degree) (AG 128). This form of comparison is

especially used with long words: maximē opportūna; rēs magis necessāriās; maximē

memorābilem (Stock).

fīnitimōs: predicate accusative (AG 392, 393): “as neighbors” (A-G).

ob eās causās: i.e., the several causes of danger which Caesar has enumerated (Spencer).

eī mūnitiōnī…T. Labiēnum…praeficit: “he put….T[itus] Labienus in command of the

fortification”; praeficiō takes the accusative of the person placed in charge (T. Labiēnum

lēgātum) and the dative of the thing over which one is placed in charge (eī mūnitiōnī) (AG 370).



Titus Labienus was Caesar’s best officer, a prominent and influential politician, of strongly

democratic sympathies. He served Caesar faithfully through the Gallic wars, but when the civil

war broke out he joined what he conceived to be the party of the republic, went over to Pompey,

and was killed at Munda in 45 B.C. (A-G). Alternatively: Titus Labienus was a very efficient

officer, and one in whom Caesar placed great confidence. As tribune in the year 63 B.C. he was

very useful to Caesar and was a close confidant of the latter’s political schemes. He basely

deserted his patron when the civil war broke out, and was killed at the battle of Munda in 45 B.C.

(L-E). Eī mūnitiōnī refers to the walls that had been constructed between the lake and Mount

Jura (Anthon).

lēgātum: “aide, lieutenant,” i.e., one who has been given a commission; so we also find the

diplomatic sense of “ambassador” (H-T). As the word is formed from legāre, its original

meaning is that of a deputy or commissioner of any kind. Lēgātī, in the sense in which the word

is used here, were generally, if not always, senators, and were as a rule appointed by the senate;

but Caesar, perhaps without consulting that assembly, could appoint lēgātī himself; and indeed

Cicero did so when he was Governor of Cilicia. Lēgātī were expected to perform any duty with

which their chief might entrust them. On Monday a lēgātus might be placed in command of a

legion and lead it in battle; on Tuesday he might be sent to raise a fresh levy of troops (Holmes).

In the absence of the consul from the army, the lēgātī, or one of them, took his place, and had the

insignia as well as the power of his superior (Spencer).

in Ītaliam: “into Italy,” i.e., into Hither Gaul (Anthon), Gallia citerior, south of the Alps (M-T),

an area already regarded as a part of Italy (A-G), and one of the provinces under Caesar’s

proconsular charge (L-E). Caesar could not levy troops outside his province (Holmes).



magnīs itineribus: “making all speed” (M-T); “[by] forced marches” of an army; ablative of

means (AG 409). The ordinary day’s march of the Romans was about 15 miles; a magnum iter

was from 20 to 25 miles (A-G).

duāsque legiōnēs cōnscrībit: cōnscrībere is the technical term for levying troops, referring to

the making up of the roll of names of the soldiers called out (M-T). The senate had given Caesar

four legions: the tenth (mentioned in Chapter 7) and probably the three at Aquileia. The other

two, numbered XI and XII (Holmes), he seems to have raised on his own authority (M-T). This

is proved by the fact that it was agreed in the conference which he held with Pompey and

Crassus at Luca in 56 B.C. that he should receive a grant for the payment of the legions which he

had raised, and that this grant was voted by the Senate (Holmes). By levying these additional

troops he increased his army to six legions, perhaps 24,000 men. With these legions and some

auxiliary troops he had to oppose 92,000 fighting men, according to the Gallic records given in

Chapter 29 (Walker).

trēs: sc. legiōnēs, the 7th, 8th, and 9th legions (Kelsey).

circum…hiemābant: “they wintered in the neighborhood of”; winter quarters, hiberna, were

generally not “in,” but “near” a town (AG 428) (M-T).

Aquilēiam: an important Roman colony at the head of the Adriatic. It continued to be the chief

port of trade for this region until outgrown by Venice (A-G). It was strongly fortified, and served

to protect Cisalpine Gaul against invaders from the eastward. In imperial times it was a city of

great size and enormous wealth (Hodges). As Caesar speaks in Book 3.7 of Illyricum as a region

with which he wished to make acquaintance, we may infer that he did not go in person to

Aquileia (Stock).



quā proximum iter: sc. in parte: “where [in which area] the route was nearest,” i.e., shortest

(Anthon), past Cremona and Turin and over the Cottian Alps (Hodges). The more direct route by

Mont Cenis (the Cottian Alps) began to be used only in Augustus’ time (Moberly). He did not

wish to return to Geneva, for by this time the Helvetii had left their country. It is estimated that

Caesar spent two months in securing his reinforcements (Walker).

in ulteriōrem Galliam: = Prōvincia Rōmāna or Gallia Trānsalpīna (L-E).

cum hīs quīnque legiōnibus: i.e., with the 10th which Caesar found in Gaul on his arrival, this

gave him in all six legions, besides the forces just raised in the province. These six legions were

the 7th, 8th, 9th, 10th, 11th, and 12th (Harkness).

ibi: i.e. in the Alps (Hodges).

Ceutronēs et Grāiocelī et Caturigēs: Alpine tribes in the territory of modern Savoy and

Provence (L-E). The reading varies between Centronēs and Ceutronēs; but in any case these

mountaineers are to be distinguished from the Ceutrones of Book 5.39, a Belgian tribe living just

south of the Menapii. Caturigēs, a name based on “cath” in Irish and “cad” in Welsh meaning

“war,” or “battle,” is interpreted to mean “battle-kings.” They figure among the tribes

enumerated in an inscription on the “Trophy of the Alps,” which celebrated their final

subjugation under Augustus (Stock).

locīs superiōribus occupātīs: “seized commanding heights and…” (Kelsey).

itinere: ablative of separation (AG 400, 401).

complūribus…pulsīs: In these four words appears an ablative absolute (hīs…pulsīs) (AG 419)

and an ablative of means (complūribus…proeliīs) (AG 409) limited by an adjective (H-T). When



the attribute of one pair of words comes between another word and its attribute (a b A B), the

arrangement is called interlocked (“synchysis,” AG 598h). Here the order is made more artificial

for reversing the positions of the noun and attribute (a B A b) (L-E): “these having been routed in

numerous encounters” (hīs referring to the tribes mentioned above (M-T)); Polyaenus makes

mention of a stratagem employed by Caesar against these mountaineers. Under cover of the

morning mist, he led a portion of his forces by a circuitous route to a part of the mountain which

overhung the enemy’s position. All of a sudden a shout was raised by those with him, and was

answered by the rest of his troops below, on which the barbarians, struck with terror, betook

themselves to hasty flight. What Polyaenus adds, however, that Caesar crossed the Alps on this

occasion, without any fighting, appears from the present passage to be incorrect (Anthon).

ab Ōcelō: the preposition is expressed with the name of the town because the departure is “from

the neighborhood of” Ocelum (AG 428a) (Walpole); “Usseau,” southwest of Turin (L-E) at the

very foot of the Alps (Spencer), and close to Avigliana; therefore in the Italian part of his march

Caesar moved up the valley of the Dora Riparia, and of course crossed the Mont Genèvre and

passed by Brigantio (Briançon) in the country of the Caturiges. As he was making for that part of

the country of the Segusiavi which lies between the Rhône and the Saône near Lyons, it will

become evident to anyone who consults a good map that his shortest route would have led past

Grenoble, if between Briançon and Grenoble there was then a practicable road: but it is very

doubtful whether this route would have led him into the country of the Vocontii; and therefore it

seems likely that he took the road which leads past Embrun, Chorges, Gap and Die (Holmes).

citeriōris prōvinciae: “of the hither province.” By citerior prōvincia the Romans meant

Cisalpine Gaul; by ulterior prōvincia they meant Transalpine Gaul (Anthon), separated from

each other by the Alps (Harkness).



extrēmum: sc. oppidum (Anthon): “farthest” (L-E), “the last town” (Harkness); i.e., most

westerly (Kelsey).

Vocontiōrum ulteriōris prōvinciae: “of the Vocontii [a people] of the farther province (Gallia

Trānsalpīna) (Hodges). The homeland of the Vocontii extended from the Durance to the Isère

(A-G). The ulterior prōvincia is usually called simply “the Province” (Walpole).

Allobrogum: these people extended as far south as the Isère, and had possessions north of the

Rhône in the sharp angle at St. Didier (A-G).

in Segūsiāvōs: i.e., into that part of their territory which lies between the Rhône and the Arar. He

encamped on the heights above the city of Lyons. Labienus must have rejoined him there

(Walker). The Segusiavi were clients of the Haedui (Hodges). The position of the Segusiavi is

roughly marked by the fact that their capital was afterwards Lugdunum (Lyon) (Stock), west of

the Rhône and opposite Vienne. They probably extended across the Saône above Lyons, so that

Caesar only crossed the Rhône above its junction with the Saône and did not cross the Saône

also. He evidently had his camp in the heights above Lyons in the angle of the two rivers. His

army amounted to six legions of nearly 25,000 men and an uncertain number of Gallic cavalry.

Caesar evidently went beyond his province without the order of the Senate, hence his

explanatory tone (A-G).

pervenit: “passed through” (Kelsey).

exercitum: three trained legions from near Aquileia, and two legions of recruits just levied in

Cisalpine Gaul with which was joined the tenth legion, released from guarding the fortification

below Geneva; for the campaign against the Helvetians Caesar had thus six legions, combining

about 22,000 men, besides cavalry. Light-armed troops, used in the campaign of 57 and



afterwards, are not mentioned in Book 1 (Kelsey). Caesar was only about two months in going to

Cisalpine Gaul, raising two legions there, forcing his way across the Alps through a hostile

region and reaching Lyons, ready to confront the Helvetii (L-E).

extrā prōvinciam: Caesar undoubtedly here overstepped his authority. Outside of the Roman

province, the Gallic tribes were independent of Roman rule (Hodges). In going outside of the

Province, as in the levying of the troops, Caesar acted under a general commission to defend the

frontier of the Province. The situation among the Aedui, Sequani, and other Gallic tribes was

such as to compel Caesar to drive back the Helvetii, or the Romans would lose all their influence

in Celtic Gaul and Ariovistus, the German king, would become supreme there. The extraordinary

efforts of Caesar to hurry forward troops from Italy show how serious he thought the situation

was (L-E).

trāns Rhodanum: i.e., west of the Rhône (Harkness). Caesar probably crossed the Rhône by a

pontoon bridge, a short distance above the junction with the Arar (Kelsey).



BOOK 1, Chapter 11:

Helvētiī iam per angustiās et fīnēs Sēquanōrum suās cōpiās trādūxerant et in Haeduōrum

fīnēs pervēnerant eōrumque agrōs populābantur. Haeduī, cum sē suaque ab iīs dēfendere nōn

possent, lēgātōs ad Caesarem mittunt rogātum auxilium: ita sē omnī tempore dē populō Rōmānō

meritōs esse ut paene in cōnspectū exercitūs nostrī agrī vastārī, libērī [eōrum] in servitūtem

abdūcī, oppida expugnārī nōn dēbuerint. Eōdem tempore [quō Haeduī] Ambarrī, necessāriī et

cōnsanguineī Haeduōrum, Caesarem certiōrem faciunt sēsē dēpopulātīs agrīs nōn facile ab

oppidīs vim hostium prohibēre. Item Allobrogēs, quī trāns Rhodanum vīcōs possessiōnēsque

habēbant, fugā sē ad Caesarem recipiunt et dēmōnstrant sibi praeter agrī solum nihil esse reliquī.

Quibus rēbus adductus Caesar nōn expectandum sibi statuit dum, omnibus fortūnīs sociōrum

cōnsūmptīs, in Santonōs Helvētiī pervenīrent.

The Aedui, the Ambarri, and the Allobroges, into whose country the Helvetii had arrived, ask

Caesar for aid; he determined on immediate action (Walpole).

iam: “by this time” (A-G). Caesar’s journey to Italy and back must have taken nearly two

months, so that the time would now be June (Hodges). Meanwhile the Helvetians, with their

throng of women and children and their carts loaded with the baggage of a whole nation (only

one of which at a time could proceed through the mountain pass (Stock)) had slowly advanced,

in all, only about 100 miles (Kelsey).

per angustiās: “through the narrow pass,” i.e., the Pas-de-l’Ecluse, the pass between the Jura

and the Rhone (Harkness). Compare Chapter 6: angustum et difficile, inter montem Iuram et



flūmen Rhodanum” (H-T). The entire train of the Helvetii has been reckoned at 8500 four-horse

wagons, extending some 50 miles. The passage must have been extremely slow. They probably

followed in the line of the modern railroad as far as Culoz, then to Amberieu and across the

plateau des Dombes to the Saône between Lyons and Macon, a distance of nearly a hundred

miles (A-G).

Haeduōrum fīnēs: on the west side of the Arar, which the van of the Helvetian host already had

crossed (Kelsey). It does not appear that these people occupied the left bank of the Saône. But

predatory excursions may have been made across the river, and in Chapter 12 the Helvetians

were engaged in crossing (A-G).

pervēnerant, populābantur: this they had accomplished during the absence of Caesar in Italy

(Harkness). Notice the change of tense (Hodges). They seem to have followed the right bank of

the Rhône about half-way to its junction with the Saône and then to have headed in a

northwesterly direction for the Saône. The whole distance is stated to be not more than 98 miles

(L-E). Their line of march must have been at least fifty miles in length, and their progress was

necessarily slow, especially at the pass (Walker).

cum…nōn possent: “unable (as they were) to defend” (H-T). Cum is here a conjunction, not a

preposition. Note that imperfect subjunctive (secondary sequence) appears in this cum-causal

clause (AG 540), because the main verb mittunt is an historical present (AG 469).

lēgātōs mittunt: The idea which makes possible the following indirect discourse is easily

gathered from these words (H-T). Here lēgātōs refers to “envoys” or “ambassadors” sent to

deliver this message, not “lieutenants.”



sē suaque: “themselves and their possessions” (Harkness), the direct objects of dēfendere. The

neuter plural of adjectives is often employed to denote the abstract idea of things in general (L-E).

iīs: = eīs.

rogātum: “to ask for” (A-G); the accusative supine expresses purpose with a verb of or implying

motion (AG 509). It may take an object, as, in this case, auxilium.

ita sē…meritōs esse: sc. dīcentēs (Anton), followed by indirect discourse: “saying that…” In

Latin, after the idea of speech of thought is suggested (see lēgātōs mittunt above), no further

expression of saying is necessary. In direct discourse this would be, Ita [nōs]…meritī sumus, ut

paene in conspectū exercitūs vestrī,…līberī nostrī…nōn dēbuerint (A-G): “that they had so

deserved at all times of the Roman people, that…” (Anton). Probably the account is somewhat

exaggerated (A-G).

omnī tempore: “on every occasion” (Walker); “at all times”; ablative of time in the course of

which the action takes place (AG 423), not “during” or “throughout” which, where the

accusative would be required (M-T). 60 years before, in 121 B.C., the Aeduans had by treaty

been recognized as sociī populī Rōmānī, “allies of the Roman people.” The Romans were first

led to intervene in the affairs of Transalpine Gaul, however, not in the interest of the Aeduans,

but in response to a request of Massilia (Marseilles) for protection against the incursions of

Ligurian tribes east of the Rhône; this was in 155 B.C. (Kelsey).

meritōs: Tacitus relates (Ann. 11.25): sōlī Gallōrum (Aeduī) frāternitātis nōmen cum populō

Rōmānō usurpant, “Alone among the Gauls the Haedui claim the name of brotherhood with the

Roman people” (M-T). So, also, Cicero calls them frātrēs nostrī (A-G). The Aedui had been the



earliest among the Gallic tribes to enter into friendly relations with the Romans, and had always

been distinguished for their friendship and fidelity (Spencer). They also seem to have traced their

descent from Trojan blood (Walpole).

in cōnspectū: “before the eyes” (L-E).

exercitūs nostrī: nostrī (a momentary lapse into direct discourse (Walpole)) is used because the

indirect discourse is addressed to Romans by a Roman (L-E).

vastārī, abdūcī, expugnārī: note the omission of a conjunction (asyndeton (AG 601)) with these

passive infinitives (H-T).

liberī eōrum: Caesar here leaves the standpoint of the subject (viz. the envoys of the Haedui),

and speaks from his own; hence eōrum and not suī (Walpole).

in servitūtem abdūcī: “to be led away into slavery,” the penalty of capture (Kelsey).

expugnārī: “to be taken by assault” (Kelsey).

dēbuerint: perfect subjunctive, as meritōs esse depends on an historic present (mittunt), its time

is that of the pluperfect. Regularly the pluperfect is followed by the imperfect, but in clauses with

ut, containing a conclusion, the historical perfect is also properly placed instead of the imperfect

(Spencer). Since the English verb “ought” has no past tense while the Latin verb dēbeō does, the

force of the tense in dēbuerint is brought out by the English infinitives: “that our lands ought not

to have been pillaged, etc.” Dēbeō implies a legal or moral obligation (H-T).

liberī eōrum: = liberī suī (Harkness), i.e., those of the Haedui.



Ambarri: the name is likely a contraction from Ambi and Arar (“around the Arar”). If this be so,

it would point to their having possessions on both sides of the Saône (Stock); “the Haedui near

the Arar” (or Saône), occupying the angle between that river and the Rhône. They were evidently

closely akin to the Haedui and were their allies (A-G). The main body of the nation were on the

east of the middle Loire (Moberly). Bibracte, the center of the Druidical religion and

Noviodunum, an important commercial town, were the chief cities of the Ambarri (L-E).

necessāriī et cōnsanguineī: “the friends and kinsmen of the Aedui.” By necessāriī, among the

Roman writers, are meant friends or allies, engaged mutually to support and assist each other

(Spencer). They are bound by necessitūdō, or community of interests of any kind (A-G). It is a

more comprehensive term than amīcī, and includes not only those who are bound together by the

ties of friendship, but also those who are connected in business or in official relations (Harkness)

or connections by marriage (Kelsey). Cōnsanguineī are “kinsmen,” comprising only blood

relations. Notwithstanding their close relationship with the Haedui, the Ambarri had a separate

coinage (Kelsey).

dēpopulātīs agrīs: “since their fields were laid waste” (L-E); “their lands had been ravaged

and…” they were now having difficulty keeping them from their walls (Moberly). Dēpopulātīs is

passive, although it’s from a deponent verb (A-G). This occurs frequently with the participles of

populor, ulcīscor, meditor, and others (M-T).

nōn facile...prohibēre: “could not (literally “did not”) keep away,” nōn prohibēmus in direct

discourse (H-T). Notice the ablative of separation ab oppidīs expressed with a preposition, while

in other places separation is expressed without a preposition (e.g. Chapter 10, itinere prohibēre)

(AG 402).



Allobrogēs: most of the Allobroges were south of the Rhône and were not troubled; but some

were north of the river and on the route of the Helvetii (Walker).

trāns Rhodanum: north of the Rhône and east of the Arar (H-T). Only a small part of their

possessions was across the Rhône (Spencer).

fugā sē recipiunt: “they made their escape” (Kelsey), literally “they take themselves back (i.e.,

retreat) by flight”; fugā is ablative of means (AG 409).

possessiōnēs: i.e., lands (H-T).

dēmōnstrant: “they stated” (Kelsey); “they inform him,” equivalent here to narrant (Anthon).

Dēmōnstrāre has this sense continually in Caesar (Spencer).

sibi…nihil esse reliquī: “that they had nothing left” (Kelsey); “that nothing was left them”

(Anthon), literally “nothing of a remainder to them” (H-T). Indirect discourse dependent on

dēmōnstrant. Reliquī is a partitive genitive (AG 346) of the neuter substantive adjective

reliquum depending on nihil (Anthon).

quibus rēbus: = hīs rēbus.

praeter agrī solum: “except the soil of their land,” i.e., except the bare soil, a devastated

country (Anthon); they had nothing left, the land was completely stripped. Note the short

quantity of the o in solum; it’s the noun for “soil” (A-G), not the adjective “sōlus,-a,-um.”

nōn exspectandum sibi: sc. esse: impersonal use of the gerund in a future passive periphrastic

construction (AG ), literally “it must not be waited.” Sibi is the dative of agent (AG ) (H-T).

Translate actively, “that he ought not to wait” (Harkness).



omnibus fortūnīs sociōrum cōnsūmptīs: “all the resources of his allies having been destroyed,”

i.e., their fortunes having become completely ruined (Anthon). Like our own word “fortunes,”

this means sometimes “wealth” or “substance,” as here, but more often “welfare” or “prospects”

(Stock). The sociī referred to here are the Haedui and Ambarri, allies of the Roman people (H-T).

Santonōs: The MSS. vary between Santonēs and Santonōs, but the better class have Santonōs.

Both forms are in use. In the same way we have Teutonī and Teutonēs (Anthon). Caesar was

inconsistent in the spelling of this name, which survives in that of the city Saintes (Kelsey).

These people were mentioned previously in Chapter 10 (L-E).

dum…pervenīrent: “until they should arrive” (Walker); subjunctive verb in an anticipatory

clause where the arrival of the Helvetii was still contingent (AG 553).



BOOK 1, Chapter 12:

Flūmen est Arar, quod per fīnēs Haeduōrum et Sēquanōrum in Rhodanum īnfluit,

incrēdibilī lēnitāte, ita ut oculīs in utram partem fluat iūdicārī nōn possit. Id Helvētiī ratibus ac

lintribus iūnctīs trānsībant. Ubi per explōrātōrēs Caesar certior factus est trēs iam partēs

cōpiārum Helvētiōs id flūmen trādūxisse, quārtam vērō partem citrā flūmen Arārim reliquam

esse, dē tertiā vigiliā cum legiōnibus tribus ē castrīs profectus ad eam partem pervēnit quae

nōndum flūmen trānsierat. Eōs impedītōs et inopīnantēs adgressus magnam partem eōrum

concīdit; reliquī sēsē fugae mandārunt atque in proximās silvās abdidērunt. Is pāgus appellābātur

Tigurīnus; nam omnis cīvitās Helvētia in quattuor pāgōs dīvīsa est. Hic pāgus ūnus, cum domō

exīsset, patrum nostrōrum memoriā L. Cassium cōnsulem interfēcerat et ēius exercitum sub

iugum mīserat. Ita sīve cāsū sīve cōnsiliō deōrum immortālium quae pars cīvitātis Helvētiae

īnsignem calamitātem populō Rōmānō intulerat, ea prīnceps poenam persolvit. Quā in rē Caesar

nōn sōlum pūblicās, sed etiam prīvātās iniūriās ultus est, quod eius socerī L. Pīsōnis avum, L.

Pīsōnem lēgātum, Tigurīnī eōdem proeliō quō Cassium interfēcerant.

Caesar overtakes the Helvetii as they are crossing the Arar, and annihilates one division of their

army (Walpole).

Flūmen est Arar: “there is a river (called) Arar” (Harkness), the modern “Saône” (A-G). Caesar

often introduces a transition of subject in this way (Walpole).

quod per fīnēs Haeduōrum et Sēquanōrum īnfluit: “[a river] which flows through…,” not

“between,” which would be expressed by dividit. The Saône joins the Rhône about 75 miles



southwest of Lake Geneva (A-G). For a part of its course the Arar (Saône) formed the boundary

between the Haedui and the Sequani, who engaged in violent strifes over the right, claimed by

both, to levy tolls on passing vessels (Kelsey). Quod is in reference to its antecedent flūmen;

some MSS. read quī, referring to Arar (Spencer).

incrēdibilī lēnitāte: “with remarkable gentleness,” as contrasted with the swift turbid waters of

the Rhine and the rivers of Italy (L-W); “with wonderful smoothness,” more literally, “with a

smoothness exceeding belief” (Anthon); “with unbelievably sluggish current,” ablative of

description / quality (AG 415) (A-G) or manner (AG 412) (Hodges). Near Trévoux, 14 miles

north of Lyons, the current of the Saône is today for a short distance as sluggish as in Caesar’s

time; and here the Helvetians probably crossed the river (Kelsey).

in utram partem fluat: “in which direction” (Harkness); indirect question (AG 575, 576),

subject of iūdicārī possit (A-G).

ut…iūdicārī nōn possit: “that it cannot be determined” (Anthon); result / consecutive clause

(AG 537).

ratibus: “rafts” of logs (A-G).

lintribus iūnctīs: “small boats” (Anthon) or “canoes” of hollowed logs, “joined” to make a kind

of bridge (A-G).

trānsībant: notice the imperfect tense; they were in the act of crossing (A-G) at Mâcon or north

of Trévoux (L-E). The Helvetii had proceeded about 100 miles from Lake Geneva (Hodges).

Perhaps the Helvetii crossed the Saône at various points, for it has been suggested that if they

had all crossed at one point, they would have opposed Caesar’s passage (Holmes).



explōrātōrēs: “patrols” (Holmes), usually detachments of mounted soldiers sent to reconnoiter

(Hodges). The English equivalent is not “scouts,” which were known as speculātōrēs (Holmes).

trēs iam partēs cōpiārum Helvētiōs id flūmen trādūxisse: “that the Helvetii had by this time

conveyed three parts of their forces across this river,” i.e., three fourths of their whole force.

(Anthon). Helvētiōs is the subject of trādūxisse (M-T). Partēs is accusative governed by dūxisse

in composition, and flūmen is accusative governed by trāns (Anthon). Verbs compounded with a

preposition implying motion to or over may take an accusative of the place to which, or over

which, the movement is made without repeating the preposition (AG 267). So too verbs

compounded with a preposition implying motion from a place may take the ablative (M-T).

trēs partēs: Latin expresses fractions according to these rules (AG 135):

1) If the numerator is 1, express the fraction by the ordinal of the denominator with pars:

e.g., 1/3 = pars tertia;

2) If the denominator is larger by one than the numerator, express by the cardinal of the

numerator with partēs: e.g., ¾ = trēs partēs;

3) In other cases express the numerator by the cardinal, the denominator by the ordinal

in the feminine plural (partēs understood): e.g., 4/7 = quattuor septimae (M-T).

citrā flūmen Arārim: “on this side of the Arar river” i.e., on the east side (Harkness), up which

Caesar appears to have marched, so that he must have crossed it lower down from the territory of

the Segusiavi, who lived on the west bank. The place where the Helvetii crossed the Arar has

been fixed by different editors at Chalons (Cabillonum), Mâcon (Matisco), and not far above

Lyons (Lugdunum) (M-T). Note the accusative –im ending of Arārim (it has both Arārī and



Arāre for the ablative (H-T)). Gallic names were felt by the Romans as Greek and were treated

accordingly (A-G).

reliquam: = relictam: in fact, this adjective is, from its meaning (“left behind”), a kind of

participle (A-G).

dē tertiā vigiliā: “during (in the course of) the third watch” (L-E); “at the beginning of the third

watch,” i.e., at midnight. Dē, when joined with words expressing time, indicates that a part of

that time is spent along with the time which follows. Hence Caesar here set out before the third

watch was at an end (Spencer). The Romans divided the night into four watches each of three

hours. The first began at 6:00 in the evening, the second at 9:00, the third at midnight, and the

fourth at 3:00 in the morning (Anthon); the length of each vigilia differed according to the season

of the year (Spencer).

cum legiōnibus tribus: about 11,000 men (Kelsey); ablative of accompaniment (AG 413)

(Hodges).

pervēnit: he marched north along the east bank of the Saône (L-E).

castrīs: Caesar was then encamped in the country of the Segusiavi, probably in the northern

angle formed by the Rhône and the Saône (Hodges), not far from Lyon (Walpole). The Tigurini

were evidently not more than a few miles north of Caesar’s camp; and we may infer that the

route by which they had approached the Saône was the valley of the Formans which is

dominated on the left by hills that would have screened the Roman column from observation as it

marched from Sathonay (Holmes). The camps of the Romans were objects of particular

attention, and were remarkable for their regularity and order. The proper situation was selected



by persons sent in advance, under the direction of one of the tribunes. The form of the camp was

usually square, divided into two parts, and strongly fortified with a ditch (fossa), generally nine

feet deep and twelve broad, and rampart (vallum), made of the earth that was thrown up (agger),

with stakes (vallī) fixed at the top of it . There were four gates, one on each side (Spencer).

eōs impedītōs et inopīnantēs adgressus: with these few words two sentences are concisely

made into one; such telescoping of two coordinate ideas is a regular feature of Latin (A-G). The

emphasis gives a force like “while these were hampered (i.e., unable to defend themselves on

account of their burdens and because they were engaged in crossing the river (Hodges)) and not

expecting (it), he engaged them…” (Anthon). The fighting men, scattered throughout the

encampment, were completely surprised and had no chance to form a line of battle; the Roman

soldiers plied their savage short swords rapidly and effectively (Kelsey). Plutarch (Vit. Caes. 18)

and Appian (Celtica 1.3) say that it was his lieutenant Labienus who attacked the Helvetii on this

occasion; but, according to Caesar’s account, which, of course, is to be preferred, Labienus had

been left in charge of the works along the Rhône (see Chapter 10) (Anthon). Caesar gave all his

lieutenants, and especially Labienus, full credit for their exploits, and even if he had wished to

rob Labienus of his due, he must have known that every officer in the army would detect his lie,

and would make the truth known privately if not publicly (Holmes).

magnam partem eōrum concīdit: The place of this “slaughter” was probably a point about

twelve miles above the junction of the Saône and the Rhône. The rest of the Helvetii had crossed

here, or a little farther north (Hodges). Numerous burial mounds, both Roman and Celtic, have

been unearthed on the site of this battle, showing that burial was performed in great haste (L-E).

Carefully distinguish the verbs concīdō, concidō, and concēdō from one another (Hodges).



sēsē fugae mandārunt: = mandāvērunt (A-G) At all periods of the language there was a

tendency to drop v between vowels. Doubtless in many cases the v was retained in the written

form, but omitted in pronunciation (H-T). Sēsē is to be taken as the object of abdidērunt as well

as of mandārunt (Hodges): “committed themselves to flight,” where we should say “took to

flight” (Kelsey).

in proximās silvās: from the English point of view we might expect the ablative (place where

(AG 421)), but we have the accusative here because the verb implies motion into (AG 426)

(Walker): “they [fled] into the forests [and] hid themselves” (Harkness).

is pāgus appellābātur Tigurīnus: pāgus is used of local divisions of territory and also of the

inhabitants of the divisions (Hodges). This “district” or “canton” Tigurīnus (i.e., “that of the

Tigurini clan” (Anthon)) was about the modern-day Zurich. Its inhabitants probably composed a

clan and formed a division of the force (A-G). Pāgus here takes the place of pars, which had

been previously used in speaking of this division of the Helvetii (Anthon).

omnis: “as a whole” (L-E).

in quattuor pāgōs: Cellarius gives these four “cantons” as follows: Tiburīnus, Urbigēnus,

Ambronicus, Tugēnus. The first two we obtain from Caesar, the remainder from Eutropius,

Orosius, and Strabo. The only one of the four which is at all doubtful is that styled pāgus

Ambronicus, since the Ambrones were of German origin (Anthon).

hic pāgus ūnus: “this particular canton” (Anthon).

cum exīsset: = exiisset or exīvisset (L-E); pluperfect subjunctive in a cum-circumstantial clause

(AG 546).



patrum nostrōrum memoriā: “within the memory of our fathers” (Harkness); “in the time

(literally, “recollection”) of our fathers” (Hodges); ablative of time when (AG 423).

sub iugum mīserat: accusative place to which with sub since motion is implied (AG 426). See

Chapter 7 for a mention of this event: Caesar quod memoriā tenēbat L. Cassium cōnsulem

occīsum exercitumque ēius ab Helvētiīs pulsum et sub iugum missum… (Hodges): “because

Caesar remembered that the consul Lucius Cassius and his army had been routed and sent under

the yoke by the Helvetians…” The idiom sub iugum mittere describes the following practice: two

spears were stuck into the ground and a third was fastened across their tops. Under this “yoke”

(iugum) the captured soldiers, laying aside their arms and their outer garments, were compelled

to pass in token of defeat and humiliation (Hodges). In doing so they were of course obliged to

stoop, and were mocked by their enemies (Holmes). Note the etymology of our English word

“subjugate.” Caesar still has a bitter taste in his mouth as a result of this humiliation that took

place over 40 years before.

L. Cassium cōnsulem interfēcerat: this happened in 107 B.C. in the terrible invasion of the

Cimbri (or Teutons), to whom the Helvetians were joined as allies. The army of Cassius was one

of six swept away by these barbarians (see Chapter 7) (A-G).

cāsū: “by chance” (Kelsey).

cōnsiliō deōrum immortālium: “in accordance with the counsels of the immortal gods,” i.e., by

their special providence (Anthon). This reference to divine intercession is noticeable in so stern a

realist as Caesar, and was possibly for political effect. Yet he often speaks of fortune as powerful

in human affairs, and mentions divine omens which accompanied his victory over Pompey. A



disbeliever in the superstitions of his day, he yet seems to acknowledge the presence of a

controlling power (A-G).

quae pars…intulerat, ea prīnceps poenās persolvit: = ea pars…quae (Harkness); the

antecedent pars here appears only in the relative clause with the relative pronoun quae in

agreement (L-E). Render as “that part which had brought… (etc.) was the first to pay the

penalty” (or “to suffer punishment” (Anthon)), referring to the complete overthrow of the rest

later. Punishment was regarded among the ancients, not as suffering to be inflicted, but as of the

nature of a “fine” or “penalty” to be “paid”; hence poenās sūmere or capere, “to inflict

punishment,” and poenās dare or solvere, “to suffer punishment” (A-G). Persolvere is the more

intensive “to pay to the utmost” (Hodges).

īnsignem calamitātem: “a notable disaster” (Kelsey).

populō Rōmānō intulerat: “had inflicted upon the Roman people”; populō is dative with the

compound verb inferō (L-E) (AG 370).

prīnceps: used adverbially (Spencer).

quā in rē: “and thereby” (Hodges); “and herein” (Walpole).

iniūriās: “wrongs,” not simply “damage,” as the word came to mean afterwards. From Caesar’s

point of view, an offensive war against Rome is necessarily wrong (A-G).

quod eius socerī L. Pīsōnis avum, L. Pīsōnem lēgātum, Tigurīnī eōdem proeliō quō Cassium

interfēcerant: note the accumulation of appositives (AG 282): L. Pīsōnis with socerī; L.

Pīsōnem with avum; lēgātum with L. Pīsōnem (L-E): “because the Tigurini, in the same battle in



which they had slain Cassius (sc. interfēcerant (Harkness)), had also slain his lieutenant, Lucius

Piso, the grandfather of Lucius Piso, Caesar’s father-in-law.” Caesar, after having been divorced

from Pompeia, whose character had suffered in the affair of Clodius and his violation of the rites

of the Bona Dea, took, as a second wife, Calpurnia, the daughter of Lucius Calpurnius Piso, and

procured the consulship the next year for his father-in-law (58 B.C.), he himself having held it

the preceding year (Anthon).

lēgātum: notice how carefully titles are given, a matter of military and social etiquette (A-G).



BOOK 1, Chapter 13:

Hōc proeliō factō, reliquās cōpiās Helvētiōrum ut cōnsequī posset, pontem in Arārī

faciendum cūrat atque ita exercitum trādūcit. Helvētiī repentīnō ēius adventū commōtī cum id

quod ipsī diēbus XX aegerrimē cōnfēcerant, ut flūmen trānsīrent, illum ūnō diē fēcisse

intellegerent, lēgātōs ad eum mittunt; cuius lēgātiōnis Divicō prīnceps fuit, quī bellō Cassiānō

dux Helvētiōrum fuerat. Is ita cum Caesare ēgit: sī pācem populus Rōmānus cum Helvētiīs

faceret, in eam partem itūrōs atque ibi futūrōs Helvētiōs ubi eōs Caesar cōnstituisset atque esse

voluisset; sīn bellō persequī persevērāret, reminīscerētur et veteris incommodī populī Rōmānī et

prīstinae virtūtis Helvētiōrum. Quod imprōvīsō ūnum pāgum adortus esset, cum iī quī flūmen

trānsīssent suīs auxilium ferre nōn possent, nē ob eam rem aut suae magnopere virtūtī tribueret

aut ipsōs dēspiceret. Sē ita ā patribus māiōribusque suīs didicisse, ut magis virtūte contenderent

quam dolō aut īnsidiīs nīterentur. Quārē nē committeret ut is locus ubi cōnstitissent ex calamitāte

populī Rōmānī et interneciōne exercitūs nōmen caperet aut memoriam prōderet.

Caesar crosses the Saône (Holmes) and a delegation of Helvetians, headed by Divico, haughtily

asks for peace (L-E).

hōc proeliō factō: “after this battle” (Walpole).

reliquās: the emphasis on this word displaces the connective ut, which would naturally stand

first in its clause (A-G). Such a position before the conjunction ut is called hyperbaton (H-T).



ut cōnsequī posset: “in order to be able to overtake” (hence the frequent meaning “acquire”) (A-

G); the purpose of pontem faciendum cūrat (AG 530) (Harkness).

pontem faciendum cūrat: literally, “cares for a bridge to be built,” “cares for the building of a

bridge” (H-T); “he has a bridge made” (A-G); “causes a bridge to be constructed,” probably a

bridge of boats constructed from the vessels in which he conveyed his provisions up the river

(Harkness). Faciendum is a gerundive expressing purpose after a verb, not a preposition (AG

500.4) (L-E).

in Arārī: “over the Arar” (Anthon); note the ablative i-stem ending (cf. Arārim, Chapter 12).

Observe the exactness in the use of the Latin preposition in; we can say “Rome is on the Tiber,”

but the Romans says, Rōma ad Tiberim sita est (H-T).

exercitum: no doubt all six legions. The battle with the Tiburini had been fought with three

(Hodges).

repentīnō: “unexpected” (Kelsey).

commōtī: “alarmed” (Kelsey).

cum id…intellegerent: here cum may be translated “when,” but the clause gives the state of

mind of the Helvetii as the main feature of the situation, and really expresses no time at all, but

circumstance only, hence the subjunctive (AG 546) (A-G): “when they perceived that he had

done in a single day what they themselves had with very great difficulty accomplished in twenty

days” (Anthon).



diēbus XX: ablative of time within which (AG 423), so also ūnō diē: “in the course of twenty

days” (A-G). The great numbers of the Helvetii and their allies, and the large amount of baggage

which they must have carried, rendered their movements very slow (Hodges).

ut flūmen trānsīrent: “[namely],the crossing of the river” (Walker), literally, “that they might

cross the river.” (Anthon). This clause explains id quod confēcerant, and hence takes the usual

form of a substantive result clause depending on conficiō (AG 571) (Hodges). A subjunctive

after ut, as here, or an infinitive is often added to explain more clearly the reference of a

preceding clause (M-T).

cuius lēgātiōnis Divicō prīnceps fuit: “and at the head of this embassy was Divico” (Anthon).

Divicō was now an old man (between 70 and 80 years old (Kelsey)), since the battle in which he

was commander took place forty-nine years before. It was, of course, a piece of arrogance to

send him (A-G). The Helvetians preferred to avoid a conflict with Caesar, but the tone of

Divico’s language made a mutual understanding impossible (Kelsey).

prīnceps: i.e., the principal or leading person, = prīmum locum tenēns (Spencer).

dux Helvētiōrum: forty-nine years previous, the Tiburini, under the command of Divico,

undertook to invade the territory of the Allobroges by the bridge of Geneva and the fords of the

Rhône a little below this city. The rest of the Helvetii, together with their new allies, the Cimbri

and Teutones, moved south. This plan of operations compelled the Romans to divide their forces.

The consul Cassius hastened to Geneva, while his lieutenant Scaurus advanced against the

Cimbri and Teutones. Both commanders were unfortunate. Cassius and his army were cut to

pieces by the Helvetii on the borders of Lacus Lemannus (Lake Geneva), while Scaurus was

defeated and taken prisoner by those whom he had endeavored to oppose (Anthon).



bellō Cassiānō: Caesar names the war from the general on the Roman side (Hodges): “in their

war with Cassius,” i.e., in the war in which Cassius commanded the Roman army, 107 B.C.

(Anthon); ablative of time when (AG 423, 424), of words which do not in themselves signify

time but used in fixing a date: e.g. M. Messallam, M. Pisōne cōnsulibus, “in the consulships of

M. Messalla and M. Piso” (M-T).

ita…cum Caesare ēgit: “he discoursed as follows” (Harkness); “he treated thus with Caesar,”

i.e., addresses him thus (Anthon); ēgit serves as the verb of saying (from causam agere, “to carry

on a plea at court,” hence the absolute use of agere as “to plead” in a general sense (M-T)) and

therefore introduces indirect discourse. The indirect presentation of Divico’s speech extends to

the end of the chapter (Hodges). Remember the important facts about indirect discourse, that in

every declarative sentence the principal verb will be an infinitive, and that in every subordinate

clause the verb will be a subjunctive, following the rule of sequence of tenses. Usually the future

infinitive shows that the speaker used a future indicative, a present infinitive shows that he used

a present indicative, and a perfect infinitive shows that he used a past tense of the indicative

(Walker).

sī pācem populus Rōmānus cum Helvētiīs faceret…(etc.): Divico’s entire speech, as well as

Caesar’s response (in Chapter 14), is given in the form of indirect discourse, and it is confused

by a partial identification of Caesar and the Roman people. Hence, many of the forms might be

either third person as referring to the Roman people, or second or first as addressed to Caesar, or

spoken by him. It will be helpful in translating to consider the direct form of this address, with

changes from direct to indirect discourse underlined: Sī pācem…faciet, in eam partem ībunt

atque ibi erunt Helvētiī, ubi eos tū, Caesar, constitueris atque esse volueris (or Caesar

constituerit…voluerit); sīn bellō…persevērābit, reminīscere et veteris incommodī populī Rōmānī



et pristīnae virtūtis Helvētiōrum. Quod imprōvīsō ūnum pāgum adortus es, cum eī quī flūmen

trānsierant suīs auxilium ferre non possent, nōlī ob eam rem aut tuae magnopere virtūtī tribuere,

aut nōs dēspicere; nōs ita ā patribus māiōribusque nostrīs didicimus ut magis virtūte

contenderēmus (or contendāmus) quam dolō aut īnsidiīs nīterēmur (or nītāmur). Quā rē nōlī

commitere ut is locus ubi constitimus ex calāmitāte…nōmen capiat aut memoriam prōdat: “[He

says that], if the Roman people would make peace…, the Helvetii would go…and remain where

Caesar should settle them and desire them to be; but if they [the Roman people] should persist in

pursuing them…, let him [Caesar] remember… As to the fact that he had attacked…, he should

not ascribe it to…., or despise them [the Helvetians]. [That] they had [he said] been taught rather

to contend… Let him there not allow that place…to be…” (A-G).

in eam partem…ubi: “to whatever part,” i.e., of Gaul. They were not, however, to be turned

back from their migration (A-G).

atque ibi futūrōs: sc. esse: “and would remain there” (Anthon). Ibi = in quā (Kelsey).

Helvētiōs: the subject of itūrōs and futūrōs [esse] (Walker).

eōs: sc. Helvētiōs; the subject of esse. In the first part of this indirect discourse Divico does not

identify himself with the Helvetii, though he does later (M-T).

cōnstituisset, voluisset: “where he should have decided…and would have wanted” (Walker).

The pluperfect subjunctive can stand equally well for the perfect, the pluperfect, or the future

perfect indicative in indirect discourse (AG 512). The Helvetii do not promise to return to their

own country, and Caesar had not yet decided to settle them anywhere else; therefore cōnstituisset

must stand for a future perfect, a tense rarely used in English (Walker).



bellō: note the emphatic position as opposed to emphatic pācem (A-G).

sīn…persequī persevērāret: sc. eōs; the subject is Caesar (Harkness): “but if he [Caesar] should

continue to assail [them]” (Kelsey); “if, on the contrary” (i.e. not making peace with the

Helvetians), he should persist in the war.” Persevērāret stands for a future indicative (Walker).

Sīn (probably for sī nē, the nē negating the former alternative) is regularly used to introduce the

second of two conditions opposed to each other (M-T). Notice the doubled per in persequī

persevērāret (Hodges).

reminīscerētur: subjunctive for the imperative (reminīscere) in indirect discourse (AG 588),

like tribueret (H-T): “he should remember,” or “let him remember” (A-G).

veteris incommodī: “the old overthrow,” alluding to the defeat of Cassius (Anthon); “disaster”

(literally, “inconvenience”), a euphemism (A-G); genitive with a verb of remembering

(reminīscerētur) (AG 350).

prīstinae: “old-time” (Kelsey).

Helvētiōrum: referring in particular to the Tigurini, who defeated Cassius (Anthon).

quod imprōvīsō ūnum pāgum adortus esset: quod is a conjunction: “with regard to his having

attacked” (Walpole); “as to the fact that he had attacked one of their cantons by surprise

(Anthon); “as to the surprise attack which he had made,” quod is grammatically an accusative of

kindred meaning / cognate accusative (AG 390) after adortus esset (M-T). Divico was unwilling

to say fugāsset, because that would have derogated from the glory of the Helvetii, and allowed

too much to the skill and bravery of Caesar; hence he uses the language before us (Spencer).



imprōvīsō: “suddenly” (Kelsey); properly a neuter ablative absolute of the participle imprōvīsus,

“it having been unforeseen” (M-T).

adortus esset, trānsīssent, possent: subjunctive verbs (secondary sequence) in the subordinate

clauses of indirect discourse (AG 583) (Harkness).

cum: “at a time when” (Hodges).

ūnum pāgum: the Tigurini (A-G); see Chapter 12 (Anthon).

suīs: “to their people” (A-G).

nē ob eam rem…tribueret…dēspiceret: sc. quidquam; “he should not, on that account, ascribe

anything too highly to his own valor (“prowess” (Walker)), or greatly despise them,” i.e. he

should not attribute the defeat of the Helvetii altogether to his own valor, nor look down with

contempt on them (Anthon); this is a prohibition expressed indirectly (Hodges), like

reminīscerētur above.

suae, ipsōs: i.e., the Helvetii; suae refers to the subject of its own verb tribueret; ipsōs is for

sēipsōs, in antithesis to suae, where the sē refers to the subject of the main verb of the indirect

discourse (M-T).

magnopere: “overmuch” (Stock); really two words, magnō opere, used for the lacking adverb of

magnus (L-E).

sē…didicisse: the indirect discourse continues; didicisse is the perfect active infinitive of discō:

“that they had learned from their fathers and forefathers” (i.e., had been trained (H-T); in direct

discourse this would be indicative, didicerat (Harkness).



ut…contenderent, …nīterentur: result clauses (AG 571) (A-G).

magis…quam…nīterentur: “rather than to contend” (Harkness); “rather than to trust in” (L-E);

“rather than to rely on” (Harkness). This is an afterthought, and is governed by quam (AG 407)

(Stock).

dolō aut īnsidiīs: “by trickery or treachery”; “by means of stratagem, or of ambush” (Harkness);

ablatives of means (AG 409). The character which the Helvetii here give of themselves is borne

out by the author of the Bellum Africānum, who may have served under Caesar in Gaul, as he

certainly did in Africa: Gallōs, hominēs apertōs minimēque īnsidiōsōs, quī per virtūtem, nōn per

dolum dīmicāre consuērunt (Stock): “the Gauls, an open (genuine?) people and not in the least

treacherous, who were wont to fight not with trickery but with valor.”

nē committeret: again, subjunctive for the imperative in indirect discourse (AG 588), like nē

tribueret above: “that he should not allow” (Hodges); “that he should not bring it to pass”

(Anthon); “that he should not cause.” In the direct discourse, for committeret we should have the

present imperative, nōlī committe, “do not cause”; instead of cōnstitissent, the future perfect

indicative cōnstiterimus, “where we [the Helvetii] shall have taken our stand” (Harkness).

ut is locus…ex calamitāte populī Rōmānī…nōmen caperet.: “that the place…should receive a

name from the overthrow of the Roman people, etc.”; a substantive clause, object of committeret

(AG 561) (Hodges). The sense of the last sentence is “do not let the spot on which we stand

become famous as the scene of your bloody defeat” (Walker).

ubi constitissent: “where they had taken their stand” (M-T), referring to the Helvetii who had

not yet crossed the Saône (Spencer).



interneciōne: “extermination,” annihilation,” “utter destruction” (Walker); inter-, like per-, is

often used in composition to give or strengthen a meaning of destruction, e.g. perīre, interīre,

interimere, etc. (M-T). Divico uses a direct word to convey his threat, though he had used the

mild word incommodī to refer to the old disaster (Hodges).

aut memoriam prōderet: sc. calāmitātis interneciōnisque (Hodges): “or should transmit the

remembrance [of such an event] (“a record of disaster” (M-T)) to posterity.” The places where

great battles have been fought (as Marathon, Salamis, Cannae, etc.) have served to perpetuate the

memory of defeat and disgrace to the conquered, and of glory and renown to the conquerors

(Spencer). The conclusion of this speech is in full accordance with the boastful and arrogant

character ascribed to the Gauls by ancient writers (Anthon).



BOOK 1, Chapter 14:

Hīs Caesar ita respondit: eō sibi minus dubitātiōnis darī, quod eās rēs quās lēgātī Helvētiī

commemorāssent memoriā tenēret, atque eō gravius ferre quō minus meritō populī Rōmānī

accidissent; quī sī alicuius iniūriae sibi cōnscius fuisset, nōn fuisse difficile cavēre; sed eō

dēceptum, quod neque commissum ā sē intellegeret quārē timēret neque sine causā timendum

putāret. Quod sī veteris contumēliae oblīvīscī vellet, num etiam recentium iniūriārum, quod eō

invītō iter per prōvinciam per vim temptāssent, quod Haeduōs, quod Ambarrōs, quod Allobrogās

vexāssent, memoriam dēpōnere posse? Quod suā victōriā tam īnsolenter glōriārentur quodque

tam diū sē impūne iniūriās tulisse admīrārentur, eōdem pertinēre. Cōnsuēsse enim deōs

immortālēs, quō gravius hominēs ex commūtātiōne rērum doleant, quōs prō scelere eōrum ulcīscī

velint, hīs secundiōrēs interdum rēs et diūturniōrem impūnitātem concēdere. Cum ea ita sint,

tamen, sī obsidēs ab iīs sibi dentur, utī ea quae polliceantur factūrōs intellegat, et sī Haeduīs dē

iniūriīs quās ipsīs sociīsque eōrum intulerint, item sī Allobrogibus satisfaciant, sēsē cum iīs

pācem esse factūrum. Divicō respondit: ita Helvētiōs ā maiōribus suīs īnstitūtōs esse utī obsidēs

accipere, nōn dare, cōnsuērint; eius reī populum Rōmānum esse testem. Hōc respōnsō datō

discessit.

Caesar requires hostages and reparation for injuries done to the allies of Rome. The negotiations

are broken off (M-T).

hīs: “to them,” i.e., to the Helvetian lēgātī (Harkness).

Caesar ita respondit: observe that Caesar’s reply, occupying most of the chapter, is in the form

of indirect discourse (Harkness), like Divico’s speech preceding it.



eō sibi…putāret: Caesar’s response converted to direct discourse, with changes underlined: eō

mihi minus dubitātiōnis datur, quod eās rēs quās lagātī Helvētiī commemorāvērunt (or vōs

commemorāstis) memoriā teneō, atque eō gravius ferō, quō minus meritō populī Rōmānī

accidērunt, quī sī…sibi cōnscius fuisset, nōn fuit difficile cavēre, sed eō dēceptus est, quod neque

commissum ā sē intellegēbat quā rē timēret, neque sine causā timendum putābat. Quod sī…

oblivīscī velit (or velim), num etiam recentium iniūriārum, quod mē invītō iter…temptāstis, quod

Haeduōs,… vexāstis, memoriam dēpōnere potest (or possum). Quod vestrā victōriā…glōriāminī,

quodque tam diū vōs impūnē iniūriās tulisse admīrāminī, eōdem pertinent. Cōnsuērunt enim dī

immortālēs quō gravius hominēs…doleant, quōs prō scelere eōrum ulcīscī volunt…hīs

impūnitātem concēdere. Cum eā ita sint, tamen sī obsidēs ā vōbīs mihi dabuntur, utī ea quae

pollicēminī (vōs) factūrōs intellegam, et sī Haeduīs dē iniūriīs quās…intulistis… satisfaciētis,

(ego) cum vōbīs pācem faciam.

eō sibi minus dubitātiōnis darī quod: “that he felt the less hesitation (“the less perplexity” (L-

E)) on this account” (H-T), literally, “that less doubt was given him on this account, because…”

Caesar means that the very circumstances which the Helvetii had mentioned for the purpose of

intimidating him had only induced him to make up his mind more promptly on the question,

whether he would conclude a peace with them or go on with the war. For the defeat of Cassius

had happened undeservedly to the Romans, and he was resolved to avenge it (Anthon).

eō, quod: “for this reason, [namely] because…” Eō is ablative of degree of difference with

minus (AG 414), but almost equivalent to an ablative of cause (AG 404) (Hodges).

minus dubitātiōnis: minus is used as a neuter substantive (“less”), the accusative subject of darī

in indirect discourse, together with dubitātiōnis as a partitive genitive (AG 346),



eās rēs: i.e., the defeat of Cassius (Walker).

commemorāssent: = commemorāvissent.

memoriā tenēret: “he remembered” (Kelsey).

atque eō gravius ferre quō minus meritō populī Rōmānī accidissent: sc. sē: literally, “that he

bore them the more heavily” (Anthon), i.e., that he was all the more indignant. Eō…quō,

ablatives of degree of difference (AG 414), best rendered “the…the” (Harkness): “and that he

was the more annoyed, the less the Roman people deserved that they should have happened” (L-

E); “and that he felt the more indignant at them, the less they had happened in accordance with

the deserts (“through any fault” (Harkness)) of the Roman people,” i.e., that he resented them all

the more strongly, as they had happened undeservedly to his countrymen (Anthon); that he was

the more indignant in proportion to his conviction that the Romans the less deserved the defeat

they had met with under Crassus (Spencer). The Romans always considered their opponents the

aggressors (Hodges).

meritō populī Rōmānī: meritō is ablative of cause (AG 404) (Harkness): “in accordance with

what was due to the Roman people” (Kelsey).

quī sī alicuius iniūriae sibi cōnscius fuisset: “for if they (literally, “who,” referring to the

populus Rōmānus–Caesar uses the singular in referring to the collective noun populus, but

English prefers the plural (Walker)) had been conscious [to themselves] of an act of injury”

(Anthon), i.e., if they had been aware of having done any injury to the Helvetians (H-T); “if they

had been conscious of any wrong doing (L-E). Alicuius (from aliquis): according to the common

grammatical rule, it should have been sī cuius, but the ali- here has a peculiar force, and is

emphatic: if they had been conscious of any act of injustice, ever so trifling (Spencer). Iniūriae is



genitive and sibi is dative (not to be translated in English (L-E)), both governed by cōnscius, an

adjective pertaining to the mind (AG 349a).

nōn fuisse difficile: “it would not have been difficult” (Walker); for fuit in direct discourse (M-

T). This is a consequent clause (apodosis), and the verb accordingly has been changed because of

indirect discourse, i.e., in which the sentiments or speeches of a person are related in the third

person instead of the first. In direct discourse it would be, sī sibi cōnscius fuisset, nōn fuisset

difficile cavēre (Spencer).

cavēre: “to take precautions,” literally “to be on guard,” against reprisals, which the Roman

people would have expected if they had in any way wronged the Helvetians (Kelsey); subject of

fuisse, which in the direct discourse would be fuisset (Harkness).

eō dēceptum: sc. eum esse; referring to the populus Rōmānus: “that they had been deceived /

misled by this on this account” (L-E), viz. quod…intellegeret… putāret (Harkness). Eō is

ablative of means (AG 409) or ablative of cause (AG 404) (Walker); dēceptum is the perfect

passive infinitive (esse omitted) (M-T).

commissum ā sē: sc. esse and aliquid as an impersonal subject; translate with neque as if et nihil

commissum esse (Kelsey): “that they had not done anything” (H-T); “that no offence (thing) had

been committed” (Harkness); “that nothing had been done” (L-E).

ā sē: “by them,” i.e., the Roman people (L-E); ablative of agent (AG 405).

quārē timēret: quārē = propter quod, the antecedent of the quod being the omitted subject of

commissum (H-T): “they did not know that anything had been done by them on account of which

they should fear” (Hodges).



timendum: sc. sibi esse: “that they need fear” (Walker); “that they ought to fear,” literally “that

it should be feared,” or “that there should be fear”; an impersonal use of the gerundive in the

future passive periphrastic construction (AG 500.3) (Harkness).

quod sī vellet: “but even if he were willing” (Spencer); “but if he should consent” (H-T). The

sense here is, “if I were willing to forget the old outrage, can I put aside the memory of the recent

wrongs also?” (Hodges). Here the subject changes abruptly from populus Rōmānus to Caesar;

therefore supply ipse (L-E).

veteris contumēliae oblivīscī: “to forget their former insult (“indignity” (Kelsey)),” i.e., to the

Roman people in the defeat of Cassius (Harkness). Genitive with oblivīscī, a verb of forgetting

(AG 350).

quod: “the fact that.” The four clauses introduced by quod are substantive clauses (AG 560,

561), not causal clauses, and explain, i.e., are in apposition to, iniūriārum. The mood with this

quod in direct discourse is the indicative, but here, in indirect discourse, is subjunctive (L-E).

This repetition of a word (quod) is called anaphora (AG 598 f) (M-T).

quod temptāssent, vexāssent: = temptāvissent, vexāvissent: “in that they had attempted…in that

they had harrassed”; more freely, “in their having attempted…and having harrassed” (Anthon).

num etiam recentium iniūriārum…memoriam dēpōnere posse: “could he also lay aside the

remembrance (“recollection” (Harkness)) of recent injuries (“fresh outrages” (Kelsey))?” The

English order is, num etiam posse dēpōnere memoriam recentium iniūriārum? (Anthon). Regular

questions in indirect discourse take the verb in the subjunctive; but statements expressed in the

form of questions (i.e., rhetorical questions), like all simple statements, take the accusative and

infinitive (H-T). Notice that this sentence is interrogative and that in interrogative sentences in



indirect discourse the mood varies according to the person of the subject or the character of the

question (L-E).

eō invītō: eō = Caesare: “without his (Caesar’s) consent,” literally, “in spite of him being

unwilling” (Kelsey). Sē might have been used instead of eō (Harkness).

num posse: “he could not, could he?” (L-E); num expects the answer “no” (Spencer)),

recentium iniūriārum: objective genitive (AG 348) with memoriam; the iniūriārum are

explained by the following quod-clauses (Hodges).

quod: “the fact that”; these are substantive quod-clauses, in apposition with iniūriārum. In direct

discourse such clauses employ the indicative (Walker).

Allobrogās: Greek accusative form of a foreign word (M-T).

dēpōnere: “put aside” (Kelsey).

quod victōriā…glōriārentur: “the fact that they boasted so insolently of their victory” (H-T),

i.e., their victory over the Romans under Cassius in 107 B.C. The clauses with quod are the

subject of pertinēre (Harkness). Victōriā is the ablative object of glōrior (AG 431). This quod-

clause differs from those in the previous sentence only in having no noun to explain; in this use it

is said to be in the adverbial accusative (L-E). In the speech of Divico, as quoted by Caesar, we

do not find any boasting. Probably, however, it was indulged in, as being characteristic of the

people and their neighbors (Spencer).

quod sē impūne iniūriās tulisse admīrārentur: “as to their wonder that they had so long

carried off their wrongdoings with impunity”; sē refers to the subject of admīrārentur (M-T);

“that they (the Helvetii) had for so long a time carried off their misdeeds (“that they had inflicted



injury” (Hodges)) without punishment,” i.e., had escaped punishment for their misdeeds (L-E);

“that they had carried out their crimes with impunity,” i.e., had not been punished for them

(Harkness); “that they so long had kept on perpetrating wrongs without punishment” (Kelsey).

eōdem pertinēre: “[both of these things] tended to the same result” (Walker), were of a similar

tendency, i.e., only tended the more surely to provoke his anger (Anthon); “pointed in the same

direction,” toward impending retribution for the wrongs committed by the Helvetians (Kelsey);

“amount to the same thing,” literally, “tended to the same place.” The subject of pertinēre is the

preceding clauses (H-T). The sense is, “the fact of their so insolently exulting in their victory,

and of their wonder at having so long (fifty years) gone unpunished for their wrong doings,

pointed in the same direction,” this direction being the coming vengeance (Walpole).

cōnsuēsse: = cōnsuēvisse; a perfect with present meaning (AG 205 note 2) (Hodges): “they are

wont” (Kelsey).

enim: note that the conjunctions meaning “for,” enim (always postpositive (AG 324 j), etenim,

nam, namque, introduce independent sentences (Hodges).

quō gravius hominēs ex commūtātiōne rērum doleant: “that men may feel the heavier

affliction (“may grieve the more” (H-T)) from a change of circumstances,” i.e., from a reversal

of fortune (Anthon); purpose clause introduced with quō when a comparative (gravius) is present

in the clause (AG 531.2a) (Harkness). Rērum is an objective genitive with commūtātiōne (AG

348). Notice that the tense of doleant is present subjunctive, though this speech depends on

respondit, a secondary tense (Hodges); the primary tenses are used here because the statement

made is a general one, and therefore true in the present as well as the past (M-T).



So far in this chapter the subjunctive tenses have all been imperfects and pluperfects, because the

indirect discourse depends on the past verb respondit. But it is quite common for the writer of

indirect discourse to use the tenses that were used in the direct form instead of following the rule

of sequence of tenses. Thus presents and perfects are used to the end of this chapter. This usage,

called repraesentātiō, is due to the same desire for vividness which leads to the use of the

historical present for a past tense. It is usually better to translate the historical present indicative

by a past (Walker).

quōs prō…concēdere: the order is, concēdere interdum secundiōrēs rēs et diūturniōrem

impūnitātem hīs, quōs vellent ulcīscī prō scelere eōrum (Anthon). The relative clause is put first;

the antecedent of quōs is hīs in the clause following (H-T). Concēdere depends on consuēsse

(Hodges).

eōrum: “their,” literally, “of them,” referring to quōs (Harkness).

velint: the subjunctive would be used even in direct discourse (Harkness).

hīs: “to those” (Kelsey), the antecedent of quōs (Harkness).

secundiōrēs rēs: “greater prosperity,” literally, “more prosperous things” (Harkness); “a

considerable degree of prosperity” (L-E).

diūurniōrem impūnitātem: “more prolonged (“quite long” (L-E)) escape from punishment”

(Kelsey). Observe that the comparative may be rendered by “too,” “rather,” “quite,” or any term

expressing a comparison (AG 291 a) (L-E).

cum ea ita sint: “that, although these things were so,” i.e., although this was the case (Anthon).

Sint is an historical present (AG 469) (Harkness).



tamen: this adverb indicates that the cum-clause preceding it has an adversative / concessive

force. Join it with sēsē…factūrum (Harkness).

dentur, intellegat, satisfaciant: present subjunctive, perhaps influenced by the tenses in the

preceding section. Caesar here changes from the historic to the speaker’s original tenses (M-T).

sī obsidēs ab iīs sibi dentur: protasis to sēsē…factūrum (Hodges).

ab iīs: = ab eīs; ablative of agent (AG 405).

utī ea quae polliceantur factūrōs intellegat: “in order that he may perceive that they intend to

fulfil their promises,” i.e., that he may perceive their sincerity by the fact of their giving

hostages. The promises referred to are that they will go into such part of Gaul as Caesar may

appoint, and will dwell there for the time to come (Anthon).

factūrōs: sc. eōs and esse: “they they would do” (L-E).

ea: the object of facturōs [esse], the subject of which is eōs, referring to the Helvetii (Harkness).

sī Haeduīs…Allobrogibus satisfaciant: “if they will give satisfaction to the Aedui, and likewise

to the Allobroges, for the wrongs they have done them and their allies…” (L-E); “they should

make restitution to…” (Kelsey); literally, “do enough for the Haeduī and for the Allobroges,”

i.e., satisfy (H-T); dative with satisfaciant (AG 368.2).

ipsīs sociīsque: datives with the compound verb intulerint (AG 370).

ipsīs, eōrum: referring to the Haedui. Ipsīs, “themselves,” in contrast with their allies

(Harkness).

sēsē: i.e., Caesar (Walker).



ita Helvētiōs ā maiōribus suīs īnstitūtōs esse: “that the Helvetians had inherited such traditions

from their ancestors” (Kelsey); “that the Helvetians had been trained in this way by their

ancestors.”

utī…consuērint: = consuēverint: “they they are accustomed” (Kelsey); consuērint governs the

infinitives accipere and dare. A substantive clause of result (AG 568). Perfect with a present

meaning (M-T).

eius reī…esse testem: “that the Roman people were witnesses of this,” alluding to the hostages

given by the survivors after the defeat and death of Cassius (Harkness); “that the Roman people

themselves were a proof of that custom” (Anthon); “that the Roman people could furnish

testimony to this” (Kelsey).

hōc respōnsō datō: “after making this reply” (Kelsey).

discessit: sc. Divicō; “he withdrew” (Kelsey).



BOOK 1, Chapter 15:

Posterō diē castra ex eō locō movent. Idem facit Caesar equitātumque omnem, ad

numerum quattuor mīlium, quem ex omnī prōvinciā et Haeduīs atque eōrum sociīs coāctum

habēbat, praemittit, quī videant quās in partēs hostēs iter faciant. Quī cupidius novissimum

agmen īnsecūtī aliēnō locō cum equitātū Helvētiōrum proelium committunt; et paucī dē nostrīs

cadunt. Quō proeliō sublātī Helvētiī, quod quīngentīs equitibus tantam multitūdinem equitum

prōpulerant, audācius subsistere nōn numquam et novissimō agmine proeliō nostrōs lacessere

coepērunt. Caesar suōs ā proeliō continēbat, ac satis habēbat in praesentiā hostem rapīnīs,

pābulātiōnibus populātiōnibusque prohibēre. Ita diēs circiter XV iter fēcērunt utī inter

novissimum hostium agmen et nostrum prīmum nōn amplius quīnīs aut sēnīs mīlibus passuum

interesset.

The Helvetians resume their march, defeating Caesar’s cavalry; Caesar follows (Kelsey).

posterō diē: “on the following day”; ablative of time when (AG 423).

idem: neuter accusative (Kelsey): “the same [thing]”.

castra movent: sc. Helvētiī as the subject (Harkness): “march on.” They could not march due

west toward the Santones because the country is too mountainous. They therefore marched north,

then northwest, intending to reach the Liger (Loire) and march down its valley (Walker).

equitātum omnem…quem ex omnī prōvinciā: Caesar had no Roman cavalry in Gaul

(Harkness). The Roman infantry were always excellent, but their cavalry were comparatively

infirm. Hence we find them generally employing the cavalry of their allies, and, in particular,



Gallic horsemen. Caesar’s cavalry was composed at first of Gauls, afterward German horsemen

were also added (Anthon).

coāctum habēbat: almost = coēgerat (L-E): literally, “had collected,” more strictly, “held (had

in hand) after being collected” (A-G). Coāctum agrees with quem, the object of habēbat

(Hodges). Habeō, with certain participles, forms a periphrasis (Spencer).

quī videant: “to see” (Kelsey); subjunctive in a relative purpose clause (AG 351.2) (Harkness);

the antecedent of quī is the collective idea contained in equitātum, as if equitēs had been used

(H-T); for that reason the verb videant is plural.

quās in partēs: “in what direction” (Kelsey).

faciant: subjunctive in an indirect question (AG 574), quās being interrogative (A-G).

quī…insecūtī: “but they, having pursued” (Anthon).

cupidius: “too eagerly” (A-G); comparative degree adverb (AG 218).

novissimum agmen: “the rearguard” of the Helvetians; agmen is the army in line of march

(agō) (A-G), and the novissimum agmen is that part of the line of march which is “latest” to one

watching an army march by (M-T).

aliēnō loco: “in a disadvantageous place” (Anthon), literally “in a place belonging to another”

(Harkness); “on unfavorable ground”; so suō locō would be “on one’s own (hence, “favorable”)

ground” (A-G). The land was probably too hilly to admit of free movement (Kelsey). Ablative of

place where (AG 429.4).

paucī dē nostrīs: “a few of our men” (Harkness); dē nostrīs = nostrōrum, the use of a

prepositional phrase in place of the partitive genitive (AG 346c); this use of the preposition is an



anticipation of the part dē was to play in noun inflection in the Romance languages. This

preposition, we may say, exerted the strongest influence for the breakdown of the inflectional

system (H-T).

paucī…cadunt: from this we can infer that the rest made good their escape through flight

(Kelsey). The rest fled at the instigation of their commander, the treacherous Dumnorix, as

Caesar afterwards learned (L-E).

quō proeliō: “by this battle,” ablative of means (AG 409) or “because of this battle,” ablative of

cause (AG 404).

sublātī: “being elated” (Anthon); “lifted up,” “emboldened” (M-T); from tollō (Hodges).

quod…prōpulerant: “because they had routed”; but the 4000 cavalry of Caesar were Gauls,

only the officers being Romans (Kelsey). Caesar’s reason, as shown by the indicative mood

(Harkness).

equitibus: ablative of means (AG 409) (A-G).

audācius subsistere coepērunt: “began to make a bolder stand” (Anthon). Audācius, a

comparative degree adverb, is translated literally as “more boldly,” “with greater boldness”

(Kelsey).

novissimō agmine: “with the rear of their column” (Hodges), “with their rearguard” (Walker),

attacking the Romans who were following them (Kelsey); “at their rear”; ablative of means (AG

409) or ablative of place where (AG 429.4) (A-G)

proeliō: ablative of manner (AG 412) or means (AG 409) (A-G).

nostrōs: “our men” (Kelsey); masculine plural adjective used as a substantive (AG 302d).



lacessere: “to harass” (Kelsey); “to challenge” (Walker).

suōs: “his soldiers” (Kelsey); like nostrōs above, a substantive.

satis habēbat: “held it sufficient” (A-G); “deemed (“considered” (Hodges)) it sufficient”; the

object of habēbat is the clause hostem…prohibēre (Harkness). Caesar had never before

commanded so large an army or met so strong an enemy. His army was outnumbered by an

enemy whom the Romans had long dreaded. Defeat meant the total destruction of his army.

Nothing was lost by postponing the battle. Therefore he wisely decided to wait until he could

choose his own time and place (Walker).

in praesentiā: “for the present” (Anthon); ablative of time when (AG 423).

hostem…prohibēre: in a kind of predicate agreement with satis, as the object of habēbat (A-G).

rapīnīs, pābulātiōnibus populātiōnibusque: “from pillaging, foraging, and laying waste” the

country (Kelsey); ablatives of separation (AG 400-402) with prohibēre.

ita…utī: “in such a way that” (correlatives) (A-G). Caesar was obliged to follow the Helvetii

because there was no place along their route where he could attack them with advantage or head

them off (L-E).

diēs circiter XV: accusative of duration of time (AG 423) (AG). Circiter is here an adverb (M-T).

utī…interesset: result clause (AG 537.1): “in such a way that there was an interval” (M-T).

nostrum prīmum: sc. agmen: “our vanguard,” literally “our first line” (Harkness). Caesar’s

intention was to join battle with the Helvetii, before they should proceed much farther through

Gaul and reach the territory of the Santones. His object in following them for so long a period was

to get the enemy on disadvantageous ground, and then engage and conquer them. The Helvetii



constantly avoiding a general action, Caesar left the line of march and went to Bibracte, for two

reasons: one was in order to procure corn for his army; the other was to impress the Helvetii with

the belief that the Romans were fleeing, and thus to induce them to hazard an action. The latter

event actually happened as he expected it would (Anthon).

quīnīs aut sēnīs: quīnīs and sēnīs are distributives (“five or six [each day]” (Walker)), implying

that this was the constant or average daily distance between the two armies. They apparently

marched along the Saône, in the direction of Chalon. Their exact route from the Saône towards

Autun is uncertain. The country here is very irregular and broken; so that it was impossible for

Caesar to get any advantage by a rapid march or by an attack on the Helvetian rear. (A-G).

nōn amplius quīnīs aut sēnīs mīlibus passuum interesset: “that there was an interval of not

more than five or six miles between them” (L-E). Caesar was waiting until a favorable opportu-

nity for attacking should present itself (Hodges). He consequently followed them at a distance,

watching for his chance (A-G). Amplius, “more,” is the subject of interesset (Kelsey); quīnis,

sēnīs mīlibus is the ablative of comparison (AG 406). Interesset is used impersonally (L-E).



BOOK 1, Chapter 16:

Interim cotīdiē Caesar Haeduōs frūmentum, quod essent pūblicē pollicitī, flāgitāre. Nam

propter frīgora [quod Gallia sub septentriōnibus, ut ante dictum est, posita est,] nōn modo

frūmenta in agrīs mātūra nōn erant, sed nē pābulī quidem satis magna cōpia suppetēbat; eō autem

frūmentō quod flūmine Arārī nāvibus subvēxerat proptereā ūtī minus poterat quod iter ab Arārī

Helvētiī āverterant, ā quibus discēdere nōlēbat. Diem ex diē dūcere Haeduī: cōnferrī, comportārī,

adesse dīcere. Ubi sē diūtius dūcī intellēxit et diem īnstāre quō diē frūmentum mīlitibus mētīrī

oportēret, convocātis eōrum prīncipibus, quōrum magnam cōpiam in castrīs habēbat, in hīs

Dīviciācō et Liscō, quī summō magistrātuī praeerat, quem vergobretum appellant Haeduī, quī

creātur annuus et vītae necisque in suōs habet potestātem, graviter eōs accūsat, quod, cum neque

ēmī neque ex agrīs sūmī possit, tam necessāriō tempore, tam propinquīs hostibus ab iīs nōn

sublevētur, praesertim cum magnā ex parte eōrum precibus adductus bellum suscēperit [; multō

etiam gravius quod sit dēstitūtus queritur].

The Haedui delay furnishing Caesar’s army grain. Caesar calls a council of their chiefs (H-T).

interim: i.e., during the fifteen days of marching (Walker).

Caesar: the Roman general was in a perilous situation, being far from his own supplies, in the

midst of only half-hearted allies, and confronted by a vigilant foe. Caesar was careful of his

supplies (L-E).



Haeduōs frūmentum…flāgitāre: “demanded corn of the Haedui.” Flāgitāre is an historical

infinitive, = flāgitābat (AG 463), precisely the verb to be employed here, since it denotes an

earnest and reiterated demand, accompanied with reproaches. The historical infinitive serves to

impart greater animation to the style than the ordinary imperfect would (Anthon). The double

accusative is used with flāgitāre ̶ the thing demanded (frūmentum) and the person of whom the

demand is made (Haeduōs).

quod essent…pollicitī: “which (as Caesar said) they had promised”; in making his demand

Caesar reminded them of their promise (Hodges). Caesar the writer presents the statement of

Caesar the commander as if it were quoted from someone else, hence the subjunctive (Kelsey).

This subordinate clause employs the subjunctive to imply that Caesar made the statement in

demanding the grain. It is indirect discourse; but, because there is no verb of saying and the

clause does not depend on an accusative and infinitive, it is called “implied indirect discourse”

(Walker). The subjunctive may be explained by the fact that the antecedent is indefinite:

“whatever grain they had promised” (Harkness). Or the subjunctive may be used because the

clause is used to describe or characterize frūmentum as well as to state that they had promised it

(the subjunctive of characteristic (AG 534) (H-T).

pūblicē: “as a state” (M-T); “in the name of the state,” literally, “publicly,” referring to the

promise made by the chiefs (Harkness).

propter frīgora: “because of the cold seasons,” or “spells of cold” (A-G); “on account of the

cold climate” (Harkness); the plural is here employed to impart additional emphasis (Anthon)

and to show the continued cold (H-T); the singular would refer more to coldness in the abstract

(Harkness). The climate of Gaul in Caesar’s day was much colder than that of France now. The



change has come from clearing away the forests and draining the marshes, which then covered

much of the country (A-G).

quod Gallia…posita est: “Gaul lying”; a parenthetic clause (Walpole).

sub septentriōnibus: literally, “under the northern stars” (Walker), i.e., towards the north.

Caesar here speaks of Gaul in its relation to the more southern position of Italy (Anthon).

ut ante dictum est: see Chapter 1 (Harkness).

frūmenta mātūra nōn erant: the plural of frūmentum is regularly used of “standing grain” (A-

G) as opposed to the singular, which is “harvested grain” (L-E). The crops of grain were not

“ripe” (mātūra) because it was too early in the season (A-G). This must have been taking place

in late June̶̶ early July according to the calendar in use at the time, but as the calendar was in

great confusion before Caesar reformed and regulated it (which was 46 B.C., twelve years

afterwards), the month of June answered to our April (Spencer).

nē pabulī quidem: “not even of fodder” required for the pack animals as well as the horses of

the cavalry (Kelsey). The emphatic word always stands between the nē and quidem (H-T).

Pabulī is partitive genitive dependent on cōpia (AG 346). ): the green fodder was scarce as well,

because Caesar was following in the path of the Helvetians, whose thousands of cattle had swept

the country bare (A-G).

suppetēbat: “was at hand,” equivalent to ad manum erat, or the simple aderat (Anthon).

eō autem frūmentō…nōlēbat: “besides (autem) he was unable to make use of the corn which he

had brought up the river Arar in vessels, for this reason (proptereā), because the Helvetii, from

whom he was unwilling to depart, had turned away their line of march from the Arar” (A-G).



frūmentō: ablative with ūtor (AG 410) (A-G). Besides his pay, each soldier was furnished with

clothes, and received a certain allowance (dīmensum) of corn, commonly four bushels a month.

For these things a part of his pay was deduced. The soldiers prepared and made bread for

themselves out of the grain or corn (Spencer).

flūmine, nāvibus: ablatives of means (AG 409) (Harkness).

quod…subvēxerat: “which he had brought up the river Saône in boats” (Hodges). Sub, prefixed

with verbs of motion, implies motion to or from below (M-T).

flūmine: “by way of the river” (L-E); ablative of way by which / route (AG 429a).

minus poterat: “could not very well”; minus is often a weaker nōn (Hodges).

iter ab Arārī āverterant: the Helvetians had at first followed the valley of the Arar (Saône)

northward, but now “had turned away from the Arar” and passed westward into the valley of the

Liger (Loire), avoiding the mountainous country opposite the place where they had crossed the

Arar (Kelsey). Caesar, in pursuing the Helvetii, who had turned away from the river, had been

obliged to leave his supplies (Harkness).

diem ex diē dūcere Haeduī: sc. eum: “the Aedui were putting him off from day to day” (H-T),

more literally, “protracted the affair (i.e., the bringing of corn) from day to day” (Anthon). Diem

is accusative of duration of time (AG 423.2) (A-G) with an adverbial force (Walpole).

dūcere, dīcere: historical infinitives (AG 463) (A-G). These infinitives are as if the writer did

not stop to concern himself about the proper mood and tense, but hurried on, leaving the verb

indefinite (H-T).



cōnferrī, comportārī, adesse dīcere: sc. frūmentum: note the climax, “they kept saying that it

(i.e., the grain) was being gathered, it was on the way, it was already at hand” (A-G). They

assured him, at one time, that the corn was getting collected by individuals; at another, that these

individuals were bringing it in to some place specified by the magistrates, in order to form the

requisite supply for the Romans; and, at another time again, they told him it was actually on the

road to his army, and near at hand (Anthon). Conferrī, comportārī, and adesse are infinitives in

indirect discourse dependent on dīcere (Harkness). By the omission of connectives (asyndeton

(AG 323b, 601c) the climax is heightened (Hodges).

sē diūtius dūcī: “that he was being put off off too long” (Walker), “longer than was right”

(Hodges).

diem…quō diē: “the day when” (H-T); “the day on which” (Walker). Note the repetition of the

antecedent in the relative clause, but do not translate it (A-G).

īnstāre: “was near” (Kelsey).

frūmentum mīlitibus mētīrī oportēret: sc. sē with oportēret; the object of mētīrī is frūmentum.

The clause frūmentum…metīrī is the subject of oportēret (Harkness), which is subjunctive in a

subordinate clause in indirect discourse (AG 583) (Walker): “[the day on which] he must serve

grain to the soldiers” (A-G), literally, “to measure out the grain” (Kelsey). This is a reference to

the distribution of rations of corn and fodder (menstruum, derived from mensis, the distribution

having been originally monthly) (M-T) or twice a month (Walker). The monthly allowance to

each foot-soldier was four bushels of corn; to the equitēs, 12 of corn and 42 of barley (Walpole).

convocātis eōrum prīncipibus: “summoning their chiefs” (L-E); ablative absolute (AG 419).

Dīviciācō et Liscō: sc. convocātīs (L-E); ablative in apposition with prīncipibus (A-G).



quī summō magistrātuī praeerat: “who was invested with the chief magistracy” (Anthon);

“who held the chief office” (A-G), literally, “presided over the highest magistracy” (Harkness).

Magistrātuī is dative with the compound verb praesum (AG 370).

quem…appellant Haeduī: “whom the Aedui call…” (Harkness). Quem refers not to the

magistracy but to the person invested with it (Spencer). Quem and vergobretum are double

accusative objects of appellant (AG 393) (Walker).

vergobretum: the title of their chief magistrate (Harkness). The term is derived, by Celtic

scholars, from Fear-go-breith, equivalent to vir ad iūdicium, i.e., “a man for judging” or “trying

cases.” In Celtic, fear is “a man,” go “to” or “for,” and breatam, “a judge” (Anthon). Caesar tells

us (VII,33) that this officer was not permitted to go beyond the limits of the state during his term;

and that no one could be vergobret while one of his family who had held the position was living

(L-E). Down to the time of the French Revolution, the magistrate of Autun was called Verg or

Vierg. Autun is near the site of the Haeduan town Bibracte (Hodges).

quī creātur annuus: “who is appointed for one year.” He was elected annually by a council of

priests (M-T). Annuus agrees with quī (Harkness), the antecedent of which is verbogretum

(Kelsey); it is here a predicate adjective, where English idiom would require an adverb

(“annually”) (Hodges).

vītae necisque…potestātem: “the power of life and death” (Kelsey).

in suōs: “over his people (“countrymen” (Kelsey))” (A-G).

eōs accūsat: “he took them to task” (Kelsey); historical present (AG 469).

possit: sc. frūmentum (A-G); subjunctive in a cum-causal clause (AG 549).



tam necessāriō tempore: “on so urgent an occasion” (Anthon); “at such a critical time”

(Harkness); “at so urgent a crisis (as now)” (M-T).

tam propinquīs hostibus: “with the enemy [being] so near”; an ablative absolute (AG 419a).

eōrum precibus adductus: see Chapter 11 (Anthon).

nōn sublevētur…quod sit dēstitūtus: nōn sublevētur (“is not assisted) is opposed to sit

dēstitūtus (“has been abandoned”) (M-T): “because (as he said) he received no help from from

them,” literally, “was not helped by them” (Kelsey); “of his having been left unaided by them,”

i.e., not having been supplied with corn (Anthon). The subjunctive implies that these reasons

were assigned by the speaker. In other words, Caesar here quotes his own language in implied

indirect discourse (Walker).

praesertim cum: “especially since” (Kelsey).

magnā ex parte: “to a great extend” (Hodges); “in great measure” (Kelsey).

eōrum precibus: “by their entreaties” (Kelsey). Caesar accused the Haedui of ingratitude in not

helping him, when he was acting in response to their prayers (Hodges).

bellum: “campaign” against the Helvetians (Kelsey).

multō gravius: he complained “much more bitterly” because they had played him false

(Hodges). Multō is the ablative of degree of difference (AG 414).

sit dēstitūtus: translate as it pluperfect, “he had been abandoned, left destitute by them,” i.e.,

they had not supplied him with the necessary corn (Spencer). The time of this verb (perfect

subjunctive) is past relative to that of the main verb queritur, which is a historical present, “he

complained” (Kelsey).



BOOK 1, Chapter 17:

Tum dēmum Liscus ōrātiōne Caesaris adductus quod anteā tacuerat prōpōnit: esse nōn

nūllōs, quōrum auctōritās apud plēbem plūrimum valeat, quī prīvātī plūs possint quam ipsī

magistrātūs. Hōs sēditiōsā atque improbā ōrātiōne multitūdinem dēterrēre, nē frūmentum

cōnferant quod dēbeant: praestāre, sī iam prīncipātum Galliae obtinēre nōn possint, Gallōrum

quam Rōmānōrum imperia perferre, neque dubitāre [dēbeant] quīn, sī Helvētiōs superāverint

Rōmānī, ūnā cum reliquā Galliā Haeduīs lībertātem sint ēreptūrī. Ab īsdem nostra cōnsilia

quaeque in castrīs gerantur hostibus ēnūntiārī; hōs ā sē coercērī nōn posse. Quīn etiam, quod

necessāriam rem coāctus Caesarī ēnūntiārit, intellegere sēsē quantō id cum perīculō fēcerit, et ob

eam causam quam diū potuerit tacuisse.

Liscus tells Caesar that a powerful faction among the Haedui is working against the Romans

(Walker).

quod anteā tacuerat prōpōnit: sc. id as the object of prōpōnit and antecedent of quod (A-G):

“he discloses (“declares,” literally, “brings forward” (Kelsey)) what he had previously concealed

(“kept to himself” (Kelsey)). Taceō is one of those intransitive verbs which obtain a transitive

force, because an action exerted upon another object is implied though not described in them

(Anthon). Quod is accusative of reference, used as if it were the object of tacuerat (Walpole).

esse nōn nūllōs…tacuisse: Liscus’ response to Caesar is entirely in the form of indirect

discourse; the corresponding direct discourse is as follows, with changes underlined: Sunt nōn



nūllī quōrum auctōritās…valeat, quī prīvātim plūs possint quam ipsī magistrātūs. Hī…

multitūdinem dēterrent nē frūmentum cōnferant quod dēbent: praestat, sī iam prīncipātum…

obtinēre nōn possunt, Gallōrum…imperia…perferre; neque dubitant quīn, sī Helvētiōs

superāverint Rōmānī,… lībertātem sint ēreptūrī. Ab eīsdem vestra (or Rōmānōrum) consilia

quaeque in castrīs gerantur (geruntur) hostibus ēnūntiantur; hī ā mē coercērī nōn possunt. Quīn

etiam, quod necessāriam rem coāctus Caesarī (tibi) ēnūntiāvī, intellegō quantō id cum perīculō

fēcerim, et ob eam causam quam diū potuī tacuī (A-G).

esse nōn nūllōs: “that there are some men” (Kelsey).

plūrimum valeat: “carries very great weight” (Kelsey); “is very powerful.” The subjunctive is

employed, as indicating the sentiments and conviction of the speaker, not of the historian

himself. So also possint, immediately after (Anthon).

quī prīvātī plūs possint: “who have more influence as private individuals” (H-T), i.e., not as

holding official authority from the state (M-T). Earlier editions and many of the MSS. have

prīvātim, “in their private capacity,” which is not by any means a bad reading (Anthon). Possint

stands for possunt in direct discourse (H-T). The state of affairs here depicted arose from the

feudal organization of society, which rendered it possible for the great landholders to control

multitudes of personal adherents (Kelsey); an unhallowed alliance like that of Ap. Claudius

Censor at Rome, between the high aristocrats and the common people against the republican

government (Moberly).

quam ipsī magistrātūs: the ablative of comparison without quam might have been used instead

of this nominative (AG 407) (Walker).

hōs: sc. prīvātōs (Spencer), referring to nōnnūllōs, these same individuals (Anthon).



sēditiōsā atque improbā ōrātiōne: “by seditious and wicked speech” (Anthon);“…and reckless

talk” (A-G); “…and shameless propagandism.” Among the Aeduans there was a strong party

opposed to the Romans (Kelsey).

dēterrēre: “were holding back” by inspiring fear (Hodges); “were preventing” (Walker).

nē…cōnferant: “from bringing” (A-G); “from furnishing” (Hodges). Nē expresses a purpose

negatively (AG 531.1) (Spencer). Alternatively: Nē (or quōminus) with its subjunctive verb after

a verb of hindrance (here, dēterrēre) (AG 558) is conveniently translated by “from” with the

present participle (L-E); the plural is used because of the idea of plurality inherent in

multitūdinem (Harkness).

quod dēbeant: sc. conferre (Walpole).

praestāre, sī iam…imperia perferre: sc. hōs putāre; praestāre is impersonal (L-E), “[they

think] that it is better,” “it is preferable” (L-E); parenthetical indirect discourse, summarizing the

line of argument (the sēditiōsa ōrātiō mentioned previously) by which the anti-Roman leaders, of

whom Liscus speaks, influenced the Aeduan populace (Kelsey): “adding that, if they (the Aedui)

cannot hold any longer the sovereignty of Gaul, it is better (for them) to submit to the dominion

of Gauls than of Romans,” i.e., it is better for them to obey the Helvetii, Gauls like themselves,

than total strangers like the Romans (Anthon).

iam…nōn: “no longer” (Walpole).

obtinēre, perferre: obtinēre = diūtius tenēre, for the Aedui had at one time, as Caesar himself

informs us (Chapter 43), enjoyed the dominion over all Gaul (Anthon). Obtinēre and perferre are

both subjective infinitives (AG 452), the subjects of praestāre.



neque dubitāre quīn: sc. hōs (L-E) or sē (Walpole): “and that they ought not to entertain a

doubt but that…” (Anthon); “nor should they doubt that”; dubitāre governs a clause of hesitation

with quīn and the subjunctive (AG 558a, 559).

Gallōrum…perferre…neque dubitāre [dēbeant]: sc. sē: “that they prefer the rule of the Gauls

(i.e., of Helvetians (Kelsey)) rather than that of the Romans, and that they ought not to doubt”

(Harkness). It seems plain that dēbeant should be omitted, being a copyist repetition from the

end of the preceding clause (Moberly).

superāverint: “should have vanquished” (Kelsey); “conquered” (Spencer); perfect subjunctive

(A-G) for the future perfect of the direct discourse (H-T).

ūnā: an adverb (A-G).

Haeduīs: dative of separation (AG 381) with ēreptūrī, a verb of taking away. This dative, which

occurs with certain compounds of ab-, dē-, ex-, is best explained as the dative of disadvantage,

going with the whole idea of the sentence, and not merely with the verb; i.e., “as far as the

Haedui were concerned, their freedom would be wrested away from them” (H-T).

sint ēreptūrī: future active periphrastic (AG 195), a strong future subjunctive for which the

present subjunctive ēripiant might be substituted in a lighter style (Moberly), emphasizing the

future intention of the Romans: “that they are going to take away (A-G); “that they are intending

to take away” (Hodges). In direct discourse this would be present subjunctive, the apodosis of a

future less vivid condition (AG 516 b).

ab īsdem: = ab eīsdem, “by the same persons,” referring to nōnnūllōs (Harkness).

nostra: i.e., Rōmānōrum (Hodges). Liscus speaks as if he were a Roman (Kelsey).



quaeque…gerantur: “and whatsoever things are done” (Harness), for et quaecumque (Anthon)

or et ea quae (Harkness).

ēnūntiārī: “disclosed,” the ordinary word for divulging a secret (M-T).

ā sē: “by himself,” i.e., Liscus in his capacity as chief magistrate (Harkness).

coercērī: “be restrained”; Liscus’s “power of life and death,” which he had as vergobret, was

here of no avail (Kelsey).

quīn etiam: “nay even, moreover” (Harkness); “why, even” (Hodges); “nay, even, in fact” (L-E).

quod…ēnūntiārit: = ēnūntiāverit: “as to his having divulged so pressing a matter to Caesar,” a

clause in apposition to id (Walpole).

necessāriam rem coāctus: “a matter of urgent importance compelled him” (M-T); equivalent to

necessitāte coāctus (Anthon): “compelled by necessity” (Harkness); coāctus, “on compulsion,”

literally, “being forced” (A-G).

intellegere sēsē: the subject is sēsē, and the object is quantō…fēcerit (Harkness): “that he well

knew” (Spencer).

quantō id cum perīculō fēcerit: “at how much risk he did this” (Anthon); indirect question (AG

575). Notice the emphatic position of id before cum perīculō; it is the object of fēcerit, and refers

to the clause quod…ēnūntiārit (Hodges).

quam diū potuerit: “as long as he could” (H-T).

tacuisse: sc. sē as subject: “he had kept silent” (Kelsey).



BOOK 1, Chapter 18:

Caesar hāc ōrātiōne Liscī Dumnorigem, Dīviciācī frātrem, dēsignārī sentiēbat, sed, quod

plūribus praesentibus eās rēs iactārī nōlēbat, celeriter concilium dīmittit, Liscum retinet. Quaerit

ex solō ea quae in conventū dīxerat. Dīcit līberius atque audācius. Eadem sēcrētō ab aliīs quaerit;

reperit esse vēra: ipsum esse Dumnorigem, summā audāciā, magnā apud plēbem propter

līberālitātem grātiā, cupidum rērum novārum. Complūrēs annōs portōria reliquaque omnia

Haeduōrum vectīgālia parvō pretiō redēmpta habēre, proptereā quod illō licente contrā licērī

audeat nēmō. Hīs rēbus et suam rem familiārem auxisse et facultātēs ad largiendum magnās

comparāsse; magnum numerum equitātūs suō sūmptū semper alere et circum sē habēre, neque

sōlum domī, sed etiam apud fīnitimās cīvitātēs largiter posse, atque huius potentiae causā

mātrem in Biturīgibus hominī illīc nōbilissimō ac potentissimō conlocāsse; ipsum ex Helvētiīs

uxōrem habēre, sorōrem ex mātre et propinquās suās nūptum in aliās cīvitātēs conlocāsse. Favēre

et cupere Helvētiīs propter eam affīnitātem, ōdisse etiam suō nōmine Caesarem et Rōmānōs,

quod eōrum adventū potentia eius dēminūta et Dīviciācus frāter in antīquum locum grātiae atque

honōris sit restitūtus. Sī quid accidat Rōmānīs, summam in spem per Helvētiōs rēgnī obtinendī

venīre; imperiō populī Rōmānī nōn modo dē rēgnō, sed etiam dē eā quam habeat grātiā

dēspērāre. Reperiēbat etiam in quaerendō Caesar, quod proelium equestre adversum paucīs ante

diēbus esset factum, initium eius fugae factum ā Dumnorige atque eius equitibus (nam equitātuī,

quem auxiliō Caesarī Haeduī miserant, Dumnorix praeerat): eōrum fugā reliquum esse equitātum

perterritum.

Liscus tells Caesar of the power of Dumnorix, and that he favors the Helvetii (Walker).



dēsignārī: “was meant,” literally, “was pointed at” (Anthon).

sed, quod…eās rēs iactārī nōlēbat: “but since he was unwilling that these matters should be

disclosed; “…openly discussed” (Hodges). Eās rēs are what the real reasons were why the state

of Aeduans had not made good on its promises (Kelsey).

iactārī: “to be bandied about”; iactō is the frequentative (AG 263.2) of iaciō (A-G).

plūribus praesentibus: “in the presence of many” (A-G); “so many being present,” literally, “a

larger number [than ordinary] being present” (Anthon); “with too many present” (Hodges).

Observe that the ablative absolute (AG 414) will rarely bear a literal translation, but its force

must be brought out in various ways (A-G).

celeriter: “quickly,” so as to shut off further discussion (Kelsey).

concilium dīmittit: “he dismissed the assembly” of leading Aeduans (prīncipibus, Chapter 16)

(Kelsey).

Liscum retinet: “[but] he keeps Liscus” (A-G); “he detained Liscus” (Kelsey). The omission of

the conjunction (asyndeton) is very common in Caesar’s rapid narrative (A-G).

quaerit…ea quae…dīxerat: “he asks (the meaning of) that which he had said.” Quae here does

not question indirectly, but is a relative pronoun (M-T).

ex sōlō: sc. eō with sōlō: “from him in private.” Sōlō refers to Liscus (Anthon). Most Latin verbs

of asking (like quaerit) may take two accusatives, but the person is more commonly expressed

by the ablative with a preposition (Walker).

dīcit līberius atque audācius: “he (Liscus) thereupon expresses himself with greater freedom

and boldness” (Anthon); “…more freely and confidently” (Spencer). The change of subject is



unmarked (M-T).

sēcrētō: “each by himself” (A-G); “privately” (Kelsey); “apart [from Liscus]”. Sēcrētō is an

adverb based on the perfect passive participle from sēcernere, “to separate” (M-T).

reperit esse vēra: sc. haec: “he found them to be true” (Harkness), i.e., Liscus’s statements

(Kelsey); “he learned that this was the truth” (Walker); “he found that the facts were as follows”

(Hodges). Vēra agrees with eadem, which is explained by the lengthy indirect discourse which

follows (Harkness).

ipsum esse Dumnorigem: sc. virum; indirect discourse begins: “that it was Dumnorix himself”

(Spencer); “that Dumnorix was indeed the man” (M-T); “that in fact it was Dumnorix,” as

Caesar had surmised (Kelsey); “that Dumnorix was the very person…,” i.e., the one whom

Liscus meant (Harkness); “that Dumnorix was the particular or exact person meant” (Moberly).

The indirect discourse converted to direct discourse, with changes underlined, is as follows: Ipse

est Dumnorix…cupidus rērum novārum. Complūrēs annōs portōria…redēmpta habet, quod illō

licente contrā licērī audet nēmō. Hīs rēbus et suam rem…auxit et facultātēs…comparāvit;

magnum numerum equitātūs…alit et circum sē habet, neque sōlum domī sed etiam apud…

cīvitātēs largiter potest; atque…mātrem… conlocāvit, ipse…uxōrem habet, sorōrem…

conlocāvit. Favet et cupit Helvētiīs… ōdit… Caesarem…quod… frāter…est restitūtus. Sī quid

accidat Rōmānīs, summam in spem…venit; imperiō populī Rōmānī…dē eā quam habet grātiā,

dēspērat (A-G).

summā audāciā: sc. virum: “[a man] of the greatest daring” (H-T); “…of the utmost

recklessness” (L-E); “…of the extreme boldness” (Spencer). The general word is rarely, as here,

omitted after a proper name with an ablative of quality (AG 415) (A-G).



līberālitātem: “lavish giving” (Kelsey).

cupidum rērum novārum: “eager for a revolution” (L-E); rēs novae (literally, “new things”) is

the regular expression for a change of government, revolution, or coup d-état. Such overturnings

seem to have been frequent in Gaul (A-G). Cupidus takes an objective genitive (AG 349 a).

complūrēs annōs…nēmō: “that he had, for several years, farmed the customs, and all the other

public revenues of the Haedui, at a low rate, because, when he bid, no one dared to bid against

him.”

portōria: “port duties,” “frontier duties,” “tolls” paid for the privilege of importing or exporting

goods across a country (L-E). It was customary among the ancients to levy tolls on goods

passing through their country along the roads and rivers (Kelsey). The Haedui controlled at least

a part of the Saône, which was a water-way into the center of Gaul.

vectīgālia: derived from vectus, participle of vehō, means that which is “brought in” to the

public treasury (Kelsey). It is a name for taxes in general; revenues from any source, as from the

public pastures, products of the land, etc. (H-T). The Aeduan revenues were “farmed out” as

among the Romans; that is, the privilege of collecting taxes was sold at auction to the highest

bidder, who guaranteed to the state a certain sum, did the collecting through his agents, and kept

for himself all that he could make above the amount paid into the public treasury and the costs of

collection. The “publicans” (pūblicānī or redemtōrēs) of the New Testament were collectors of

taxes under this system, which afforded large opportunity for corruption and extortion (Kelsey),

as the actual tax gathering was left in the hands of rapacious and irresponsible agents; thus the

people were left impoverished and their oppressors were enriched (L-E).



redēmpta: take with habēre: “he held in contract,” stronger than redēmisse would have been

(Walpole); “he had (having been) bought up” (L-E); “he had farmed” Redimō is a technical word

meaning “to take a contract for doing a thing”; here, to “contract for the collection of taxes,” “to

farm the taxes.” (M-T).

parvō pretiō: “at a small price”; ablative of price (AG 417) (Harkness). Dumnorix secured these

contracts at a low price, because no one dared to bid against him (Harkness), thus defrauding the

state (L-E).

quod…contrā licērī audeat nēmō: “no one dares to bid against him”; the subjunctive audeat in

a quod-causal clause in indirect discourse (AG 540 b) (H-T). Dumnorix bought for a lump sum

the right to collect the taxes, expecting to recoup himself and make a profit (Hodges).

illō licente: “when he was bidding” (H-T). Licente is from the personal verb liceor (“to bid at an

auction sale”), not from the intransitive verb liceō. Several MSS. have illō dīcente (Anthon).

contrā: here an adverb (Kelsey).

nēmō: Since no one dared to bid against Dumnorix, he could obtain the right to collect the taxes

on terms most favorable to himself (Kelsey).

rem familiārem: “private fortune” (Kelsey).

facultātēs ad largiendum magnās: “extensive means for the exercise of liberality,” i.e. for

bestowing presents and rewards (Anthon); “for bribery,” to buy political support (A-G). Ad

together with an accusative gerund expresses purpose (AG 506).

domī: “at home,” i.e., among his own people (Hodges); locative case (AG 93).

comparāsse: = comparāvisse: “that he had amassed” (Harkness).



numerum equitātūs: “a body of cavalry.” Numerus in post-Augustan Latin became a technical

word for any indefinitely large or small body of troops (M-T).

suō sūmptū: “at his own expense” (Hodges).

alere: “maintained” (Kelsey)

largiter posse: equivalent to esse potentissimum: “had considerable influence” (M-T);

“exercised a powerful influence” (Anthon), literally “that he was able greatly” (Harkness).

Largiter is a rather rare adverb from largus, for the more common largē (M-T).

huius potentiae causā: sc. augendae: “to increase this influence” (Kelsey); “for the sake of his

power” (A-G); “in order to maintain this influence,” literally, “for the sake of this influence”

(Anthon). As always, causā (“for the sake of,” “on account of”) thus following a genitive

expresses purpose (AG 359 b, 404 c). Potentia is “power,” as an attribute of the person; potestās

is the power to do anything; facultās, “opportunity”; imperium, “military authority” (A-G).

Biturīgibus: near the modern Bourges, west of the Haedui (A-G). The Bituriges were neighbors

of the Haedui, from whom they were separated by the river Loire (Harkness). There were two

tribes of this name, the Bituriges Cubi, whose capital was Avaricum, and another called by

Strabo the Bituriges Iosci (= Vivisci) whose capital was Burdigala (Bordeaux). They were the

only Celtic people who dwelt in Aquitania (Stock).

illīc: “of that country” (Kelsey).

conlocāsse: = conlocāvisse; sc. in mātrimōnium or nuptum: “he had given his mother in

marriage to a man among the Bituriges, most noble and powerful there” (Hodges). Collocāre in

this sense is a legal expression (Anthon).



ipsum ex Helvētiīs uxōrem habēre: “that he himself (i.e., Dumnorix) had married a wife from

the Helvetii” (Harkness); he had married the daughter of Orgetorix (see Chapter 3: eīque fīliam

suam in mātrimonium dat (H-T)) (Anthon).

sorōrem ex mātre: sc. partam: “his sister by [i.e., born of the same] mother“ (Harkness), i.e., his

half-sister on his mother’s side (Kelsey).

propinquās: “his female relatives” (Kelsey)

nūptum: “to marry”; construe this supine (AG 509) with collocāsse, which implies the notion of

“sending” (Spencer) and hence motion. Nūbere is used of women marrying, while dūcere is used

of men (Harkness).

in aliās cīvitātēs: the accusative implies “sent them into other states and cause them to be

married there” (Walker).

favēre et cupere Helvētiīs: “that he favored and wished (success) for the Helvetians” (Kelsey);

cupere is here equivalent to bene velle, as voluntās occurs in the next chapter for benevolentia

(Anthon). Helvētiīs is dative with favēre (AG 367).

affīnitātem: “relationship” (Kelsey); “alliance by marriage,” as distinct from propinquitās,

relationship by blood (M-T).

ōdisse etiam suō nōmine: “that he hated also on his own account,” i.e., “personally” (Kelsey),

“on individual grounds” (L-E); he cherished a personal hatred towards (Anthon). Suō nōmine, an

ablative of cause (AG 404) (Harkness), is an expression derived from mercantile life, where

one’s name is written at the top of the ledger and everything under it put to “his account” (H-T).



eōrum adventū: “by their coming.” Eōrum refers to the Romans, and adventū is the ablative of

means (AG 410) (Harkness).

eius: refers to Dumnorix (Harkness).

potentia eius dēminūta: sc. sit from the next sentence (Harkness): “his influence had been

lessened” (Kelsey). The object of writing eius instead of sua seems to have been to express

distinctly that the power of Dumnorix had been really diminished; potentia sua might have

meant only that he said it had been diminished (Moberly).

in antīquum locum…sit restitūtus: “had been restored to his former position,” i.e., had been

reinstated in his former influence (Anthon). Diviciacus was restored to his former position,

which the rise of Dumnorix had obscured. Diviciacus was a man of some culture; five years

previously, in 63 B.C., he had visited Rome (Kelsey).

grātiae: “influence.” The genitive is definitive; that is to say, expresses the position or condition,

which was “influence and honor” (Walpole)

sī quid accidat Rōmānīs: “if anything should happen to the Romans,” a euphemistic expression

for “if any disaster should befall the Romans” (Hodges). While contingere is commonly used of

good fortune, and ēvenīre is used in a neutral sense (M-T), accidere tends to be used of

something bad or unfavorable; our expression “if anything should happen to him” has a similar

underlying suggestion (Kelsey). Future less vivid protasis with venīre as apodosis (AG 516 b)

(A-G). Quid is the shortened form of aliquid used after sī, nisi, num, and nē (AG 310 b).

Rōmānīs is a dative of disadvantage (AG 376).

summam in spem…venīre: “that he entertained very great hopes” (Anthon), literally, “came

into the highest hope” (Harkness).



per: “with the help of” (Kelsey).

rēgnī obtinendī: gerundive construction, objective genitive with spem (AG 504, 348): “of

holding rule” (Stock); “of gaining sovereignty.”

imperiō populī Rōmānī: = imperante populō Rōmānō: “if the Roman people held the

command” (Spencer) “under the sway (“supremacy” (Kelsey)) of the Roman people,” i.e., as

long as the Roman people possessed the chief authority in Gaul (Anthon); imperiō is a variation

of the ablative of time (AG 423), called the ablative of attendance circumstance (Walpole).

“under the rule” (A-G). Beware of translating imperium as “empire,” a meaning which it did not

acquire until very late times (Walpole).

dē rēgnō: “of the kingship” (Kelsey).

reperiēbat: notice the tense. Caesar kept asking questions, and kept learning something new

(Hodges).

in quaerendō: “on inquiring into” (Anthon); “in the course of his enquiries” (Moberly).

quod proelium equestre adversum…esset factum: “[in regard to] the fact that an unsuccessful

engagement of our cavalry had taken place” (Harkness); “[whereas] a disastrous cavalry skirmish

had occurrred” (L-E); proelium is attracted into the relative clause, while its proper place in the

antecedent clause is taken by fugae (Kelsey). Quod here can be taken as a conjunction

(Harkness), or it can be understood as a relative pronoun (H-T). The subjunctive is used in the

report of the answers to Caesar’s questions (reperiēbat in quaerendō) (M-T).

paucīs ante diēbus: “a few days before"; ante an adverb; diēbus is ablative of degree of

difference (AG 414) (L-E), literally, “before by a few days.”



initium eius fugae factum: sc. esse: “the beginning of that flight occurred,” referring to

proelium adversum (Harkness). The implication is that Dumnorix treacherously started with the

Aeduan contingent to flee, and that this precipitated a general rout (Kelsey).

equitātuī,…Dumnorix praeerat: “Dumnorix was in charge of the cavalry”; equitātuī is dative

with the compound verb praeerat (AG 370). Some editions have equitātū, an old form for the

dative (Anthon).

auxiliō Caesarī: “as an aid to Caesar” (Kelsey); “to help Caesar”; a double dative construction

(AG 382.1), auxiliō being a dative of purpose, and Caesarī, a dative of reference.

equitātum perterritum: “that the cavalry had been thrown into a panic” (Kelsey). In his

account of this skirmish (Chapter 15) Caesar rather diminishes the serious nature of the defeat. It

is only here, where he wishes to show the full extent of the treachery of Dumnorix, that we learn

that it ended as a panic and complete rout of the four thousand cavalry (M-T).



BOOK 1, Chapter 19:

Quibus rēbus cognitīs, cum ad hās suspīciōnēs certissimae rēs accēderent, quod per fīnēs

Sēquanōrum Helvētiōs trādūxisset, quod obsidēs inter eōs dandōs cūrāsset, quod ea omnia nōn

modo iniussū suō et cīvitātis sed etiam īnscientibus ipsīs fēcisset, quod ā magistrātū Haeduōrum

accūsārētur, satis esse causae arbitrābātur quārē in eum aut ipse animadverteret aut cīvitātem

animadvertere iubēret. Hīs omnibus rēbus ūnum repugnābat, quod Dīviciācī frātris summum in

populum Rōmānum studium, summum in sē voluntātem, ēgregiam fidem, iūstitiam,

temperantiam cognōverat; nam nē eius suppliciō Dīviciācī animum offenderet verēbātur. Itaque

prius quam quicquam cōnārētur, Dīviciācum ad sē vocārī iubet et, cotīdiānīs interpretibus

remōtīs, per C. Valerium Troucillum, prīncipem Galliae prōvinciae, familiārem suum, cui

summam omnium rērum fidem habēbat, cum eō conloquitur; simul commonefacit quae ipsō

praesente in conciliō [Gallōrum] dē Dumnorige sint dicta, et ostendit quae sēparātim quisque dē

eō apud sē dīxerit. Petit atque hortātur ut sine eius offēnsiōne animī vel ipse dē eō causā cognitā

statuat vel cīvitātem statuere iubeat.

Though convinced of the treachery of Dumnorix, Caesar consults his brother Diviciacus before

taking action against him (Kelsey).

quibus rēbus cognitīs: quibus = hīs: “having found out these things” (Kelsey); understand the

information contained in the preceding chapter as the antecedent of quibus rēbus.

suspīciōnēs: “grounds for suspicion” (Kelsey).



cum certissimae rēs accēderent: “since the most clearly proven facts (“the most undoubted

facts” (Anthon)) were added” (L-E), referring to the facts mentioned in the subsequent quod

clauses (Harkness). Accēdō is used as a kind of passive of addō (A-G).

quod…trādūxisset: “the fact that (as he learned) he had led.” The verbs in this and the

subsequent quod clauses are in the subjunctive on the principal of implied or informal indirect

discourse (AG 592) (A-G); these clauses are in apposition with rēs, but also involve reasons in

the mind of Caesar (arbitrābātur) at the time of the event; hence the subjunctive. A reason

assigned by Caesar as historian would require the indicative (Harkness). Note the repetition of

quod (anaphora) in this and the next several clauses (Walpole).

quod obsidēs…dandōs cūrāsset: sc esse; cūrāsset = cūrāvisset: “whereas he had caused hostages

to be exchanged” (Hodges); “the fact that he had procured an exchange of hostages (M-T).

inter eōs: i.e., the Helvetii and Sequani (A-G).

iniussū suō et cīvitātis: “without his authority or that of the state,” i.e., of the Aedui (Harkness);

here suō is equivalent to a genitive (A-G). Iniussū is the ablative vestige of an obsolete noun (M-T).

īnscientibus ipsīs: “but even without the knowledge of the latter” (Anthon), literally, “they

themselves not knowing” (Harkness). Ipsīs refers to Caesar and the Aedui, the latter implied in

cīvitātis (Harkness).

quod…accūsārētur: “an offence of which he was accused” (Moberly).

ā magistrātū Aeduōrum: i.e., by Liscus, their chief magistrate or vergobretus (see Chapter 14)

(Harkness).



satis esse causae: “there there was sufficient reason,” literally, “enough of cause” (Harkness);

causae is partitive genitive with satis, which is used as a noun (A-G).

quārē in eum aut ipse animadverteret aut cīvitātem animadvertere iubēret: quārē = propter

quam (Kelsey): “why he should either himself punish him, or order the state (of the Haedui) to

do so” (Anthon). Animadvertere literally means “to turn one’s attention toward” (Hodges), “to

notice.” So especially of a magistrate, animadvertere in aliquem is “to take note of an offender

for punishment” (M-T); this phrase always denotes that the conduct deemed reprehensible has

been carefully inquired into previous to its being punished (Anthon). Relative clause of result

introduced by the relative particle quārē (AG 537.2) (Harkness).

hīs omnibus rebus: “to all these considerations” (Moberly), i.e., the reasons which led to the

conclusion that Dumnorix must be punished (Spencer).

ūnum repugnābat: “one fact opposed” (L-E); “one consideration weighed against”; ūnum refers

to quod…verēbātur; i.e., though there were several reasons for punishing Dumnorix, there was

yet one objection to this course (Harkness).

Dīvitiācī frātris: Divitiacus, though a Druid of high rank, was the most Romanized of all the

Gauls. In 63 B.C. he had gone to Rome to obtain help for his country against Ariovistus. The

Senate being occupied at the time with Catiline’s conspiracy, deferred their answer; and

Divitiacus remained at Rome, frequenting the best society, and enjoying the acquaintance of

Cicero, who consulted him, as a Druid, on the subject of his treatise Dē Dīvinātiōne (Moberly).

quod…cognōverat: “that he well knew…” The present inceptive cognoscō, has the meaning “to

learn, begin to know”; hence in the perfect, “I have learned, I know” (H-T). This clause, in



apposition with ūnum (“only one thing”), might in English be introduced by some such word as

“namely” (A-G).

studium: “loyalty” (Harkness), “devotion” (Kelsey), “attachment,” as a partisan (A-G).

voluntātem: “affection,” here equivalent to benevolentia (Anthon), “good will” as a friend. Note

the absence of connectives (asyndeton) in vivid narration (A-G).

ēgregiam fidem: “remarkable trustworthiness” (Kelsey).

temperantiam: “self-control” (Kelsey).

nē…offenderet verēbātur: “he feared that he would offend”; nē + subjunctive forms a positive

fear clause with a verb of fearing (AG 564). Observe the force of the imperfect: “was fearing,”

“was fearful” (Harkness).

eius: i.e., of Dumnorix (A-G).

suppliciō: “by the punishment” or “execution.” This word is derived from the adjective supplex,

“bent down,” signifying “on the bended knee”; i.e., either as a suppliant for mercy, or, as here, to

receive the blow of the executioner (A-G).

prius quam quicquam cōnārētur: “before he ventured on anything” (L-E), “before he should

attempt anything” (AG 551 b) (A-G).

Dīviciācum…vocārī: “that Diviciacus be summoned” (Kelsey).

cotīdiānīs interpretibus remōtīs: “having dismissed his ordinary (literally, “daily”)

interpreters” (Harkness). Diviciacus, norwithstanding his visit to Rome, had evidently not

learned to speak Latin; and Caesar did not understand Celtic (Kelsey).



per C. Valerium Troucillum, prīncipem Galliae prōvinciae: this name is written variously in

the MSS. as Troacillum, Traucillum and Procillum; “a leading man in the province of Gaul,”

prīncipem here equivalent to inter prīmōrēs (Anthon). Galliae and prōvinciae are in apposition,

the latter qualifying the former like an adjective, “of provincial Gaul” (M-T). Per is used here in

the sense of “by means of” or “through the assistance of.”

familiārem: “intimate friend” (Kelsey)..

cui summam…fidem habēbat: fidem habēbat is equivalent to a verb meaning “trusted”

(Hodges). An easier construction would be cuius fideī omnēs rēs crēdēbat (A-G): “in whom he

was accustomed to place the highest trust” (Anthon), “in whom he had the utmost confidence”

(Kelsey). The dative cui depends on fidem habēbat, which together are equivalent to a verb of

trusting, like confidō, which takes dative (AG 367).

omnium…rerum: “in all respects” (Hodges), “on every occasion” (Anthon). Rērum is objective

genitive with fidem (AG 348).

cum eō: i.e., with Diviciacus (A-G).

simul: construe with et: “and he at once reminds him…” (Harkness).

commonefacit: “reminds” or “notifies” (A-G), “he called to mind” (Kelsey).

ipsō praesente: “in his (i.e., Diviciacus’s) very presence” (A-G).

quae…sint dicta, quae…dīxerit: subjunctives in an indirect questions (AG 574) (Hodges).

ostendit: some editors omit this verb because commonefacit precedes it. But its presence is

necessary for the meaning. Caesar “reminds” Diviciacus of certain things that had been said in



the council, and now “shows” him other matters that were not previously known to the latter

(Anthon).

quisque: “each one,” giving his individual information or opinion; omnēs would mean “all,”

giving the same information or expressing the same opinion (Hodges).

apud sē: “in his (i.e., Caesar’s) presence” (A-G).

petit atque hortātur ut…statuat: “he besought and urged (Diviciacus)” (Kelsey); “begs and

urges Diviciacus to allow him to hear and adjudge the case of Dumnorix”. Ut…statuat stands for

ut statuere liceat, as is common after verbs of asking (M-T). Statuere, “to pass judgment,” is a

somewhat milder word than animadvertere (Hodges).

vel cīvitātem statuere iubeat: “or that he direct the state (of the Aeduans) to pronounce

judgment” (Kelsey).

sine eius offēnsiōne animī: “without any offence to his (Diviciacus’s) feelings” (Anthon);

“without wounding his feelings” (Hodges). Caesar hopes, in what steps he takes or orders to be

taken against Dumnorix, not to incur the resentment of his brother (A-G).

ipse: i.e., Caesar (A-G).

dē eō: i.e., “concerning [the fate of] Dumnorix.”

causā cognitā: “after investigating the case” (Hodges). Cognoscere is used in the sense of

“making a legal inquiry,” “hearing a case” (M-T).

cīvitātem: i.e., the Aedui (Anthon).



BOOK 1, Chapter 20:

Dīviciācus multīs cum lacrimīs Caesarem complexus obsecrāre coepit nē quid gravius in

frātrem statueret: scīre sē illa esse vēra, nec quemquam ex eō plūs quam sē dolōris capere,

proptereā quod, cum ipse grātiā plūrimum domī atque in reliquā Galliā, ille minimum propter

adulēscentiam posset, per sē crēvisset; quibus opibus ac nervīs nōn sōlum ad minuendam

grātiam, sed paene ad perniciem suam ūterētur. Sēsē tamen et amōre frāternō et exīstimātiōne

vulgī commovērī. Quod sī quid eī ā Caesare gravius accidisset, cum ipse eum locum amīcitiae

apud eum tenēret, nēminem exīstimātūrum nōn suā voluntāte factum; quā ex rē futūrum utī tōtīus

Galliae animī ā sē āverterentur. Haec cum plūribus verbīs flēns ā Caesare peteret, Caesar eius

dextram prēndit; cōnsōlātus rogat fīnem ōrandī faciat; tantī eius apud Dumnorigī cūstōdēs pōnit

sē grātiam esse ostendit utī et reī pūblicae iniūriam et suum dolōrem eius voluntātī ac precibus

condōnet. Dumnorigem ad sē vocat, frātrem adhibet; quae in eō reprehendat ostendit; quae ipse

intellegat, quae cīvitās querātur prōpōnit; monet ut in reliquum tempus omnēs suspīciōnēs vītet;

praeterita sē Dīviciācō frātrī condōnāre dīcit. Dumnorigī cūstōdēs pōnit, ut quae agat, quibuscum

loquātur scīre possit.

At the earnest request of Diviciacus Caesar spares Dumnorix, but he takes precautions for the

future (Walker).

multīs cum lacrimīs: the usual word order of cum with the ablative of manner (AG 412); it

conveys the notion of addition or unexpectedness (H-T).

complexus: “embracing” (Kelsey); probably clasping Caesar’s knees, for this was the ancient

attitude of suppliant entreaty (Walker). Translate the perfect participle of a deponent verb



actively.

obsecrāre: sc. eum: “to entreat (him) (Kelsey).

nē quid gravius statueret: “not to take too harsh measures” (Kelsey); “that he would not pass

too severe a judgment” (Spencer); “that he would determine nothing too severe,” i.e., would not

pass too severe a sentence upon him (Anton). Quid, the shortened form of the indefinite pronoun

aliquid, is seldom used except after nē, num, sī, nisi (M-T).

scīre sē: “[saying] that he knew” (Kelsey). Here the verb of “saying,” on which the infinitive

depends, is implied in obsecrāre (Harkness).

illa: “those charges”; note the way in which the Latin utilizes it neuter (Walpole).

nec quemquam: “and that no one”; literally “nor any one” (Harkness); accusative subject of the

infinitive capere.

ex eō: “from him” (Harkness) or “on account of that fact” (Kelsey).

plūs quam sē dolōris capere: “suffered more pain than he himself [did]”; dolōris is a partitive

genitive with plūs (AG 346).

proptereā quod,…ille minimum posset,…crēvisset: sc. cum from the preceding clause;

construe proptereā quod with crēvisset: “for this reason,…he had grown powerful at a time

when he had been having very little power / influence” (Walpole).

ipse: refers to Divitiacus (Harkness).

grātiā: ablative of respect / specification (AG 418).

plūrimum: sc. posset, expressed with minimum (Harkness): “had great influence.”



domī: “at home,” i.e., in Aeduīs (Kelsey), among his own people (Harkness).

ille: sc. et before ille, which refers to Dumnorix (Harkness).

propter adulēscentiam: “on account of his youth”; Dumnorix apparently was considerably

younger than Diviciacus (Kelsey).

per sē crēvisset: “[Dumnorix] had increased (in resources and strength) through his

[Diviciacus’s] help (Kelsey).

quibus opibus ac nervīs…ūterētur: quibus = et eīs, and thus couples ūterētur to crēvisset, so

that it too depends on proptereā quod (M-T): “and this influence and power he (Dumnorix) was

using,” referencing to the influence and power implied in per sē crēvisset (Harkness), i.e., the

influence and strength gained through Diviciacus (Hodges). Opibus and nervīs are ablative

objects of ūterētur (AG 410). Nervīs = potentiā, is used figuratively for “strength, power”

(Harkness), the metaphor being borrowed from animals whose strength lies in their nerves and

sinews (Anthon).

nōn sōlum…, sed: note the omission of etiam with sed. This happens when the second member

contains the more important thought (H-T).

grātiam…perniciem suam: take with suam with both grātiam and perniciem (A-G).

ad minuendam grātiam: “to lessen his (Diviciacus’s) popularity” (Kelsey). Gerundive

construction expressing purpose (AG 506) (Hodges).

amōre frāternō: = frātris: “by affection for his brother” (Kelsey); the adjective is used for an

objective genitive (Hodges).



exīstimātiōne vulgī: “by the opinion of the common people,” i.e., by the fact that they would

hold him responsible, as explained in the next sentence (Harkness). Vulgī is subjective genitive

(AG 343) (Hodges).

sēsē…commovērī: “that he [Diviciacus] was moved” (Walker), to intercede on behalf of his

brother (Spencer).

quod sī: literally, “as to which, if.” Quod is strictly an adverbial accusative, but with sī has

become a mere connective and is translated “and,” “now,” “but,” etc. (L-E).

sī quid eī ā Caesare gravius accidisset: “if anything very severe should happen to him [i.e.,

Dumnorix] at the hands of Caesar.” Accidisset takes the place of the original future perfect

indicative (acciderit) in a future more vivid condition in the direct discourse (H-T).

cum: “while” (Kelsey); cum-circumstantial clause (AG 546).

ipse: i.e., Diviciacus (Anthon).

eum locum amīcitiae apud eum apud eum = apud Caesarem: “such a relation of friendship

with Caesar” (Kelsey); “such a place in his friendship”; (Anthon), literally, “that place of

friendship with him” (Harkness).

nēminem exīstimātūrum nōn: sc. esse: “everybody would think” (Hodges).

factum: sc. esse (Harkness) and illud: “that it had not been done.”

nōn suā voluntāte: “against his [Diviciacus’s] will” (M-T); ablative of cause (AG 404)

(Harkness).

futūrum utī…: sc. esse: “it would come about that”; “the result would be that” (Walpole); “it

would come to pass” (Hodges); “it would happen that…” The periphrastic form futūrum esse



with the subjunctive is used for the future infinitive of verbs which have no supine stem; also for

the future passive infinitive, which rarely occurs; and frequently with verbs which have a future

infinitive (H-T).

utī…āverterentur: a substantive clause of result (AG 571) (Walker); this clause is the subject of

futūrum [esse] (Kelsey).

plūribus verbīs: “with very many words,” so we often say, “at great length” (Kelsey); ablative

of manner (AG 412).

ā Caesare peteret: “he asked [of] Caesar”; ā/ab + ablative is the usual construction after verbs

of asking (AG 396 a) (Walker).

cōnsōlātus rogat: sc. eum: “reassuring [Diviciacus] he asked him” (Kelsey).

fīnem ōrandī faciat: sc. ut, often omitted after verbs of asking (M-T): “to stop pleading,”

literally, “that he make an end of pleading (Kelsey); ōrandī is a genitive gerund (AG 504).

tantī eius apud sē grātiam esse ostendit utī…condōnet: “he declares that his (Diviciacus’s)

influence with him (i.e., Caesar) is so great, that he will pardon…” (Anthon). Tantī is a genitive

of price (AG 418 a) (M-T), literally “of so great account” (Kelsey), originally a locative perhaps,

but afterwards regarded by the Romans themselves as a genitive (Walpole). Utī…condōnet is a

result / consecutive clause (AG 537).

reī pūblicae iniūriam: “the injury done to the republic” (Anthon). Reī pūblicae is objective

genitive (AG 348) (Hodges).

suum dolōrem: “the insult offered to himself” (Spencer); “his own resentment” (M-T).



eius voluntātī ac precibus: literally, “to his wish and prayers” (Anthon); “in deference to his

wish and prayers” (A-G); “in consideration of his good will” (Walpole); “in response to his

wishes”; dative of indirect object (AG 362) on account of the meaning “give” or “present”

contained in condōnet. Eius refers to Diviciacus (Harkness).

condōnet: “he would disregard” (Kelsey). Condōnāre means “to give up a right to someone”;

here the just resentment of Caesar was given up to Diviciacus (A-G); “to make a present to

someone”; and so is used of passing over an offence as a boon to someone who intercedes for the

offender (M-T). Subjunctive in a result clause (AG 537).

vocat, frātrem adhibet: “he summons…[and] brings in” (Anthon) (H-T); “he has the brother

[Diviciacus] present” (Kelsey). Note the asyndeton (H-T).

quae…reprehendat: “what he objected to” (Kelsey).

intellegat: = sciat (Kelsey).

cīvitās: i.e., of the Aeduans, whose agreement to furnish grain had been broken (Kelsey).

prōpōnit: “he lays before him” (Anthon).

in reliquum tempus: “for the future” (Kelsey).

omnēs suspīciōnēs: “all grounds of suspicion” (Anthon); “all occasion of suspicion” (Spencer).

praeterita: “things bygone,” i.e., “the past” (H-T); neuter plural substantive (Kelsey).

vītet: “he should avoid” (M-T).

Dīviciācō frātrī: “for the sake of his brother Diviciacus,” (Harkness); “to oblige his brother

Diviciacus” (Walpole).



Dumnorigī cūstōdēs pōnit: “he places spies over Dumnorix” (Anthon); “he sets people to watch

Dumnorix,” with pōnit being equivalent to appōnit, “assigns to” (M-T). Caesar watched the

movements of Dumnorix (Harkness). The custōdēs corresponded to detectives of our day, for

Dumnorix was not imprisoned (Kelsey).

ut scīre possit: subjunctive in a purpose clause (AG 531) (Harkness).

quae agat, quibuscum loquātur: subjunctive in indirect questions (AG 575). Note the lack of a

connector (asyndeton).

It was tactful of Caesar to make Diviciacus believe that Dumnorix was spared for his sake. In

reality, however, Caesar had his hands full with the Helvetii and could not afford to stir up a

revolt of the Haedui in addition, a result which might easily have followed an attempt to punish

their most popular noble. A few years later Caesar put Dumnorix to death for obstinate

disorbedience (Walker).



BOOK 1, Chapter 21:

Eōdem diē ab explōrātōribus certior factus hostēs sub monte cōnsēdisse mīlia passuum ab

ipsīus castrīs octo, quālis esset nātūra montis et quālis in circuitū ascēnsus quī cognōscerent

mīsit. Renūntiātum est facilem esse. Dē tertiā vigiliā T. Labiēnum, lēgātum prō praetōre, cum

duābus legiōnibus et iīs ducibus quī iter cognōverant summum iugum montis ascendere iubet;

quid suī cōnsiliī sit ostendit. Ipse dē quārtā vigiliā eōdem itinere quō hostēs ierant ad eōs

contendit equitātumque omnem ante sē mittit. P. Considius, quī reī mīlitāris perītissimus

habēbātur et in exercitū L. Sullae et posteā in M. Crassī fuerat, cum explōrātōribus praemittitur.

Caesar plans a double attack on the Helvetii (Walker).

Chapters 16-20 interrupted the narrative of Caesar’s pursuit of the Helvetians. The events of this

chapter follow immediately after those narrated in Chapter 15 (Walker).

eōdem diē: “on the same day” that he had summoned the council of Gallic leaders in camp (see

Chapter 16), and had had the interview with Diviciacus and Dumnorix (Kelsey).

explōrātōribus: these were scouting parties; the speculātōrēs were individual spies (L-E).

certior factus hostēs sub monte cōnsēdisse: “having been informed (literally, “made more

certain”) that the enemy had encamped.” Certior fīō, like doceor, admits an infinitive

(Harkness). After crossing the Saône near Villefranche, the Helvetii had passed by S. Vallier;

and now were encamping at the foot of Mont Tauffrin, near Issy l’Evéque. The road up to this

point had been one on which no military maneuver was possible (Moberly).



sub monte: “at the foot of an elevation” (Kelsey); the exact location is unknown; it was only a

few miles from the battlefield south of Bibracte (Walker), in the vicinity of modern Toulon (L-E).

mīlia passuum ab ipsīus castrīs octo: the Helvetians were now in the valley of the Liger

(Loire), southeast of Bibracte (Kelsey). Mīlia passuum, “miles,” literally “thousands of paces”;

mīlia octo is the accusative of distance / extent of space (AG 425), passuum is partitive genitive

(AG 346.2).

ab ipsīus castrīs: sc. Caesaris (Walpole); the antithesis is between his own camp and the

enemy’s camp (hostēs consēdisse) (M-T).

quālis esset…(etc.): subjunctive in an indirect question after cognoscerent (AG 575) (A-G).

nātūra: “character” (A-G).

quālis in circuitū ascēnsus: “the ascent from the opposite side,” literally “in the going around”

(Kelsey); “what its ascent by a circuitous route [might be]” (A-G), i.e., on the opposite side,

away from the enemy, Caesar’s design being to send a detachment to take the enemy in the rear,

while he attacked them in front (M-T). Mont Tauffrin was apparently the first height sufficiently

parallel with the road to conceal a flank movement slightly to the left of it, made for the purpose

of heading the Helvetii and barring the road in advance of them (Moberly).

quī cognōscerent mīsit: “he sent men to ascertain”; the antecedent of quī is explōrātōrēs, eōs,

quōsdam, or some such word, to be supplied as the object of mīsit. Such a relative may in Latin

always imply its own antecedent, as in English the relatives “whoever” and “what.” Quī

cognōscerent is a relative purpose clause (AG 531.2) (A-G). Cognōscere is regular used of

military reconnoitering (M-T).



facilem esse: sc. ascensum (A-G).

dē tertiā vigiliā: see Chapter 12: “during (in the course of) the third watch” (L-E); “at the

beginning of the third watch,” i.e., at midnight. Dē, when joined with words expressing time,

indicates that a part of that time is spent along with the time which follows. Hence Caesar here

set out before the third watch was at an end (Spencer). The Romans divided the night into four

watches each of three hours. The first began at 6:00 in the evening, the second at 9:00, the third

at midnight, and the fourth at 3:00 in the morning (Anthon); the length of each vigilia differed

according to the season of the year (Spencer).

itinere quō: “the route by which”; quō is ablative of the way by which / route (AG 429.4a).

lēgātum prō praetōre: “his lieutenant with powers of praetor.” In the time of the republic, this

term meant a lieutenant, having charge, under the auspies of a proconsul or commander, of part

of an army or province, and exercising, when necessary, praetorian powers or the functions of a

praetor. The expression, as applied in the present case to Labienus, is a singular one, since he is

elsewhere in these commentaries simply called lēgātus. At a later period, in the time of

Augustus, the term was used to mean the governor of a whole province (Anthon). Alternatively:

Praetor is here used in the sense of commander-in-chief. Caesar is the praetor. Lēgātus prō

praetōre is an honorary title applied to the general or lieutenant who is second in command, and

accordingly acts as commander-in-chief in the absence of that officer (Harkness). Alternatively:

The lēgātus ordinarily had no independent military authority, but was the assistant of his general.

The title lēgātus prō praetōre applied to Labienus probably indicates that he had received by

special enactment the power and rank of propraetor, empowering him to act as Caesar’s

substitute when necessary (Hodges). Alternatively: The consul and praetor had ex officiō the



right to command an army on expiration of their terms of office, and no other persons had this

right except rarely by special grant. Such a grant had been made to Labienus who is therefore

called “lieutenant with the powers of a praetor.” The military authority of ordinary lēgātī was

merely temporary and provisional (L-E).

et iīs ducibus: “and with those persons as guides” (Anthon), with ducibus as a kind of predicate

(A-G) in apposition with iīs (Harkness).

quī iter cognōverant: “who knew the way” (Hodges), i.e., those who had been part of the

reconnoitering party (explōrātōribus) (A-G).

summum iugum montis: “the highest point of the ridge” (Spencer); “the highest ridge of the

elevation,” which was apparently long and uneven (Kelsey).

ascendere: Labienus was to take a circuitous route, and ascend the mountain in the rear of the

enemy, so as to fall upon the enemy by surprise when the signal should be given from below.

Fault is found with Caesar, however, for not having kept up the communication with Labienus

by means of couriers, who could have informed him of all the movements of his lieutenant, and

for not having agreed beforehand upon some signal, which was to be given by Labienus when he

should have reached the summit of the mountain. These simple precautions would have

prevented the failure of the plan (Anthon).

quid suī cōnsiliī sit: = quid dēcrēverit (H-T): “what [the essence of] his plan is” (L-E), literally,

“what is of his plan” (Harkness). Observe Caesar’s effective method in narrating: he states here

only that he gave Labienus his orders; what these orders were, the sequel brings out in a more

telling way than a detailed account of the orders as given would do (Moberly). Cōnsiliī is a



predicate genitive (AG 343) with sit, and not a partitive genitive depending upon quid (Harkness).

Such genitives are not rare in Caesar, and are probably more or less colloquial (A-G).

dē quārtā vigiliā: about 2:00 a.m., the sun at this season rising here about 4:00 (A-G).

equitātum: the cavalry were to feel out the enemy (Kelsey).

reī mīlitāris perītissimus habēbātur: “was reputed [to be] most skilled in military matters”

(Walker); Considius’s military experience extended over a long period of years (Hodges). This

favorable characterization of Considius is presented as a reason for having sent so unreliable an

officer on so important a reconnoiter (Kelsey). Reī mīlitāris is genitive of relation after words

signifying “skill” (perītus) (AG 349 a).

L. Sullae…M. Crassī: both of high repute as generals (Kelsey); Lucius Cornelius Sulla, for his

services first in the war with Jugurtha in Africa, then in the Social War, and in the East against

Mithridates about thirty years before (88-84 B.C.) (Kelsey) and Marcus Licinius Crassus, the

distinguished commander in the Servile War, who defeated and slew Spartacus (71 B.C.)

(Harkness).

in M. Crassī: sc. exercitū (A-G). During the Servile War in Crassus’ army Considius then had

experience of a Gallic enemy, as the slave army consisted of Gauls and Germans (Stock). The

sequel will show that Cosidius mistook Labienus and his men for Gauls (Walpole).



BOOK 1, Chapter 22:

Prīmā lūce, cum summus mōns ā [Lūciō] Labiēnō tenērētur, ipse ab hostium castrīs nōn

longius mīlle et quīngentīs passibus abesset neque, ut posteā ex captīvīs comperit, aut ipsīus

adventus aut Labiēnī cognitus esset, Considius equō admissō ad eum accurrit, dīcit montem,

quem ā Labiēnō occupārī voluerit, ab hostibus tenērī: id sē ā Gallicīs armīs atque īnsignibus

cognōvisse. Caesar suās cōpiās in proximum collem subdūcit, aciem īnstruit. Labiēnus, ut erat eī

praeceptum ā Caesare nē proelium committeret, nisi ipsīus cōpiae prope hostium castra vīsae

essent, ut undique ūnō tempore in hostēs impetus fieret, monte occupātō nostrōs exspectābat

proeliōque abstinēbat. Multō dēnique diē per explōrātōrēs Caesar cognōvit et montem ā suīs

tenērī et Helvētiōs castra mōvisse et Considium timōre perterritum quod nōn vīdisset prō vīsō

sibi renūntiāsse. Eō diē quō cōnsuērat intervāllō hostēs sequitur et mīlia passuum tria ab eōrum

castrīs castra pōnit.

Caesar’s strategic movement is foiled through a misreport by Considius (Stock).

prīmā lūce: “at daybreak,” literally, “at the first light” (Harkness). As it was now not far from

July 1, daybreak was about 4:00 (Kelsey). Ablative of time when (AG 423).

summus mōns: “the summit of the mountain.” The relation expressed by “of” in English, is

frequently denoted in Latin by an adjective. So īmus mōns, “the bottom of the mountain,” timor

externus, “the fear of foreign enemies,” etc. (Anthon).



tenērētur, abesset, cognitus esset: subjunctives, all governed by cum, describing the situation

(cum-circumstantial clause) (AG 546)) (A-G).

neque…aut ipsīus adventus aut Labiēnī cognitus esset: sc. adventus with Labiēnī and

coordinates with ipsīus (A-G); the force of cum still continues with this clause (Walker):

“without his or Labienus’s arrival being known” (H-T).

ipse: Caesar (A-G): “while he himself…” Caesar’s rapid and vigorous style omits unnecessary

words (Walpole).

castrīs nōn longius mīlle et quīngentīs passibus abesset: “he was no further than a mile and a

half from their camp”; castrīs is ablative of separation (AG 400, 402) with abesset; passibus is

ablative of degree of difference with abesset (AG 414) (A-G), or ablative of comparison with

longius (AG 406).

equō admissō: “with his horse at full gallop” (Anthon); “(his) horse having been let go toward

(his destination), riding at full speed (H-T). Admittere, in such expressions, means to give loose

reins (Harkness). The ablative absolute is here equivalent to an ablative of manner (L-E).

accurrit, dīcit: “comes up to him [and] says” (H-T). Observe the omission of the conjunction

(asyndeton), implying haste. So, also, between subdūcit and instruit, below (Harkness).

occupārī: occupō, meaning “seize,” “take possession of,” is generally much stronger than its

English derivative “occupy” (Kelsey).

quem…voluerit: sc. Caesar; perfect subjunctive in a subordinate clause appearing in indirect

discourse (AG 583), representing voluistī of direct discourse (Walpole).



ā Gallicīs armīs…cognōvisse: the shields and helmets of the Gauls were distinctly different

from those of the Romans (A-G). Cognōscere has a fondness for being joined with ex or the

simple ablative; the ā construction used here expresses the source of the information (H-T): “that

he knew from the Gallic weaponry.” “Gallic” here is equivalent to “Helvetian” (Moberly).

īnsignibus: “military standards” (Anthon); “insignia,” “devices” or “decorations” (Harkness) on

shields and helmets (A-G). The “insignia” on the Roman helmets consisted of crests and

feathers; the Gauls wore the horns, plumes, etc. of animals and also various images (Spencer).

The inference from this report would be that Labienus and his force had been cut to pieces, and

Caesar must expect an attack at once. This accounts for his next movement, which was to fall

back and wait in line of battle, while Labienus was vainly awaiting him (A-G).

in…collem subdūcit: “draws off” (Anthon), “withdraws” (Harkness), or “leads (from below) up

the hill (Hodges); here sub gives to the verb the idea of a quiet, noiseless movement (Harkness).

aciem instruit: “drew up a line of battle” (Kelsey). Caesar awaited the coming of the Helvetii

(Hodges), concluding from the report of Considius that Labienus had been defeated, and he

expected that the victors would immediately attack him (L-E).

ut erat eī praeceptum: “as he had been instructed” (Anthon); “as the order had been given to

him” (Hodges). The passive of intransitive verbs can only be used impersonally (“it had been

commanded to him”), but the English idiom generally requires the personal construction in the

translation (“he was commanded”) (L-E). Notice that the verb erat praeceptum is indicative

mood, affecting how ut is to be translated.

nē proelium committeret: expresses purpose (AG 531), the subject of erat praeceptum (A-G):

“not to engage in battle.”



ipsīus cōpiae: “of his own (Caesar’s) forces” (Harkness); antithesis between Labienus’ troops

and Caesar’s (M-T).

nisi…vīsae essent: in the direct discourse the future perfect would be used (future more vivid

condition); the pluperfect subjunctive is used in its place in indirect discourse.

ut undique ūnō tempore in hostēs impetus fieret: “in order that the attack might be made upon

the enemy on all sides at once”; purpose clause (AG 531) (A-G).

monte occupātō: “having seized the height” (A-G).

nostrōs exspectābat: “he continued to look out for our men” (A-G), i.e., the troops with Caesar

(Kelsey). Observe how the imperfects exspectābat and abstinēbat describe the situation (A-G).

proeliōque abstinēbat: “he refrained from battle”; proeliō is ablative of separation (AG 401).

multō…diē: = cum multum diēī prōcesserat (Anthon): literally, “when the day was much”

(Moberly); “late in the day” (A-G); “when day was well advanced” (Hodges); “after much of the

day had passed” (Anthon), though probably only relatively so, implying that much time had been

lost since daybreak (prīmā lūce) when they might have surprised the enemy (Harkness); ablative

of time when (AG 423).

dēnique: “not until” (A-G); “at length” (Anthon).

Considium…quod nōn vīdisset prō vīsō sibi renūntiāsse: “that Considius had brought back to

him intelligence of what he had not seen, as if it had actually been seen by him.” Supply id as the

antecedent of quod, and as the object of renūntiāvisse (Harkness). Sibi = Caesarī (Anthon).

Caesar generously refrains from censuring Considius although the miscarrying of his well-laid

plan must have been a great disappointment (L-E).



timōre perterritum: “terror-stricken” (Hodges), probably due in part to the exaggerated notion

of Gallic prowess that prevailed in the Roman army (L-E). Timor is used especially of cowardly

fear (Kelsey).

quod nōn vīdisset: subordinate clause with subjunctive in indirect discourse, being part of the

report made to Caesar (M-T).

prō vīsō: “as if seen,” “for (something actually) seen”; vīsō is used substantively (A-G);

renūntiāsse: = renūntiāvisse (A-G).

eō diē: about two weeks had elapsed since Caesar crossed the Saône. It was now the end of June

(L-E).

quō cōnsuērat intervallō: “at what interval he was accustomed,” i.e., at his accustomed interval

(Hodges); “at the usual distance” between his own army and theirs” (Anthon), i.e., five or six

miles (A-G). The full expression is (eō) intervallō, quō (intervallō) consuērat (sequī) (Anthon);

the relative takes the place of the necessary limiting adjective (L-E). Cōnsuērat = cōnsuēverat.

mīlia passuum tria: accusative of distance / extent of space (AG 425) (A-G): “at a distance of

three miles.” Distance, where no motion over is implied, is expressed by either accusative,

ablative, or ablative with ā / ab. Where there is a verb expressing distance Caesar generally uses

the accusative, except with intervallō and spatiō. Where there is no verb of distance he uses

accusative or ablative indifferently (M-T).



BOOK 1, Chapter 23:

Postrīdiē eius diēī, quod omnīnō bīduum supererat, cum exercituī frūmentum mētīrī

oportēret, et quod ā Bibracte, oppidō Haeduōrum longē maximō et cōpiōsissimō, nōn amplius

mīlibus passuum XVIIĪ aberat, reī frūmentāriae prōspiciendum exīstimāvit; itaque iter ab

Helvētiīs āvertit ac Bibracte īre contendit. Ea rēs per fugitīvōs L. Aemiliī, decuriōnis equitum

Gallōrum, hostibus nūntiātur. Helvētiī, seu quod timōre perterritōs Rōmānōs discēdere ā sē

exīstimārent, eō magis quod prīdiē superiōribus locīs occupātīs proelium nōn commīsissent, sīve

eō quod rē frūmentāriā interclūdī posse cōnfīderent, commūtātō cōnsiliō atque itinere conversō

nostrōs ā novissimō agmine īnsequī ac lacessere coepērunt.

Caesar turns to go to Bibracte for supplies; the Helvetians attack his marching column on the rear

(Kelsey).

postrīdiē eius diēī: pleonastic equivalent of posterō diē: “the next day” (Spencer), literally, “on

the morrow (next day) of that day” (Hodges). Postrīdiē, an old locative or ablative like cotīdiē

(M-T) here has its original force as a noun and governs the genitive (diēī) (L-E).

omnīnō: “in all,” i.e., “only” (A-G).

bīduum supererat, cum: “two days remained to the time when” (Walpole); “…since but two

days remained until the time when” (Anthon). Cum = ut tum, “such that then…” (M-T).

exercituī frūmentum mētīrī oportēret: “he would have to distribute grain to the army”

(Walker). The Roman soldiers received a stated allowance of grain, usually wheat or barley,



from which they prepared their bread (Harkness). Cum here takes the subjunctive because it

defines the nature of the two days’ interval (M-T).

ā Bibracte: with names of towns and small islands ab is often used to denote “from the vicinity

of” (AG 428). Bibracte is now identified as Mont Beuvray, a considerable hill twelve miles west

of Autum (Walker); the place afterwards became a Roman colony (Augustodunum) and contains

numerous Roman remains (A-G) (Walker). It was the “holy city” of the Druids, and the capital

of the Aedui (L-E). Most neuter names of towns ending in –e, though i-stems, have the ablative

ending in –e (Hodges).

īre: infinitive expressing purpose (AG 460).

mīlibus: ablative of comparison with amplius (AG 406) (Walker). Mīlibus passuum xviii is the

usual order of numerals with mīlia in Caesar (L-E).

reī frūmentāriae prōspiciendum: sc. sibi esse: “that he ought to make provision for a supply of

corn” (Hodges); “that he must provide for…,” i.e., make arrangements to procure it from the

Aedui, on whom he relied mainly for his supplies of grain (Anthon); “that he must look out

for...” Evidently his vigorous talk to Dumnorix and the rest of the chiefs, two days before, had as

yet produced no results (Walker). Prōspiciendum is an impersonal gerund in a passive

periphrastic construction expressing necessity (AG 500). Reī frūmentāriae is dative with the

compound verb prōspiciendum (AG 370).

itaque iter ab Helvētiīs āvertit ac Bibracte īre contendit: The verbs āvertit and contendit,

taken together, show what Caesar did, as the result of the opinion expressed in prōspiciendum

existimāvit. This connection may be shown by supplying “and accordingly.” Thus: “He thought

that he ought… and accordingly turned his march aside from the Helvetians” (Harkness). Caesar



was south and a little east of Bibracte. The Helvetii were marching northwest, and the more

northerly route taken by Caesar was almost parallel, for some distance, with the route of the

Helvetii. This explains the fact that the Helvetii were able to overtake Caesar’s army (Walker).

Bibracte is accusative of place to which without a preposition, as is generally the case for names

of cities, towns, and small islands (AG 427).

fugitīvōs: “runaway slaves” (Walpole). Alternatively: “deserters,” i.e., from the Gallic cavalry n

Caesar’s service (Harkness); “fugitives,” i.e., those who had deserted probably to return home.

Perfugae and transfugae are deserters who go to serve in the enemy’s ranks (Spencer).

Alternatively: The word is used in contempt for transfugae, the regular word for deserters (H-T).

L. Aemiliī decuriōnis equitum Gallōrum: “Lucius Aemilius, a captain of the Gallic cavalry.”

The decuriō was the commander of a decuria, a small force of cavalry, originally ten in number.

The cavalry was divided into companies or ālae, the ālae into turmae, and these again into

decuriae (Harkness). Lucius Aemilius was a Roman officer in charge of a squad of Gallic

horsemen (Spencer), the senior of the three in his turma (Moberly). Alternatively: A decuriō was

the commander of a turma, which consisted of thirty-two men, and was to the cavalry what the

century was to the infantry (Stock).

discēdere ā sē: “were departing from them,” i.e., were turning off and changing their route.

Indirect discourse with exīstimārent, the infinitive discēdere translated as an imperfect tense

(Anthon). Sē refers to the subject, the Helvetians.

exīstimārent, cōnfīderent: should be indicative, but are attracted by the surrounding indirect

statement to the subjunctive (Walpole). By a kind of carelessness of expression the verb of

saying or thinking (on which would depend the indirect discourse) is often put in the subjunctive



for the things said or thought” (Roby). The subjunctive here is used idiomatically because Caesar

was not sure of the real reason (A-G): “either because they thought…, or because (literally “for

this reason, because”) they trusted…” (Harkness).

eō magis quod: “all the more because” (Walpole), explained by the following quod-clause

which gives a special reason for the opinion of the Helvetians (Harkness). Eō is an ablative of

cause (AG 404) (Walker).

prīdiē: “on the day before” (Spencer).

superiōribus locīs occupātīs: “having seized a higher position,” referring to the exploit of

Labienus with two legions (see Chapter 21) (Spencer), but with concessive force: although the

Romans had gained an advantageous position on higher ground, still they did not attack the

Helvetii (A-G).

quod…proelium nōn commīsissent: the Helvetii did not understand the reason for the failure of

Caesar and Labienus to attack them on the previous day (Walker). This omission of the Romans

to come to an engagement, though of actual occurrence, is here represented as existing in the

thoughts of the Helvetians, and as constituting the reason which led them to believe that the

present movement of the Romans was prompted by their fears (Spencer). Subjunctive because a

subordinate clause in indirect discourse (AG 583).

sīve eō: “or for this reason” (Walker); eō is ablative of cause (AG404), not different in sense

from eō magis above (A-G).

rē frūmentāriā: ablative of separation (AG 400) with interclūdī (A-G).



interclūdī posse: sc. Rōmānōs (Walpole): “that (the Romans) could be cut off,” i.e., by being

prevented from reaching Bibracte (Walker), i.e., they flattered themselves with the hope of being

able to accomplish this (Anthon). Indirect discourse dependent on cōnfīderent.

cōnfīderent: “they felt sure” (A-G); “they trusted,” “they were confident” (Anthon).

commūtātō cōnsiliō: “having changed their plan” (Kelsey). If the Helvetii had held to their plan

of march, they might have foiled Caesar. Their safety lay in avoiding battle, which they could do

as long as they were in advance of him, on account of the rugged nature of the country. Their

fatal mistake lay in thinking they were strong enough to throw away this advantage (Walker).

itinere conversō: instead of continuing on their way, by which they might have reached the

coast, their vain confidence led them to return and give Caesar the chance that he had been

waiting for (A-G).

ā novissimō agmine: sc. nostrō: “on our rear” (Walpole).



Book 1, Chapter 24:

Postquam id animum advertit, cōpiās suās Caesar in proximum collem subdūxit

equitātumque, quī sustinēret hostium impetum, mīsit. Ipse interim in colle mediō triplicem aciem

īnstrūxit legiōnum quattuor veterānārum; in summō iugō duās legiōnēs quās in Galliā citeriōre

proximē cōnscrīpserat et omnia auxilia conlocāvit, ita ut suprā sē tōtum montem hominibus

complēret; impedīmenta sarcināsque in ūnum locum cōnferrī et eum ab iīs quī in superiōre aciē

cōnstiterant mūnīrī iussit. Helvētiī cum omnibus suīs carrīs secūtī impedīmenta in ūnum locum

contulērunt; ipsī cōnfertissimā aciē, reiectō nostrō equitātū, phalange factā sub prīmam nostram

aciem successērunt.

Romans and Helvetians prepare for battle, the Romans on sloping ground. The Helvetians

advance (Kelsey).

id animum advertit: = vertit animum ad id, the same as animadvertit (tmesis) (Anthon); id

depends on ad in advertit (Spencer); only the neuter pronoun may be so used (Walpole): “he

turned his attention to this”; “he noticed this” (Hodges); “he observed this” (H-T). The tense of

the verb is perfect, as is usual after postquam (A-G), where in English a pluperfect would be

more usual (M-T).

cōpiās: i.e., “the infantry force,” as distinct from equitātus (M-T).

Caesar: in a rather unusual place, not first in the sentence (Walpole).



proximum collem: thought to be the hill of Armecy, about 16 English miles southeast of Mt.

Beuvray, the site of ancient Bibracte (Kelsey), near Toulon (L-E).

quī sustinēret: “to check” temporarily the skirmishers of the enemy and give Caesar time to

form his lines (Walker). Subjunctive in a relative purpose clause (AG 531.2) (A-G).

ipse: = Caesar; do not translate by the cumbersome “he himself.” The pronoun serves to

distinguish Caesar from the cavalry, which he had sent elsewhere (H-T).

interim: “meanwhile,” while the cavalry were holding back the enemy; it must have taken

Caesar at least two hours to change over his marching column, which was five or six miles long,

into battle lines (Kelsey).

in colle mediō…instruxit: “halfway up the hill he drew up…” (Hodges); i.e., he drew up his

four veteran legions on the slope of the hill, in three lines; and then placed above them, on the

top of the hill, the two new legions, on whom, as consisting of recent levies, he could less safely

rely; and along with these last he stationed also the auxiliary forces (Anthon).

triplicem aciem: “a triple line of battle”; i.e., the army was arranged in three lines. Each legion

consisted of ten cohorts, which, in the triplex aciēs, were arranged with intervals between them:

four cohorts form the first or front line, three the second, and three the third, and the cohorts in the

second line are directly behind the intervals in the first (Anthon). The triple line was not straight,

but followed the contour of the hillside, and was about an English mile in length (Kelsey).

legiōnum quattuor veterānārum: “[consisting] of four veteran legions” (L-E); genitive of

substance / material (AG 344) describing the make-up of the aciem. Four legions, numbered VII-

X (Hodges) allotted to Caesar by the senate (M-T), stood side by side, each in three lines (A-G).



These legions were the ones which Caesar found in Transalpine Gaul, and the three which he

brought from their quarters near Aquileia (Walker).

in summō iugō: “on the very summit”; iugum, a distinction from mōns, a mountain or hill, often

denotes the summit of a hill, or the ridge of a range of hills (Anthon).

duās legiōnēs…proximē cōnscrīpserat: “the two legions which he had very recently enlisted”

(Walpole). These new legions (the 11th and 12th (Kelsey)) last raised (see Chapter 10) were

untried troops not as yet sufficiently steady to bear the brunt of a battle, and so they were set to

guard the camp (A-G).

auxilia: Caesar never expected much of his Gallic infantry (Walker).

ita ut…hominibus complēret: subjunctive in a result clause (AG 537); hominibus is ablative

with complēret, a verb of filling, abounding (AG 409 a): “such that he completely filled the

whole hill with his forces” (Moberly). By occupying the gently rounding crest of the hill, Caesar

strengthened his position in case his battle lines, posted halfway up the slope, should be forced

back (Kelsey).

suprā sē: Caesar was near the front (Kelsey) with the veterans in the van (M-T), so the

battlelines were arrayed “above him.”

tōtum montem: “the entire upper part” of the hill (Kelsey), from half-way up to the top (Walpole).

sarcinās: The “packs” or “kits” (corresponding to our knapsacks (Stock)), carried by the

soldiers, often very heavy (Hodges). In a regular battle these were left behind in camp. So here,

they were deposited in one spot, which was to be the site of the camp when made by the less

trustworthy troops (A-G).



et eum…iussit: eum = illum locum (A-G): “and ordered this place to be guarded by those who

stood posted in the upper line.” The reference is to those on the top of the hill. Eum (locum)

means the place in which the baggage was (Anthon).

ab iīs: the two raw legions and the auxilia, who were on the top of the hill (Hodges).

cōnstiterant: “were stationed” (A-G), referring to the two new legions (Walker).

mūnīrī: “to be fortified,” by a trench and a rampart formed from the earth thrown out of the

trench. The trench, which for a part of the distance was double, has been traced by excavations:

the earthen rampart has disappeared (Kelsey). The location of the battlefield was long uncertain,

but in 1886 excavations were made on one of the proposed locations, and evidences of a semi-

circular wall and ditch were found on the top of a hill. Three years later nine trenches were found

in which the dead had been buried (Walker).

cum omnibus suīs carrīs: i.e., not sending merely a force of fighting men, but following with

their whole train. It seems to have been the habit of these peoples to go to battle with their

families and their carts for encouragement as well as for defence (A-G). The Celtic wagon had

two disc-like wheels and no springs (L-E).

impedimenta: “heavy baggage,” carried on beasts of burden or wagons (L-E). After the

Helvetian fighting men turned back in order to attack Caesar, the long line of carts turned and

came back also and formed a great corral (Kelsey).

in ūnum locum: bits of Gallic pottery have been found there (Walker).

ipsī: i.e., the fighting men, as distinguished from the old men, women, and children with the

baggage (Kelsey).



cōnfertissimā aciē: “in very close array” (Anthon); “by (their) very close formation” (Kelsey);

“by the great density of their line,” literally, “by their very dense line”; ablative of means (AG

409) with rēiectō (Hodges). Confertus is properly the participle of conferciō, but is here used as

an adjective (M-T).

reiectō nostrō equitātū, phalange factā: “hurled back our infantry and formed a phalanx”

(Kelsey); Caesar very frequently puts two ablatives absolute together without a conjunction, of

which the former gives the circumstances, time, or cause of the action expressed by the latter.

Here the phalanx was formed on the repulse of the cavalry (M-T). The ancient cavalry were no

match for any considerable number of foot-soldiers, and hence were not depended upon for the

main engagement. They opened the fight, but were expected to flee as soon as the foot soldiers

advanced (A-G).

phalange factā: phalanx is a Greek word, used to describe the compact order of the Gauls (H-

T). The Macedonian phalanx, so celebrated in ancient warfare, was doubtless unknown to the

Gauls. The Helvetic phalanx, here referred to, was probably similar to the German, which

consisted simply of a body of soldiers in close array, under the cover of their shields close-

locked over their heads (Harkness), resembling the testūdō of the Romans (Anthon). The Gauls,

forming in “a compact mass,” probably fifteen to twenty men deep, moved forward slowly but

with almost irresistible momentum; those in the front rank held their large shields so that these

would overlap, like the tiles of a roof (L-E), presenting a firm barrier to the enemy (Kelsey).

sub prīmam nostram aciem successērunt: “came up close to our front line” (Anthon); “pressed

forward to…” (Kelsey). The “first line” is actually the lowest or front line to an approaching

enemy (Harkness). Sub (also in, subter, super) is followed by the accusative with a verb of

motion (L-E).



BOOK 1, Chapter 25:

Caesar prīmum suō, deinde omnium ex cōnspectū remōtīs equīs, ut aequātō omnium

perīculō spem fugae tolleret, cohortātus suōs proelium commīsit. Mīlitēs locō superiōre pilīs

missīs facile hostium phalangem perfrēgērunt. Eā disiectā gladiīs dēstrictīs in eōs impetum

fēcērunt. Gallīs magnō ad pugnam erat impedīmentō quod plūribus eōrum scūtīs ūnō ictū

pīlōrum trānsfīxīs et conligātis, cum ferrum sē īnflexisset, neque ēvellere neque sinistrā impedītā

satis commodē pugnāre poterant, multī ut diū iactātō bracchiō praeoptārent scūtum manū

ēmittere et nūdō corpore pugnāre. Tandem vulneribus dēfessī et pedem referre et, quod mōns

suberat circiter mīlle passuum spatiō, eō sē recipere coepērunt. Captō monte et succēdentibus

nostrīs, Boiī et Tulingī, quī hominum mīlibus circiter XV agmen hostium claudēbant et

novissimīs praesidiō erant, ex itinere nostrōs ab latere apertō adgressī circumvenīre, et id

cōnspicātī Helvētiī, quī in montem sēsē recēperant, rūrsus īnstāre et proelium redintegrāre

coepērunt. Rōmānī conversa signa bipertītō intulērunt: prīma et secunda aciēs, ut victīs ac

submōtīs resisteret, tertia, ut venientēs sustinēret.

The Romans charge, forcing the Helvetians back (Kelsey).

suō: sc. equō remōtō from remōtīs equīs (Harkness): “sending away first his own horse” (L-E).

This was often done before an engagement (A-G). Plutarch (Caesar, Chap. 18) says: “When his

horse was brought to him, he exclaimed, ‘When I have conquered I will use it for the pursuit, but

now let us go against the enemy,’ and on foot he charged them” (H-T).



omnium: governed by equīs: “then those of all” (H-T), i.e., of all the officers, personal staff, and

other persons of distinction, not, of course, of the cavalry (Harkness). Caesar wished in part to

encourage his men by showing that the officers shared their danger, and in part to prevent some

timid tribune from setting an example flight (Walker). Notice that the possessive genitive and the

possessive adjective (suō) have the same sense, and so many be coordinated (A-G).

aequātō omnium perīculō: “by equalizing the danger to all” (Kelsey); the officers of all ranks

in the Roman army seem to have done more fighting than is expected of the officers in modern

armies (L-E). Omnium is objective genitive (AG 348) with perīculō.

cohortātus: “having harangued,” or “harangued and…” The allocūtiō, or harangue, was

customary at the beginning of a battle. A skillful orator like Caesar would be able to rouse his

troops to a high pitch of fervor (L-E).

locō superiōre: sc. ē: “from their higher position,” i.e., from the slope of the hill (Anthon). The

higher position of the Romans gave them a decided advantage (L-E). Ablative of place from

which (AG 428 f, g) with missīs.

pilīs: “javelins” or “darts” of which each soldier had two (Harkness). The shaft of the pīlum was

partly square, and five or six feet in length; the head, nine inches long, was of iron, and jagged or

barbed at the end, so as to be exceedingly difficult to draw out. The pīlum was used either to

throw or thrust with, and it was peculiar to the Romans (Spencer).

phalangem perfrēgērunt: “broke up the phalanx” (Hodges).

eā disiectā: ea refers to phalangem (Harkness): “having thrown this (formation) into disorder”

(Kelsey).



gladiīs dēstrictīs: “with swords drawn”; ablative of means (AG 410) (Harkness).

eōs: referring to hostium (Harkness).

impetum fēcērunt: “they charged” (Anthon). The first-line soldiers probably allowed the

Helvetians to approach within 60 feet before hurling their javelins and charging (Kelsey).

Gallīs magnō…erat impedīmentō: Gallīs = Helvētiīs (Walpole): “it was a great hindrance to

the Gauls”; “it proved a great hindrance to the Gauls” (Anthon). The “double dative”

construction (AG 382): impedimentō is dative of service / purpose, Gallīs is dative of reference /

person affected (A-G): The subject of erat is the clause quod plūribus…poteran (Harkness).

ad pugnam: “in fighting” (Kelsey); “as regarded the fight” (Anthon); “in the way of their

fighting” (Moberly).

plūribus eōrum scūtīs ūnō ictū pīlōrum trānsfīxīs et conligātis: “several of their shields being

transfixed and pinned together by a single blow of the javelins.” Bear in mind that their shields

were locked together above their heads and lapped considerably over one another; hence a

javelin cast down from a higher place would pierce through more than one, and in this way

fasten them together (Anthon). The scūtum is a large, oblong shield, four feet in length and two

and one-half in width (Harkness).

ferrum sē īnflexisset: subjunctive in a cum-causal clause (A-G): “since the [point of the] iron

had bent itself,” i.e., had become bent (Kelsey). Alternatively: “whenever the iron[‘s head] had

gotten bent”; cum in the sense of “whenever” with the subjunctive is contrary to Caesar’s general

usage, but it does appear elsewhere in the Commentaries (L-E). Ferrum refers to the soft iron

shank connecting the head with the shaft (Hodges), long enough to pierce two or more overlap-



ping shields and made of soft metal so that it would bend easily; the hard barbed point also

hindered withdrawal (Kelsey).

ēvellere: sc. id, as the object, referring to ferrum (Hodges) or ea, referring to pīla (Walker): “to

pull [it / them] out” (Kelsey).

sinistrā impedītā: ablative absolute with causal force (Hodges): “the left hand being thus

impeded” (Anthon); “since the left hand was hampered” (A-G). The buckler was fastened to the

left arm (Harkness).

neque…satis commodē pugnāre poterant: “and they were unable to make battle with

sufficient advantage” (Anthon).

multī ut praeoptārent: “so that many [of them] preferred / chose”; multī being placed first for

emphasis (A-G); one would normally expect the conjunction ut to stand first in its clause (L-E).

Ut with subjunctive, a result clause (AG 537).

diū iactātō bracchiō: “after having for a long time tossed their arms to and fro” (Anthon);

“having jerked their arms back and forth” in an effort to pull the bent javelin head out of their

shields (Kelsey) and so tear the shields apart (Walker).

scūtum manū ēmittere: “to drop their shields (Moberly). Manū is ablative of separation (AG

400) with ēmittere (Hodges).

nūdō corpore: “with the body unprotected,” (not “naked” (Hodges)), i.e., without a shield

(Harkness), “defenseless” (L-E). Ablative of manner (Ag 412).

vulneribus dēfessī: “exhausted from their wounds” (Kelsey); vulneribus is an ablative of cause

(AG 404).



pedem referre: “to fall back”, i.e., facing the foe; terga vertere means “to run away” (Hodges);

“to give ground” (L-E); “to retreat,” literally, “to carry back the foot.” The Helvetians retreated

in good order to a hill nearby, on which they reformed their phalanx (L-E).

mōns suberat: “there was a mountain nearby” (Harkness), southwest of the hill of Armecy

(Kelsey).

circiter passuum spatiō mīlle: “at about a mile’s distance” (Kelsey); “about a mile off”

(Harkness); mille is accusative of distance / extent of space (AG 425) (A-G). Spatiō is the

ablative of degree of difference (AG 414) (Walker). Mille must be taken as a substantive on

which passuum depends as a partitive genitive (AG 346), contrary to its general adjectival use

(L-E), viz. mille passūs. Circiter is an adverb (Walker).

eō: adverb, “thither,” i.e., to the mountain (Harkness).

sē recipere: “to retreat” (Kelsey).

captō monte: sc. ab eīs (Hodges): “when the mountain had been reached” (Kelsey); i.e., after

the Helvetii had gained the mountain and the Romans were going up to attack them (A-G). The

Montagne du Chateau de la Garde, a little east of Autun and north of the road on which the

armies were marching (Moberly).

succēdentibus nostrīs: “and our men were advancing up it” (L-E).

hominum mīlibus circiter XV: “with about 15,000 men.” The ablative of manner, when the

notion of accompaniment is strongly marked, requires cum, unless the noun is qualified by an

attribute (M-T). Alternatively: Mīlibus is the “military ablative” (AG 413 a): the ablative is used

without cum in some military phrases. Hominum is partitive genitive with mīlibus (AG 346).



agmen…claudēbant: “closed the enemy’s line of march,” i.e., formed the rear-guard of the

enemy (Spencer); “were at the end of the enemy’s marching column” (Kelsey). The Boii or

Tulingi, with about 15,000 men, had been in the front of the Helvetian line of march, and were

consequently in the rear when they faced round to attack Caesar (H-T). They had probably been

separated from the Helvetii by a wagon train, which they had been obliged to pass on the road;

this accounts for their coming up so late in the battle (Walker).

novissimīs praesidiō erant: the same construction as Gallīs…impedīmentō above (A-G):

“guarded the rear,” literally, “were for a defence to the rear” (or “the newest / last”) (Harkness).

Novissimīs = novissimō agminī (Hodges).

ex itinere nostrōs ab latere apertō adgressī: ex itinere, “on their way,” “immediately after the

march” (Walpole), “on the march,” i.e., they went straight from their march into the battle,

without a halt (Walker): “having attacked our men on their exposed flank,” i.e., on their right

flank, which, on account of its not being covered by the shields of the soldiers, was more open to

attack (Anthon). Caesar was guilty of a great error in pursuing the Helvetii on their retreat,

without observing the Boii and Tulingi, who acted as a body of reserve, and who attacked him on

his flank as he passed by on the march (ex itinere), and then began to surround him in the rear.

He should have ordered the two legions posted on the top of the hill to follow immediately after

him, and in this way might have opposed the attack of the Boii (Anthon).

circumvenīre: sc. coepērunt (A-G): “they began to outflank” (M-T); “they began to move

around them” (Kelsey); they came up in the rear, trying to work their way around to the more

advantageous position (Walker).

cōnspicātī: “perceiving” (Kelsey).



redintegrāre: “to renew,” again assuming the offensive (Kelsey).

conversa signa bipertītō intulērunt: “the Romans, having faced about, advanced against the

enemy in two divisions” (Anthon); “wheeling around, they charged in two directions” (M-T).

The rear rank, consisting of the third line, faced about and advanced against the Boii and Tulingi,

who were coming up in the rear; while the first and second lines continued facing towards, and

made headway against the Helvetii, who were now coming down again from the mountain to

which they had retreated (Anthon). The divisions stood not back to back, but at an angle, facing

outward; the two front lines facing forward, while the third met the flank attack of the new-

comers (venientēs), i.e., the Boii and Tulingi. The phrase conversa signa refers only to the

movement of the third line, while intulērunt denotes the action of the entire army. The exact

position of this battle is uncertain. It is usually placed at a point between Chides and Luzy, near

the river Alène, and about ten miles south of Mont Beuvray (A-G).

aciēs: in apposition with Rōmānī (Harkness).

victīs ac summōtīs: “the conquered and dislodged” (L-E); “those who had been beaten and

driven back” (Kelsey), referring to the Helvetii, and venientēs to the Boii and the Tulingi

(Harkness).

tertia: sc. aciēs (Harkness).

ut venientēs sustinēret: “to bear the brunt of the new attack” (M-T); “to withstand those who

were advancing,” i.e., the Boii and Tulingi. The present participle is here equivalent to a relative

clause (L-E).



BOOK 1, Chapter 26:

Ita ancipitī proeliō diū atque ācriter pugnātum est. Diūtius cum sustinēre nostrōrum

impetūs nōn possent, alterī sē, ut coeperant, in montem recēpērunt, alterī ad impedīmenta et

carrōs suōs sē contulērunt. Nam hōc tōtō proeliō, cum ab hōrā septimā ad vesperum pugnātum

sit, āversum hostem vidēre nēmō potuit. Ad multam noctem etiam ad impedīmenta pugnātum est,

proptereā quod prō vāllō carrōs obiēcērunt et ē locō superiōre in nostrōs venientēs tēla

coniciēbant et nōn nūllī inter carrōs rotāsque matarās ac trāgulās subiciēbant nostrōsque

vulnerābant. Diū cum esset pugnātum, impedīmentīs castrīsque nostrī potītī sunt. Ibi Orgetorigis

fīlia atque ūnus ē fīliīs captus est. Ex eō proeliō circiter hominum mīlia CXXX superfuērunt

eaque tōtā nocte continenter iērunt [nūllam partem noctis itinere intermissō]; in fīnēs Lingonum

diē quārtō pervēnērunt, cum et propter vulnera mīlitum et propter sepultūram occīsōrum nostrī

[trīduum morātī] eōs sequī nōn potuissent. Caesar ad Lingonās litterās nūntiōsque mīsit, nē eōs

frūmentō nēve aliā rē iuvārent: quī sī iūvissent, sē eōdem locō quō Helvētiōs habitūrum. Ipse

trīduō intermissō cum omnibus cōpiīs eōs sequī coepit.

The Helvetii are defeated and retreat to the country of the Lingones. Caesar pursues them (M-T).

ita: “thus,” i.e., as was said in Chapter 25 (Walpole).

ancipitī proeliō: “in a divided conflict” (Anthon), i.e., facing in both directions (A-G); “in a

two-fold battle,” so called because fought on two different fronts (Harkness), i.e., between the

first division and the Helvetii, and between the second division and the Boii / Tulingi (see the

last sentence of Chapter 25). The phrase ancipitī proeliō commonly means “in doubtful conflict”



(Anthon). Anceps is compounded of am- (for ambi), and ceps, contracted for capits, the stem of

caput, and so means “two-headed” (M-T).

pugnātum est: impersonal passive expressions should not be translated literally: here, “they

fought” (L-E), “the battle went on,” “the fighting continued,” or something of the kind (A-G).

diūtius cum: hyperbaton (H-T), where one would expect cum to begin the clause. Diūtius is put

first for emphasis (Walpole).

alterī…alterī: “one party (i.e., the Helvetians, who had come down again from the mountain)

…, the other party (i.e., the Boii and Tulingi)…” (Anthon).

carrōs: arranged for defense around the corral (Kelsey). Impedīmenta et carrōs is a kind of

hendiadys, since the carrī were the wagons on which the impedīmenta (“heavy baggage”) were

transported (L-E).

sē contulērunt: “they retired,” still fighting; there was no disorderly rout (Kelsey).

nam: this sentence gives the reason for Caesar’s statement that the enemy withdrew, instead of

fleeing in disorder (Walker).

hōc tōtō proeliō: “in the course of this whole battle,” i.e., at any time during it (M-T); ablative

of time within which (AG 424 d) (Hodges).

cum…pugnātum sit: “although they fought” (Harkness); cum-clause with concessive force (AG

549). Note that the perfect subjunctive is an exception to the rule of sequence of tenses (Walker).

ab hōrā septimā: i.e., from a little past 1:00 p.m., counting from 6:00 a.m., when the last night-

watch ended (M-T). Sunset was about 8:00 p.m., so that each of the twelve daylight hours was

about an hour and a quarter of our time. In the Roman reckoning an hour was one-twelfth of the



time, whether long or short, between sunrise and sunset, and varied from about forty-five

minutes to an hour and a quarter (A-G).

vesperum: vesper is a noun of two declensions, with genitives vesperis and vesperī. In classical

prose the ablatives vesperī and vespere (the former perhaps a locative), and accusative vesperum,

are most common (M-T).

āversum hostem: “a fleeing enemy” (A-G); “the back of a foe,” literally, “an enemy turned

away [in flight]” (Anthon). Alternatively: This was not a flight, but an orderly retreat (Hodges).

Caesar speaks with evident admiration of the bravery of the enemy (Kelsey).

ad multam noctem: “until late in the night” (AG 424 e) (A-G); “during a considerable part of

the night” (Spencer).

ad impedimenta: “at / by the baggage” (Kelsey). Here, according to Plutarch, were the women

and children, who were probably massacred when the Roman soldiers burst in (Hodges).

prō vāllō: “as a barricade” (A-G); “as a rampart” (H-T); “as a wall” (Hodges); “instead of a

rampart.” This use of their wagons in battle was common among the Germans as well as the

Gauls (M-T). The vāllum, strictly speaking, was the row of stakes on the wall of a Roman camp

(L-E).

ē locō superiōre: “from the vantage-ground,” i.e., the height of the wagons packed in a circle (L-E).

They mounted on the top of the wagons, and threw their spears down on their assailants (M-T). The

mean cast of a javelin being about 25 yards, it would gain great strength even from so small an

elevation as the height of the carts (Moberly).

in nostrōs venientēs: “against our men who were advancing,” literally “ours advancing” (Harkness).



coniciēbant…subiciēbant…vulnerābant: “kept hurling (from above)…kept thrusting (from

below)…kept wounding” (A-G). Note the force of the imperfect, which accurately expresses the

repetitive and continuous nature of these actions, vividly bringing out the details in the midst of

the narrative (H-T).

rotās: these “wheels” in many cases were doubtless solid disks of wood, which Roman weapons

would not pierce (Kelsey).

matarās ac trāgulās: “spears and darts” (Kelsey). These were peculiar forms of pike or lance

used by the western nations of Europe (A-G). By matarae are meant a kind of Gallic lances, of

greater weight than the ordinary spear; and by trāgulae, light javelins, with a strap attached, by

which they were thrown. The Spanish matar, “to kill,” and the old French term matrasser, which

has the same meaning, appear to be deduced from the same root with matara (Anthon).

subiciēbant: notice the force of sub-, “kept throwing from below [the wagons]” as the Roman

soldiers attacked the rampart of carts (Kelsey).

vulnerābant: there must have been moonlight, or at least clear starlight, else the Gauls could not

have aimed their weapons so well (Kelsey).

diū cum esset pugnātum: “after a long fight.” Note again the hyperbaton; compare with diūtius

cum above (H-T).

impedīmentīs castrīsque: castrīs is the “encampment,” i.e., the corral (Kelsey); ablative objects

of potītī sunt (AG 410) (A-G).

potītī sunt: notice the use of tenses in the passage. The narrative proceeds as far as pugnātum est

(historical perfect), then, as if answering a question why the fight continued thus, Caesar gives a



description of the situation with pluperfect and imperfects: “The Gauls had made a rampart of

their carts and from this they kept discharging missiles and using other means of defense.” Then

the narrative is resumed in the clause with potītī sunt (A-G).

Orgetorigis fīlia: she would be the sister of the wife of Dumnorix (Stock). Plutarch (Vītae

Caesaris, 18) informs us that the very women and children fought on this occasion till they were

cut to pieces (Anthon).

ūnus ē fīliīs: with cardinal numbers the part of the whole is usually expressed by ē / ex or dē

with ablative instead of with the partitive genitive (AG 346 c).

captus est: observe that the agreement is with the nearer subject, the masculine ūnus (A-G),

though it applies also to fīlia in sense (Walpole).

hominum mīlia CXXX superfuērunt: The slaughter in this battle, which was probably fought

on the plain of Cussy-la-Colonne, near Autun (Bibracte), in Burgundy, must have been

enormous. According to Chapter 29 the number of Helvetii, etc., at the outset of their expedition

was 368,000, with 92,000 being fighting men, the rest old men, women, and children. 130,000

survived the battle, so that we may infer what Plutarch tells us definitely (Vīta Caesaris, 18), that

at the capture of the baggage-wagons, in which the women and children were carried on the

march, the slaughter by the Romans was quite indiscriminate (M-T).

eaque: sc. mīlia (Stock)., referring to those thousands of survivors.

tōtā nocte: “during the entire night” (L-E); ablative of time within which (AG 423).

continenter: “without stopping” (Hodges). Of course no individual traveled every day and every

night. There was only a panic-stricken mob, under no leadership, every member of which rested



or moved on at his own pleasure, so that as a whole it was in ceaseless motion. Tonnerre is about

a hundred miles north of the battlefield, and only the strongest could have traveled so far

(Walker).

nūllam partem: this seems to imply that they fled day and night (Harkness). The accusative, by

a Hellenism (AG 397 b), used for the ablative of specification. Alternatively: accusative of

duration of time (AG 423.2) (Walker). Many critics regard nūllam partem noctis itinere

intermissō, as tautological, and a mere gloss of the adverb continenter in the previous clause

(Anthon).

noctis itinere intermissō: “the night’s march broken / interrupted.” As the survivors seemly

traveled at night only during the first night, the thought in nūllam…intermissō is substantially the

same as that in eā…iērunt; such repetitions are characteristic of dictated matter (Kelsey).

in fīnēs Lingonum: about 60 Roman miles in a northwesterly direction from the battlefield (L-E),

i.e., the southern part of Champagne. The chief town of that region, now Langres (the modern

name is derived from Lingonēs (Stock)), is about ninety miles from Mt. Beuvray. It is very likely,

however, that they reached the Lingones farther west. Napoleon III puts the end of their flight at

Tonnerre, sixty miles west of Langres (A-G). It is almost certain that the battle took place near

Montmort, a village about three miles from Toulon-sur-Arroux. Excavations have disclosed the

form of the entrenchment on the hill, and have yielded bones, fragments of helmets and javelins,

and other relics. The time was probably the last of June, or June 29, according to one authority

(Hodges).

diē quārtō: this would be the third day, according to modern reckoning. The Romans counted

the day from which the reckoning was made (Hodges).



cum…eōs sequī nōn potuissent: “since they could not pursue them” (L-E), i.e., the reason why

they reached the Lingones in safety (M-T). This description of the situation is so clearly the

cause of the main action that we may translate cum as “since” and refer the subjunctive to cum-

causal (AG 549) (A-G).

propter…occīsōrum: gives the reason of morātī (A-G).

propter vulnera mīlitum: the victory must have cost the Romans dearly. Roman soldiers cared

for their wounded companions (Kelsey).

propter sepultūram occīsōrum: “for the burial of the slain,” chiefly Gauls. The number of

Gauls that perished in this battle has been estimated by some to be as high as 100,000, or even

higher. Prompt burial was necessary for the health of the friendly Aeduans, in whose country

Caesar was (Kelsey). The Romans were scrupulous in the observance of funeral rites, because

they believed that the souls of the unburied dead were compelled to wander a hundred years on

the banks of the Styx, before they could find rest (Harkness). In the most ancient times the

Romans buried their dead; the custom of burning, adopted to some extent in early times, does not

appear to have become general till the later times of the republic. Marius was buried, and Sylla

was the first of the Cornelian gēns whose body was burned (Spencer).

triduum: = trēs diēs (Kelsey).

Lingonās: Greek form of the accusative, common in these names of tribes (A-G).

nūntiōs: “messages” to be delivered orally (Kelsey).

nē eōs frūmentō nēve aliā rē iuvārent: “[ordering them] that they should not…” Iūvārent,

“supply,” literally, “aid” (Kelsey), depends on litterās nūntiōsque mīsit, which implies the idea



of commanding (Hodges). A substantive clause of purpose with subjunctive / indirect command

(AG 563).

quī sī iūvissent: sc. eōs = Helvētiōs (Kelsey): “for that, if they should aid [them]” (Anthon); this

protasis in direct discourse would be sī iūveritis (A-G), a future more vivid condition; the future

perfect is replaced by pluperfect subjunctive when part of an indirect discourse.

sē eōdem locō quō Helvētiōs habitūrum: = sē (Lingonās) eōdem locō habitūrum (esse) quō

Helvētiōs (habēret) (A-G): ‘he would regard them in the same light in which he did the

Helvetii,” i.e., as enemies (Anthon).



BOOK 1, Chapter 27:

Helvētiī omnium rērum inopiā adductī lēgātōs dē dēditiōne ad eum mīsērunt. Quī cum

eum in itinere convēnissent sēque ad pedēs prōiēcissent suppliciterque locūtī flentēs pācem

petīssent, atque eōs in eō locō quō tum essent suum adventum exspectāre iussisset, pāruērunt. Eō

postquam Caesar pervēnit, obsidēs, arma, servōs quī ad eōs perfūgissent, poposcit. Dum ea

conquīruntur et cōnferuntur, [nocte intermissā] circiter hominum mīlia VĪ eius pāgī quī

Verbigēnus appellātur, sīve timōre perterritī, nē armīs trāditīs suppliciō adficerentur, sīve spē

salūtis inductī, quod in tantā multitūdine dediticiōrum suam fugam aut occultārī aut omnīnō

ignōrārī posse exīstimārent, prīmā nocte ē castrīs Helvētiōrum ēgressī ad Rhēnum fīnēsque

Germānōrum contendērunt.

The Helvetii surrender. Six thousand try to escape (H-T).

inopiā adductī: inopiā is ablative of cause (AG 404 b) (Kelsey). After active verbs the cause is

seldom expressed by the simple ablative, but either by a preposition like propter or ob with

accusative, or by the ablatives causā, grātiā with a genitive. Sometimes, however, as here, the

ablative is used with ductus, mōtus, etc. (Spencer).

quī…pāruērunt: between the main subject quī and its verb paruērunt there intervene four

subordinate clauses, in the last of which the subject is suddenly changed (Stock).

quī: = illī lēgātī. Note that quī stands first in its sentence because it is the word most closely

connected with the preceding sentence: “now when these [ambassadors]…” (L-E); treat it as the



equivalent of a demonstrative (Spencer).

eum…convēnissent: conveniō is usually intransitive in Caesar, but here it is treated as a

transitive compound (M-T): “they had met him.”

sēque…prōiēcissent: “and had prostrated themselves” (Kelsey).

ad pedēs: “at his feet,” i.e., at the feet of Caesar (Harkness). Observe that the idiom is faithful to

the idea of motion in the verb prōiēcissent (H-T).

suppliciter: adverb, “in suppliant fashion” (Kelsey).

flentēs: take with petīssent (Walpole).

petīssent: = petīvissent.

eōs: = Helvētiōs (A-G), not lēgātōs (Kelsey), i.e., the whole of the Helvetii, who were ordered

not to retreat any farther, but to await Caesar’s arrival (Anthon).

quō tum essent: “where they [the Helvetians] were said to be” (Anthon). Subjunctive of integral

part or attraction (AG 593) (A-G): a clause depending upon a subjunctive clause will itself take

the subjunctive if regarded as an integral part of that clause. In his original direct discourse

Caesar said quō nunc estis, “where you now are” (Walker).

iussisset: sc. cum Caesar; this change of subject, though unusual in Latin, is justified by the

mention of eum earlier in the sentence (A-G).

eō: “thither,” to that place” (Harkness), referring to the place where the Helvetii were when they

sent the ambassadors, and where Caesar had ordered them to remain until he should arrive

(Anthon).



postquam Caesar pervēnit: indicative with the temporal conjunction postquam (AG 543).

servōs: = fugitīvōs, fugitive slaves from the Roman Army (see Chapter 23) (Walker).

quī ad eōs perfūgissent: i.e., fugitive slaves, “who (as he said) had fled” (Kelsey). Caesar in his

direct demand would say quī perfūgērunt, but the subjunctive is used in the indirect discourse

(AG 580) (A-G). Fugiō = “run away,” while perfugiō = “run away / escaped to a distinctly

named place” (Walpole).

ea: “these [things]”; the use of the neuter, when referring to obsidēs and servōs, as well as arma

(H-T), shows that they were here regarded as the spoils of victory, rather than as men

(Harkness).

conquīruntur et cōnferuntur: to express the passive it is often better in English to use the

active form: “while they were hunting these up and bringing them together.” The present

indicative is regularly used with dum meaning “while” (AG 556) (A-G), but best translated into

English by a past tense (L-E).

nocte intermissā: “a night having intervened” (H-T) for the collection of the men and weapons

(ea) required (Moberly). A night intervening between the time of their promise and the time

when they must give up their arms (Spencer).

circiter: adverb modifying sex mīlia (Harkness).

Verbigēnus: from the parts between Berne and Lucerne (A-G). The Helvetii consisted of four

divisions, or cantons (pāgī). The Tigurini have already been mentioned in Chapter 12 (Hodges).

perterritī: sc. erant; agreeing with the persons (hominum) referred to in mīlia (A-G) by a

construction according to sense (Harkness). The prefix per- intensifies the force of this



compound (H-T): “thoroughly frightened.”

nē…suppliciō adficerentur…spē salūtis inductī: "[the fear] that they would be visited with

punishment …,” i.e., put to death (Hodges). They were motivated either by sheer desperation or

with the hope of escape. Note that after verbs of fearing (timōre perterritī [erant]) nē = “that” or

“lest” (AG 564) (A-G).

armīs trāditīs: “after giving up their arms” (Kelsey); “if their weapons were handed over.”

spē salūtis: salūtis (= lībertātis (Walpole)) is objective genitive (AG 348) with spē: “hope of

safety” (Kelsey).

in tantā multitūdine: the in expresses cause: “since so many where in the surrender” (H-T).

dediticiōrum: “of those who had surrendered” (Kelsey); partitive genitive (AG 346) with

multitūdine. These were persons who had voluntarily surrendered, with the condition of not

being reduced to slavery (Spencer).

fugam: subject of posse (Harkness).

occultārī aut omnīnō ignōrārī: “be hidden” i.e., from Caesar (for a time at least, until they had

a sufficient start (Hodges)) “or remain altogether unknown” i.e., remain wholly unnoticed by

anybody (A-G).

quod…exīstimārent: the supposed reason of the Helvetii, hence the subjunctive (AG 540) (A-

G). When the reason is given on the authority of the writer, the indicative is used: “they

supposed their flight could either be concealed or be entirely unnoticed” (H-T).

prīmā nocte: “as soon as it was night,” more literally, “at the beginning of the night” (Anthon);

“in the early part of the night” (Harkness). The collection of hostages, etc., was not completed on



the first day, and in the night intervening (nocte intermissā) between the first day and the second

the six thousand attempted to escape (M-T).

ad…contendērunt: “made (rapidly) for” (A-G).

Rhēnum fīnēsque Germānōrum: if the fugitives had reached the Germans, they might have

secured sympathy and active help against the Romans (Hodges). Their first step there would

have been to induce the Germans to enter the dispeopled Switzerland (Moberly). The

conjunction –que is often used to add, not a different thing, but a new aspect of the thing already

mentioned: “the Rhine which forms the German frontier” (M-T).



BOOK 1, Chapter 28:

Quod ubi Caesar resciit, quōrum per fīnēs ierant hīs utī conquīrerent et redūcerent, sī sibi

pūrgātī esse vellent, imperāvit; reductōs in hostium numerō habuit; reliquōs omnēs obsidibus,

armīs, perfugīs trāditīs in dēditiōnem accēpit. Helvētiōs, Tulingōs, Latobrigōs in fīnēs suōs, unde

erant profectī, revertī iussit, et, quod omnibus frūgibus āmissīs domī nihil erat quō famem

tolerārent, Allobrogibus imperāvit ut iīs frūmentī cōpiam facerent; ipsōs oppida vīcōsque, quōs

incenderant, restituere iussit. Id eā maximē ratiōne fēcit, quod nōluit eum locum unde Helvētiī

discesserant vacāre, nē propter bonitātem agrōrum Germānī, quī trāns Rhēnum incolunt, ex suīs

fīnibus in Helvētiōrum fīnēs trānsīrent et fīnitimī Galliae prōvinciae Allobrogibusque essent.

Boiōs petentibus Haeduīs, quod ēgregiā virtūte erant cognitī, ut in fīnibus suīs conlocārent,

concessit; quibus illī agrōs dedērunt quōsque posteā in parem iūris lībertātisque condiciōnem

atque ipsī erant recēpērunt.

The six thousand fugitives are recaptured and put to death. The others are sent back to their

homes (Walker).

quod: accustom yourself to the common use of the relative pronoun or adjective at the beginning

of a sentence, where our idiom expects a demonstrative or personal pronoun (A-G): “now when

Caesar found this out,” referring to the flight of the Verbigens (Kelsey).

resciit: the verb resciscō means to ascertain something which has been concealed or is

unexpected (Harkness).



quōrum: precedes its antecedent hīs (Kelsey), which is dative with imperāvit (AG 367). The

order for translation is: imperāvit hīs, per fīnēs quōrum ierant, utī [eōs] conquīrerent et

redūcerent (Anthon).

ierant: i.e., īre coeperant; otherwise conquīrerent and redūcerent are wanting in meaning

(Spencer).

utī conquīrerent et redūcerent: sc. illōs fugitīvōs (M-T): “to search them out and bring them

back” (L-E); substantive purpose clause governed by imperāvit (AG 563) (A-G).

sī sibi pūrgātī esse vellent: “if they wished to clear themselves in his eyes” (M-T); “if they

wished to be blameless in his sight”; sibi = literally “to him [Caesar],” the subject of the main

verb (M-T); dative of reference (AG 376, 377) (Harkness), or ethical dative (AG 380) (Walpole).

Pūrgātī is a perfect participle used as an adjective (A-G): “acquitted,” “free from guilt” (Kelsey),

“excused of sharing in their guilt” (Spencer), literally, “cleansed.” In the direct discourse the

indicative would be used in this condition (Harkness), but here, as part of Caesar’s order, the

subjunctive vellent is used (M-T).

reductōs in hostium numerō habuit: sc. eōs: “he counted them, when brought back, as

enemies” (M-T), i.e., he either caused them to be put to death, or sold them as slaves, most

probably the latter (Anthon), for they had broken a military capitulation (Moberly). In hostium

numerō habēre is a characterictically Roman expression which means to slaughter

indiscriminately (Walpole). “Overtaking the Helvetii in their flight to the Rhine, Caesar forced

them to surrender their arms, and to pledge themselves to return to their own country. Six

thousand of them who had fled in the night, in order to escape this disgrace, were brought back



by the Roman cavalry, and, to use Caesar’s own language, ‘treated as enemies’” (Michelet,

History of France, vol. i. pg. 46).

obsidibus, armīs, perfugīs trāditīs: “once they had handed over hostages, weapons, and

deserters”; circumstantial ablative absolute (AG 419).

in dēditiōnem accēpit: by this act they became formally the subjects of the Republic, and were

entitled to its protection, as well as required to obey its requisitions and pay tribute (A-G).

in fīnēs suōs: suōs refes to the subject of revertī (M-T).

unde erant profectī: unde= ē quibus (Kelsey). The use of the indicative shows that this is not part

of Caesar’s order (iussit), but an explanatory comment added by the historian (M-T).

revertī: “to turn back” (from a march or journey; redīre, “to go back” from a place of rest) (A-G).

omnibus frūgibus āmissīs: “since all the produce of the fields was gone”; no crops had been

planted this season (Kelsey). They had destroyed all the provision, their towns and homes, etc.

before they set out on their migration (Spencer).

domī: i.e., in their own country (Kelsey); locative case (AG 427.3).

nihil erat: sc. eīs: “they had nothing,” literally, “there was nothing [left] for them.”

quō famem tolerārent: “whereby they might relieve their starvation” (Hodges); relative clause of

characteristic with subjunctive (AG 535) (A-G).

Allobrogibus imperāvit ut…facerent: verbs of commanding (e.g., imperāvit) govern the dative

(e.g., Allobrogibus), and are followed by ut or nē with the subjunctive (e.g., facerent) (AG 563); to

both of these rules iubeō is an exception (e.g., Helvētiōs iussit revertī) (M-T).



ut iīs frūmentī cōpiam facerent: “to furnish them a supply of grain,” literally, “that they should

make an abundance of grain to them” (Harkness). The expression cōpiam facere means “to have

plenty, and make others partake of it” (Spencer).

ipsōs: the Helvetians and their allies (the Tulingi and Latobrigi (Anthon)) as opposed to the others

(Allobrogibus) who were to provide food (A-G).

quōs incenderant: i.e., the particular towns mentioned in Chapter 5; hence the indicative,

expressing a fact stated by the historian Caesar (H-T). The subjunctive would make the expression

more general–any towns which they had burned (Harkness).

restituere: “to rebuild” (see Chapter 5) (Anthon).

eā maximē ratiōne: “with this view” (A-G); “principally for this reason,” explain by quod

nōluit… (Harkness).

unde: = ē quō (Kelsey).

vacāre: “to be empty” (H-T); “to remain uninhabited”; “to be unoccupied” (M-T). Plutarch (Vīta

Caesaris, 18) makes mention of, and bestows just praise on, the policy of Caesar, in compelling

the Helvetii to reoccupy their country (Anthon). Caesar wanted to keep the warlike Helvetii as a

bulwark for the Province against the Germans (M-T).

nē… Germānī… trānsīrent…essent: substantive clause with an implied verb of fearing (AG

564): “he didn’t want those lands to remain uninhabited [for fear] that the Germans would cross

over…and would be…” Alternatively: a negative purpose clause (AG 531): “…so that the

Germans would not cross over…and would not be…” As the Helvetians were now reduced to



about one third of their former number, much of their land must have been left unoccupied, and

was probably soon seized upon by German immigrants (Kelsey).

Galliae prōvinciae Allobrogibusque: dative with fīnitimī (AG 384): “very close to the province

and (especially) the Allobroges”; for the Allobroges were a part of the province (Walker). The

Helvetii were thus in the Roman manner stationed as a kind of colony on the frontier towards

Germany. The wisdom of the Romans in the defence of their Empire is not less remarkable than

their prowess in war (A-G).

bonitātem agrōrum: “the good quality (“fertility” (M-T)) of the land” (Kelsey). In western

Switzerland, east of the Jura, the cultivation there now is like that of a garden (Moberly).

Boiōs…concessit: Boiōs is put first in the sentence for the sake of the emphatic contrast with

Helvētiōs, Tulingōs, Latrobigōs (Walker). The order for translation is: concessit Aeduīs, petentibus

ut collocārent Boiōs in suīs fīnibus, quod illī [Boiī] cognitī erant ēgregiā virtūte” (Anthon). Some

of the Boii had in A.U.C. 364 crossed the Great St. Bernard Pass in company with the Lingones,

and occupied part of the Etruscan territory. We thus trace their connection with the Aeduan part of

Gaul, and we understand the motive of kindred which induced the Aeduans to retain them. Besides

this, they would be useful to them as a rampart against the Arverni and Sequani, their ancient rivals

(Moberly) and to guard her frontier against the Germans (Walker). It will be remembered that the

Boii were emigrating when they joined the Helvetians and had no proper home to return to. The

Aeduans gave them land between the Elaver and the Liger rivers, and they appear later in several

parts of Gaul. Their prowess in war made them valuable allies (A-G).

petentibus Haeduīs: “he granted the request of the Aeduans” (M-T); “to the Aeduans, at their

request, he granted”; dative with the intransitive compound verb concessit (AG 370) (A-G).



quod ēgregiā virtūte erant cognitī: sc. Boiī esse (M-T): “because they [the Boii] were known [to

be men] of remarkable valor.” This is the reason for the request of the Aedui (Harkness). Ēgregiā

virtūte is ablative of quality (AG 415).

ut in fīnibus suīs conlocārent: this clause is the object both of concessit and of petentibus

(Harkness). Before the migration of the Helvetii the Boii were not settled in a definite home

(Hodges).

quibus: = et illīs: “to them therefore” (Walpole), i.e., to the Boii (Harkness).

illī: refers to the Aedui (Harkness).

quōsque: = et eōs, i.e., the Boii (Kelsey).

posteā: perhaps after the great uprising in Gaul led by Vercingetorix, narrated in Book VII

(Kelsey).

parem iūris lībertātisque condiciōnem atque ipsī erant: “a share of civil rights and freedom

equal with their own” (M-T); “equal condition of rights and freedom as they themselves enjoyed”

(Harkness); “the same terms of freedom as they themselves had” (H-T). Atque (āc) generally

means “as” or “than” after words of likeness and comparison (L-E).



BOOK 1, Chapter 29:

In castrīs Helvētiōrum tabulae repertae sunt litterīs Graecīs cōnfectae et ad Caesarem

relātae, quibus in tabulīs nōminātim ratiō cōnfecta erat, quī numerus domō exīsset eōrum, quī

arma ferre possent, et item sēparātim, quot puerī, senēs mulierēsque. [Quārum omnium rērum]

summa erat capitum Helvētiōrum milium CCLXIIĪ, Tulingōrum mīlium XXXVĪ, Latobrigōrum

XIIIĪ, Rauracōrum XXIIĪ, Boiōrum XXXIĪ; ex hīs quī arma ferre possent ad mīlia nōnāgintā

duo. Summa omnium fuērunt ad mīlia CCCLXVIIĪ. Eōrum quī domum rediērunt cēnsū habitō,

ut Caesar imperāverat, repertus est numerus milium C et X.

The comparative estimate of the number of Helvetii who returned home and the number that had

gone forth from their country (H-T).

castrīs: the corral described in Chapter 26 (Kelsey).

tabulae: “lists” (Anthon); “muster-rolls” (L-E); literally, “tablets” generally used for business

documents (Kelsey) of the shape of a folding slate, with wax spread inside, written on with a

pointed instrument called a stilus (A-G).

litterīs Graecīs confectae: “made out / written in Greek characters,” though not in the Greek

language: the words were Celtic, the characters were Greek (Anthon). These letters were probably

learned from people at Massilia (Marseilles, a Greek colony in the south of Gaul (Spencer)), as the

Gauls had no alphabet of their own. The Druids made use of Greek letters, but the Gauls in general

seem to have been ignorant of them. A large number of Gallic inscriptions in Greek characters



have been discovered in central France (L-E); specimens of Gallic names on coins discovered at

Alesia appear with the names DUBNOREX, ΔEIVICIACOS, VERCINGETORIXS in Greek

characters (A-G).

et: connects repertae sunt and relātae (sunt) (Hodges).

quibus in tabulīs: “on which” (L-E); tabulīs is redundant.

nōminātim: “by name” (Kelsey).

ratiō quī numerus…exīsset: quī numerus = quot (Walpole): “an accounting” (A-G); “a

statement” (Kelsey); “an estimate” (Anthon) …“showing what number…” (Harkness); quī…

exīsset is an indirect question (AG 575) (A-G). Exīsset = exiisset.

quī arma ferre possent: subjunctive in a relative clause of characteristic (AG 534) (A-G) or a

second indirect question dependent on ratiō (AG 575) (Spencer).

quot puerī, senēs mulierēsque: sc. exīssent (Walker). There is a sudden and ungrammatical

change from the subordinate relative clauses (quī…quī) to a coordinate clause, coupled by et. In

strict grammar puerī, senēs, mulierēsque should be genitives dependent on ratiō; as it is, a verb

must be supplied to suit the sense from cōnfecta est, e.g., conscriptī sunt: “In which list an account

was drawn up of the number of those who had left their home, who were able to bear arms, and

likewise the children, old men, and women [who had left home were entered] separately” (M-T).

When three or more nouns stand side by side in the same grammatical construction, they are either:

1. All connected by conjunctions;

2. Or none of them are connected by conjunctions;

3. Or –que is appended to the last item, as here. (M-T).



[quārum omnium rērum] summa: “the sum of all these classes / items / things” (Harkness);

“under all these various headings” (M-T). Rērum here used of persons; Caesar was thinking of the

numbers and categories rather than the persons (Kelsey). The grand total of 368,000; of whom

exactly a fourth part were men capable of bearing arms. As 100,000 returned home, and the Boii,

who had originally been 32,000, were spared, it would appear that about 226,000 Helvetii perished

in this four months’ campaign (M-T).

capitum Helvētiōrum: as we say in English so many “head” of cattle, but we do not use the term

of human beings (Kelsey) (cf. per capita tax). Capitum is best rendered here by our English word

“souls” (Anthon). The use of capita is common in the Roman census (Harkness). This seems to be

in careless contempt for the persons of the motley multitude (L-E).

mīlium: predicate genitive (AG 343): “the total of all these items was [of] 263,000 souls of the

Helvetii” (Hodges).

quī: refers to hīs [mīlibus] as its antecedent (Harkness); the gender of quī is in agreement with the

implied hominum inherent in the antecedent.

ad mīlia nōnāgintā duo: ad has an adverbial force (Harkness): “about 92,000” (A-G).

summa: “the sum total” (L-E); “the aggregate” (Kelsey). The total given by Caesar is considered

too high by some commentators (L-E). Polyaenus gives the number of the Helvetii at 80,000.

Plutarch (Vītae Caesaris, 18) makes the whole number 300,000. Strabo states that 400,000 Gauls

perished, and that the rest returned home. The discrepancy is occasioned, no doubt, by the errors of

copyists (Anthon).

fuērunt: in agreement with the plural predicate (mīlia CCCLXVIII), not with its subject summa

(Hodges).



domum: accusative of place to which without a preposition (AG 427).

cēnsū habitō: “when an actual enumeration had been made” (Harkness); “a calculation of the

number having been made” (M-T); “a census being taken,” a number or review being made

(Spencer). The term cēnsus is here employed in its general sense. In its Roman acceptation, it

meant a review of the people, and a valuation of their estates, together with an estimate of their

numbers (Anthon). At Rome such a census was taken every five years (Harkness) and was

administered by a specially appointed official called a cēnsor.

mīlium C et X: according to these numbers 20,000 disappeared between the battle and the return

home. Caesar only accounts for 6000, the men of the pāgus Verbigenus (M-T). Adding the Boii,

who were adopted by the Aedui, this number gives a total of 142,000 survivors, making the loss

of the Helvetians and their allies 263,000 (L-E). Even if the Boii are not included, the number of

killed, captured, and missing during the campaign would be not far below 250,000. No doubt

some escaped singly to other tribes, but still the slaughter must have been frightful. Some later

writers make the numbers smaller than here given (Hodges). However, the carnage seems

extraordinary even under the conditions of ancient warfare (A-G). Caesar’s conduct of this

campaign–his first one in command of a large army–was characterized by great energy and

ability. He exhibited a degree of caution which was natural under the circumstances. The slow

movement of the enemy and their lack of unity helped him greatly (L-E).



BOOK 1, INTRODUCTION TO CHAPTERS 30 TO 54:

THE CAMPAIGN AGAINST ARIOVISTUS.

The latter half of Book 1 is taken up with the expulsion of a military settlement of Germans,

which had been made a few years before under Ariovistus, a chief of the Suevi. The occasion of

this new campaign was the following: The Aedui, jealous of the Sequani, who lived a little to the

north, had laid excessive tolls on their trade which consisted chiefly in the export of salted meats

for the southern market. This led to a war, in which the Sequani had invited the aid of the

Germans under Ariovistus, about three years before the campaign of Caesar. The Germans, once

in Gaul, had exacted a large share of territory and proved to be grasping and oppressive masters.

Meanwhile the Helvetian war began to threaten. The Roman Senate, to make safe, passed

decrees promising favor and friendship to the Aedui (see Chapter 11); and at the same time sent

messengers to Ariovistus, saluting him as king and friend (Chapter 35), recognizing his claims

on Gaul, and, it was said, inviting him to Rome. This was the year before, in Caesar’s

consulship. Now, however, that the fear of the Helvetians was passed, Caesar found himself

obliged to take sides in the old quarrel (A-G).

The complete success of Caesar’s campaign against the Helvetii at once established his prestige

in Gaul. Representatives from most of the states came to beg his aid against their common

enemy, Ariovistus, a German king who had established himself in Gaul. It was still early in July,

and there was time for another campaign that summer. Caesar willingly accepted the task, for if

ever he was to become master of Gaul he must first put out of his way this rival conqueror; and

in any case it was most important that the Germans should be kept to the east of the Rhine. Yet

the Germans were no mean antagonists, and Caesar was ready to make some concessions rather



than fight them. He first proposed to Ariovistus that they settle their differences in friendly

conference, but he met a haughty refusal. Determined to bring the king to terms before he should

be joined by other German tribes, Caesar marched against him with all speed.

During a few days’ halt at Vesontio, the soldiers heard such fearful tales of the Germans that

they were on the point of mutiny. By a masterly speech Caesar quieted their fears and aroused

their enthusiasm to the highest pitch; and at once he led them on toward the enemy. Never again

during the Gallic campaigns did his soldiers give him trouble.

Impressed by Caesar’s activity, Ariovistus in his turn now proposed a conference; but when they

met he replied boastfully to Caesar’s demands, and the interview was broken off by an attack of

the German guard. Caesar refused to meet Ariovistus a second time, but sent two

representataives in his place. These Ariovistus threw into chains. The negotiations were thus

finally broken off.

At once Ariovistus marched past Caesar’s camp, keeping up on the slopes of a mountain where

he was safe from attack, and boldly established his camp in such a way as to command the road

by which Caesar had come, and by which his provisions were to follow. Caesar immediately

offered battle, but the Germans were not ready to fight. Five days later Caesar marched back past

the German camp and fortified and garrisoned a small camp to protect the way for his provisions.

The Germans were successful in an assault on this small camp.

At last Caesar determined to force a battle, and he marched straight at the German camp. As this

was not fortified, Ariovistus was obliged to lead out his army and draw it up against the Romans.

Caesar in person led his right wing, which was successful; his left, on the contrary, was beaten

back. The reserves, hurrying to this spot, decided the contest. The Germans broke and fled to the



river Ill, a Branch of the Rhine, so closedly pursued that only a few, including, however, the

king, escaped to the other bank.

In the two campaigns of this one year important results were achieved. The Rhine for the first

time became the frontier of the Roman possessions; the tide of barbarian invasion was rolled

back for five hundred years; the destiny of Gaul as a future dependency of Rome was fixed; and

the Romans’ traditional fear of the Gauls and the Germans was dispelled (Walker).

BOOK 1, Chapter 30:

Bellō Helvētiōrum cōnfectō tōtius ferē Galliae lēgātī, prīncipēs cīvitātum, ad Caesarem

grātulātum convēnērunt: intellegere sēsē, tametsī prō veteribus Helvētiōrum iniūriīs populī

Rōmānī ab hīs poenās bellō repetīsset, tamen eam rem nōn minus ex ūsū [terrae] Galliae quam

populī Rōmānī accidisse, proptereā quod eō cōnsiliō flōrentissimīs rēbus domōs suās Helvētiī

relīquissent utī tōtī Galliae bellum īnferrent imperiōque potīrentur, locumque domiciliō ex magnā

cōpiā dēligerent quem ex omnī Galliā opportunissimum ac frūctuōsissimum iūdicāssent,

reliquāsque cīvitātēs stīpendiāriās habērent. Petiērunt utī sibi concilium tōtīus Galliae in diem

certam indīcere idque Caesaris facere voluntāte licēret: sēsē habēre quāsdam rēs quās ex

commūnī cōnsēnsū ab eō petere vellent. Eā rē permissā diem conciliō cōnstituērunt et iūre

iūrandō nē quis ēnūntiāret, nisi quibus commūnī cōnsiliō mandātum esset, inter sē sānxērunt.

The Celtic states send congratulations to Caesar, and ask leave to hold a general council to

discuss certain matters touching their common interests (M-T).



bellō Helvētiōrum: “the war with the Helvetii,” literally, “of the Helvetii” (Harkness).

Galliae: used here in its limited sense (Harkness), i.e., the division named Celtica, the third of

the three divisions (H-T); Belgica was at this time preparing for war (Anthon).

prīncipēs: the most influential men, not necessarily the magistrates (L-E).

ad Caesarem grātulātum: grātulātum is the accusative supine of grātulor, expressing purpose

(AG 509): “to congratulate Caesar.” He was with his army in an entrenched camp among the

Lingones, probably in the place where he had received the submission of the Helvetii (L-E).

intellegere: the beginning of indirect discourse dependent on an implied verb of “saying” like

dīcentēs: “[saying] that they understood that, although…” (Kelsey). The indirect discourse is

here converted to direct discourse, with changes underlined: intellegimus nōs, tametsī prō

veteribus Helvētiōrum iniūriīs populī Rōmānī ab hīs poenās bellō repetiistī (repetierīs), tamen

eam rem nōn minus ex ūsū terrae Galliae quam populī Rōmānī accidisse; proptereā quod eō

consiliō florentissimīs rēbus domōs suās Helvētiī relīquērunt, utī tōtī Galliae bellum īnferrent

imperiōque potīrentur locumque domiciliō ex magnā cōpiā dēligerent, quem ex omnī Galliā

opportūnissimum…iūdicāssent, reliquāsque cīvitātis stipendiariās habērent (A-G).

sēsē: = sē. The envoys said “we.” The reflexive pronoun suī, sibi, sē(sē), sē(sē) or the corre-

sponding possessive adjective suus,-a,-um is regularly used in indirect discourse wherever a

pronoun of the first person is changed to one of the third. In this use the reflexive is often called

the indirect reflexive, in contrast with the direct reflexive, which refers to the subject of the

clause in which it stands (Walker).

tametsī: usually in Caesar (as here) followed by tamen (Walpole).



Helvētiōrum iniūriīs populī Rōmānī: Helvētiōrum is subjective genitive (AG 343 Note 1) and

populī Rōmānī is objective genitive (AG 348), both depending on the same noun, iniūriīs

(Stock): “wrongs inflicted upon the Romans by the Helvetians” (H-T). These iniūriae (such as

the defeat of Cassius) are discussed in Chapter 12 (Hodges).

ab hīs poenās…repetīsset: sc. Caesar: “he had inflicted punishment upon them” (A-G); “from

these (i.e., the Helvetii) he had sought satisfaction” (Harkness); more literally, “he had claimed

the penalty from them” (Hodges). Repetīsset = repetīvisset (Kelsey).

nōn minus ex ūsū: “as much to the advantage” (Spencer), literally, “from use,” very much like

the English “of use to” (Harkness). This was true in a far deeper sense than the Gauls then

understood it. The victory of Caesar over the Helvetii was fraught with vast consequences to

them (L-E).

[terrae] Galliae: = terrae Gallicae (Anthon). Terra is often followed by the name of a country

put in apposition with it, instead of an adjective agreeing with it, or the name of the country in

the genitive depending on it: “the Gallic country,” or “the country of Gaul” (Andrews).

accidisse: “it had turned out” (Kelsey).

quod…Helvētiī relīquissent: subjunctive because the presumed cause is reported, and the

subordinate clause is part of indirect discourse.

eō cōnsiliō: “with this design,” explained by the purpose clause utī…habērent (A-G).

flōrentissimīs rēbus: translate this ablative absolute with a concessive / adversative clause (A-G):

“though their condition was very prosperous” (H-T); “though their affairs were in a most



prosperous condition” (Hodges); i.e., with no plea of necessity (A-G). It does not seem probable

that the Helvetii were led to emigrate through motives of ambition alone (L-E).

suās: this is a direct reflexive, since it refers to Helvētiī, the subject of the clause in which it

stands (Walker).

utī tōtī Galliae bellum īnferrent: tōtī Galliae is a dative indirect object with the compound verb

īnferrent (AG 370). Note how this purpose clause (AG 531) is anticipated by eō conciliō: “with

the purpose of making war on all of Gaul” (H-T).

imperiōque potīrentur: potior takes an ablative object (AG 410): “to gain control of the

sovereignty” (L-E), i.e., over Gaul (Walpole).

domiciliō: “for habitation”; dative of service / purpose (AG 382, Note 1) (A-G).

ex magnā cōpiā: sc. locōrum (Kelsey): “from / out of the great abundance,” i.e., of places which

they would have in all Gaul (Harkness). All of Gaul lay before them for the choosing (Kelsey).

opportūnissimum ac frūctuōsissimum: “the most suitable and the most productive” (Kelsey).

The Helvetii are credited with having had an eye to the two things which give value to land,

convenience of situation and fertility (Stock).

iūdicāssent: = iūdicāvissent: “they should decide,” literally “they should have decided” (Walker).

stīpendiāriās: “tributaries”: the word derives from stīpem and pendō, literally, “those paying a

sum of money” (M-T). The stīpendiāriae urbēs of the Roman provinces were subject to the

payment of a fixed money tribute, stīpendium, in contradistinction to the vectigālēs, who paid a

certain portion, as a tenth or twentieth of the produce of the lands, their cattle, or customs

(Spencer). The Gauls already knew what submission to a foreign invader meant (L-E).



habērent: in the same construction as īnferrent, potīrentur, dēligerent (Hodges).

petiērunt utī…facere…licēret: sēsē habēre: Note the change from subjunctive in a substantive

purpose clause (utī…licēret) to the accusative and infinitive indirect discourse (sēsē habēre) (H-T).

sibi: construe with licēret (Harkness) which takes dative (AG 455.1): “that they be allowed,”

literally, “that it be permitted for them”; “they requested permission to” (Walker).

concilium tōtīus Galliae: the envoys mentioned at the beginning of this chapter did not constitute

this council. They issued a call for representatives from each state of central Gaul (Walker). Such

councils were a common device among the Gauls and often used by Caesar for his own purpose

(L-E). Of course Caesar had no authority either to allow or to prohibit a congress of independent

Gaul. But, considering his power and ambition, the Gauls thought it best to secure his approval

(voluntāte, not auctōritāte) beforehand. They also had business that specially concerned him (A-G).

in diem certam indīcere: “appoint for a fixed time” (Hodges); “set up for a particular day” (Anthon).

idque Caesaris voluntāte: that he might not suppose that this meeting meant conspiracy against

him (Moberly). The approval of Caesar was sought simply to avoid any misunderstanding on his

part of the object of the conference (L-E). The request shows that they were impressed by

Caesar’s power, and may fairly be regarded as the first step in their submission to him (Walker).

sēsē habēre quāsdam rēs…vellent: sc. dīcentēs: “[saying] that they had certain matters which

they wished to ask of him” (Anthon). This is the reason for their request (Hodges).

ex commūnī cōnsēnsū: “in accordance with the general consent / understanding,” i.e., if the

general consent of their countrymen could be first obtained (Anthon); “with the common

consent,” i.e., of their people; literally, “from the common consent,” implying that the action is to



proceed from this, or grow out of it (Harkness). The Gauls asked leave to hold a council in order

to obtain the common consent of the Celtic tribes before making their appeal to Caesar (M-T).

eā rē permissā: ablative absolute: “when this request was granted” (Kelsey).

conciliō: this assembly was one in which all cities of Gaul, without exception, were represented

(Moberly).

iūre iūrandō…sānxērunt: sc. in eō conciliō: “[in that council] they mutually agreed under oath”

(L-E); “they made a compact with one another under oath” (Hodges); “they ordained under oath

[of secrecy]”; the object is nē quis ēnūntiāret…(etc.) (A-G). Supply in eō conciliō; i.e., when the

council met they bound themselves by taking an oath (Harkness). Iūre iūrandō (literally, “by

swearing an oath”) is an ablative gerundive construction (AG 507).

nē quis ēnūntiāret: “that no one (literally, “not anyone”) should disclose [the results of] their

deliberations” (Anthon). Subjunctive in a substantive purpose clause with nē (AG 563), after

sanxērunt used as a verb of commanding (A-G).

nisi quibus commūnī cōnsiliō mandātum esset: sc. eīs as the antecedent of quibus (Harkness):

“except such as their common decision charged with that duty” (M-T); “except to (those) to

whom it [the duty of so doing] had been assigned by general agreement” (Hodges); “unless those

[disclose it] to whom this duty should be assigned by the common council” (H-T); “except those

unto whom this office should be assigned by the assembly at large,” i.e., that the result of their

deliberations should be communicated to Caesar by individuals whom the general assembly

should authorize so to do, and by no others (Anthon). Quibus is dative with mandātum esset, the

impersonal passive of an intransitive verb (AG 372); it is pluperfect subjunctive, replacing the

future perfect in direct discourse (A-G).



sānxērunt: Sanciō itself means “to bind,” and followed by nē, “to bind a person (by oath or

penalty) not to do a thing” (M-T).

BOOK 1, Chapter 31:

Eō conciliō dīmissō, īdem prīncipēs cīvitātum quī ante fuerant ad Caesarem revertērunt

petiēruntque utī sibi sēcrētō in occultō dē suā omniumque salūte cum eō agere licēret. Eā rē

impetrātā sēsē omnēs flentēs Caesarī ad pedēs prōiēcērunt: nōn minus sē id contendere et

labōrāre nē ea quae dīxissent ēnūntiārentur quam utī ea quae vellent impetrārent, proptereā quod,

sī ēnūntiātum esset, summum in cruciātum sē ventūrōs vidērent. Locūtus est prō hīs Dīviciācus

Haeduus: Galliae tōtīus factiōnēs esse duās; hārum alterīus prīncipātum tenēre Haeduōs, alterīus

Arvernōs. Hī cum tantopēre dē potentātū inter sē multōs annōs contenderent, factum esse utī ab

Arvernīs Sēquanīsque Germānī mercēde arcesserentur. Hōrum prīmō circiter mīlia XV Rhēnum

trānsīsse; posteāquam agrōs et cultum et cōpiās Gallōrum hominēs ferī ac barbarī adamāssent,

trāductōs plūrēs; nunc esse in Galliā ad C et XX milium numerum. Cum hīs Haeduōs eōrumque

clientēs semel atque iterum armīs contendisse; magnam calamitātem pulsōs accēpisse, omnem

nōbilitātem, omnem senātum, omnem equitātum āmīsisse. Quibus proeliīs calamitātibusque

frāctōs, quī et suā virtūte et populī Rōmānī hospitiō atque amīcitiā plūrimum ante in Galliā

potuissent, coāctōs esse Sēquanīs obsidēs dare nōbilissimōs cīvitātis et iūre iūrandō cīvitātem

obstringere sēsē neque obsidēs repetītūrōs neque auxilium ā populō Rōmānō implōrātūrōs neque

recūsātūrōs quōminus perpetuō sub illōrum diciōne atque imperiō essent. Ūnum sē esse ex omnī

cīvitāte Haeduōrum quī addūcī nōn potuerit ut iūrāret aut līberōs suōs obsidēs daret. Ob eam rem



sē ex cīvitāte profūgisse et Rōmam ad senātum vēnisse auxilium postulātum, quod sōlus neque

iūre iūrandō neque obsidibus tenērētur. Sed pēius victōribus Sēquanīs quam Haeduīs victīs

accidisse, proptereā quod Ariovistus, rēx Germānōrum, in eōrum fīnibus cōnsēdisset tertiamque

partem agrī Sēquanī, quī esset optimus tōtīus Galliae, occupāvisset et nunc dē alterā parte tertiā

Sēquanōs dēcēdere iubēret, proptereā quod paucīs mēnsibus ante Harūdum mīlia hominum

XXIIIĪ ad eum vēnissent, quibus locus ac sēdēs parārentur. Futūrum esse paucīs annīs utī omnēs

ex Galliae fīnibus pellerentur atque omnēs Germānī Rhēnum trānsīrent; neque enim

cōnferendum esse Gallicum cum Germānōrum agrō neque hanc cōnsuētūdinem vīctūs cum illā

comparandam. Ariovistum autem, ut semel Gallōrum cōpiās proeliō vīcerit, quod proelium

factum sit ad Magetobrigam, superbē et crūdēliter imperāre, obsidēs nōbilissimī cuiusque līberōs

poscere et in eōs omnia exempla cruciātūsque ēdere, sī qua rēs nōn ad nūtum aut ad voluntātem

eius facta sit. Hominem esse barbarum, īrācundum, temerārium: nōn posse eius imperia diūtius

sustinērī. Nisi quid in Caesare populōque Rōmānō sit auxiliī, omnibus Gallīs idem esse

faciendum quod Helvētiī fēcerint, ut domō ēmigrent, aliud domicilium, aliās sēdēs, remōtās ā

Germānīs, petant fortūnamque, quaecumque accidat, experiantur. Haec sī ēnūntiāta Ariovistō

sint, nōn dubitāre quīn dē omnibus obsidibus quī apud eum sint gravissimum supplicium sūmat.

Caesarem vel auctōritāte suā atque exercitūs vel recentī victōriā vel nōmine populī Rōmānī

dēterrēre posse nē māior multitūdō Germānōrum Rhēnum trādūcātur, Galliamque omnem ab

Ariovistī iniūriā posse dēfendere.

In secret session they beseech Caesar to defend Gaul against Ariovistus, Diviciacus stating their

cause (Kelsey).



eō conciliō dīmissō: “when this assembly had been [held and] dissolved”; i.e., after providing

for the business now to be described (A-G); “when the assembly, [so summoned,] had been held

and had broken up” (Anthon). Caesar with characteristic brevity informs the reader of the

conference only by saying that it was broken up (Harkness), and leaves it to be inferred from the

fact that his permission was given (eā rē permissā, end of Chapter 30) that the council was

indeed held (L-E). Where the council of the leading men of Celtic Gaul was held we are not

informed; perhaps at Bibracte (Kelsey).

īdem: = eīdem (Kelsey); i.e., the same ones who had met with him earlier.

quī ante fuerant: sc. apud Caesarem: “who had been with Caesar on the previous occasion”

(Anthon).

petiēruntque utī…licēret: “they asked permission to,” as in Chapter 30 (Kelsey). When they

had come to Caesar before, they had had no authority to act for their states. Now the council had

authorized them to ask for Caesar’s help (Walpole).

sibi: refers to the subject of petiērunt (Harkness).

sēcrētō in occultō: “alone, in secret” (Harkness);“apart [from others] in a secret place” (A-G);

“privately” (Kelsey), apart from any other audience than Caesar (M-T), as a protection against

betrayal, and “in a secret place,” as a precaution against spies (Kelsey). This precaution indicates

how great the dread of Ariovistus was (L-E). Some editors regard in occultō as a mere gloss

(Anthon).

dē suā omniumque salūte: “for their own safety and [that] of all” (Walpole).

cum eō agere: “to confer with him” (Kelsey), i.e., with Caesar.



Caesarī ad pedēs prōiēcērunt: translate Caesarī as if genitive (Kelsey): “threw themselves at

Caesar’s feet,” literally “to Caesar at the feet” (Harkness); Caesarī is dative of reference (AG

376) (A-G), or the indirect object of the compound verb prōiēcērunt (AG 370) (Harkness).

Dīviciācus Haeduus: he had been the leader of the Aedui in their battle with Ariovistus (see

Chapter 19) (Moberly).

nōn minus…vidērent: sc. dīxērunt. At this point Diviciacus’ speech is reported in indirect

discourse; converted into direct discourse, with changes underlined, it is as follows: nōn minus id

contendimus et labōrāmus, nē ea quae dīxerimus ēnūntientur, quam utī ea quae volumus

impetrēmus; proptereā quod, sī ēnūntiātum erit, summum in cruciātum nōs ventūrōs vidēmus.

nōn minus se id contendere et labōrāre…impetrārent: sc. dīcentēs (Stock): “[saying] that

they strove and labored no less anxiously to prevent what they might say from being divulged,

than to obtain what they wish” (Anthon); “that they were as earnestly and as desperately anxious

that their secret should be kept as they were that their request should be granted” (Moberly). Id,

stands in apposition to nē…ēnūntiārentur and at the same time expresses purpose (AG 531)

(Harkness).

quae dīxissent: “what they should say” (Harkness); pluperfect subjunctive in indirect discourse

for the future perfect (dīxerint) in direct discourse. So also ēnūntiātum esset below (M-T).

quam: “than,” with the comparative degree adverb minus (Hodges).

sī ēnūntiātum esset: “if they were reported” (L-E); “if reports should get out” (Walpole); “if

disclosures should be (literally, “should have been”) made.” The verb is impersonal (Hodges).

The pluperfect subjunctive stands for a future perfect (a future more vivid condition) in direct

discourse (Walpole).



in cruciātum sē ventūrōs: “would suffer torture,” literally, “would come into torture” (Hodges);

“would meet with torture” (L-E).

Galliae…tenērī: the speech continues in indirect discourse, converted thus to direct discourse:

Galliae tōtīus factiōnēs sunt duae; hārum alterīus prīncipātum tenant Haeduī, alterīus Arvernī.

Hī cum…multōs annōs contenderent, factum est utī…Germānī…arcesserentur. Hōrum prīmō …

mīlia…trānsiērunt; posteāquam agrōs…hominēs…adamāvērunt, trāductī sunt plūrēs; nunc sunt

in Galliā ad CXX mīlium numerum (more probably ad…milīa numerō). Cum hīs Haeduī… armīs

contendērunt; magnam calamitātem pulsī accēpērunt, omnēs nōbilitātem…āmīsērunt. Quibus

proeliīs…fractī, quī plūrimum ante…potuerant, coācti sunt…obsidēs dare, etc. Ūnus ego sum ex

omnī cīvitāte…quī addūcī nōn potuerim ut iūrārem aut līberōs meōs obsidēs darem. Ob eam

rem…profūgī et Rōmam ad senātum vēnī…quod sōlus neque iūre iūrandō neque obsidibus

tenēbar.

Galliae tōtīus: not to be taken literally, but referring to the eastern part of Celtic Gaul (A-G).

factiōnēs…duās: “two parties” (A-G); “two leagues” made up of states (Kelsey). The regular

Latin word for “political parties,” derived from facere, in the sense which this has in the phrase

facere ab or cum aliquō, “to side with a person” (M-T). Factiō was originally a term of good

import and denoted merely a certain class or order of persons. Its meaning of “party” or “faction”

arose at a subsequent period (Anthon). The party of Druids, represented by Diviciacus, was in a

manner the “popular” party, strong especially in the large towns; it was opposed to the old clan

feeling kept up for ambitious purposes by military or tribal chiefs such as Orgetorix and

Dumnorix. The former, or “popular” party, was headed by the Aedui; the latter, or “aristocratic”

party, by the Sequani and Arverni. The Druids were a religious or priestly order, jealous of the



aristocracy of the tribe or clan, which latter represented what may be called the patriotic or

“native-Celtic” party (A-G).

hārum: sc. factiōnum (L-E).

alterīus… alterīus: “the one…the other” (A-G).

prīncipātum tenēre: prīncipātum is a preponderating influence exerted by one tribe over others,

which amounted to a virtual supremacy (L-E): “held the primary position”; “held the headship”

(Kelsey); “stood at the head,” referring to the Aedui and Averni (Anthon).

hī: “these,” i.e., the Aedui with their party on the one hand, and the Arverni with theirs on the

other (Harkness).

cum… multōs annōs contenderent: “while they had been striving for many years (and were

still striving)” (Hodges). The imperfect subjunctive is used here on the principal laid down for

the imperfect indicative (Walpole), to express a repeated and on-going action.

potentātū: = prīncipātū (Harkness): “the superiority” (Anthon); “political supremacy,” which

was the object for which the rival states were contending (M-T). Potentātus is rather an

uncommon word, used only here in Caesar, but still is to be met with in some good writers,

among them Livy and Lactantius (Anthon).

Arvernōs: these people inhabited the mountainous country southwest of the Aedui, the modern

Auvergne. They had been conquered by Rome in 121 B.C., but not reduced to a province. Before

their conquest they had been one of the most powerful tribes. Apparently in the earlier wars the

Aedui had befriended the Roman people from antagonism to these rivals (A-G). They traced

their origin back to Troy and therefore claimed kinship with the Romans (L-E).



factum esse utī…arcesserentur: “it came to pass that….were summoned” (A-G); “it had come

about that” (Kelsey); “the result was that…” Utī with the subjunctive forms a substantive result

clause (AG 568) (Harkness).

Sēquanīs: these were the rivals of the Aedui on the north (A-G). They were at first clients of the

Arverni, but seem to have succeeded them in the leadership of the faction opposed to the Aedui

(L-E). They entered into alliance with the Arverni because of their hatred of the Aedui. The strife

between the Sequani and the Aedui arose from the fact that the Arar (Saône) for a part of its

course formed the boundary between the two states, and each claimed the exclusive right to levy

tolls on passing vessels. Among its exports was bacon, which was highly esteem in Rome

(Kelsey). It was possibly the Sequani who were the first to suggest inviting in the Germans, and

this may have augmented their influence (L-E).

mercēde: “for hire,” “for pay” (Kelsey); ablative of price (AG 416). The German were at first

simply hired soldiers (L-E). This was fourteen years before Caesar came to Gaul (Walpole).

hōrum: = Germānōrum (Stock).

prīmō: apparently in 72 B.C. (L-E).

arcesserentur: “were brought over.” Finding themselves worsted by the Aedui, the Sequani

hired Germans to fight for them (Kelsey).

hōrum: “of these”; “of the latter,” referring to the Germans (A-G). Partitive genitive (AG 346)

(Harkness).

circiter: “about”; an adverb modifying quīndecim (Harkness).

trānsīsse: = trānsiisse.



posteāquam agrōs… trāductōs plūrēs: “that, after these savage and barbarous men had grown

fond of the lands, and manner of living, and abundance of the Gauls, a larger number had been

brought over” (Anthon). Posteāquam regularly takes an indicative verb, like postquam (Hodges),

but here its verb (adamāssent) is subjunctive because the subordinate clause is part of indirect

discourse.

cultum: “mode of life” (Harkness).

cōpiās: = opēs: “resources” (A-G); “riches,” “wealth” (Harkness). Cōpiae is generally used in

the plural for “forces,” and in the singular for “abundance” or “plenty.” But sometimes, as in the

present instance, the plural is used in the sense of “abundance” (Anthon).

ferī ac barbarī: “savage and uncouth” (Kelsey); “this fierce and barbarous people” (Mobery);

“wild and uncivilized”; the two practically synonymous words are used to put the case strongly,

as dīciōne atque imperiō below (Harkness). Ferus is the true Latain word, barbarus is the

foreign import from Greek (βάρβαρος) in its secondary sense of “uncivilized,” perhaps used here

in its original sense of “speaking an unintelligible language,” “foreign.” It was probably formed

to imitate the apparently unmeaning sounds of a foreign speech (M-T).

adamāssent: = adamāvissent (A-G): “had formed an eager desire for” (Kelsey). The ad- in

composition here intensifies the meaning of the root verb amāre, “fall in love with” (M-T).

trāductōs plūrēs: = plūrēs Germānōs trāductōs esse (A-G).

esse: sc. eōs, i.e.., Germānōs, as subject (Hodges).

nunc esse: sc. Germānōs (Stock).

ad C et XX milium numerum: “[up] to the number of 120,000” (Harkness).



clientēs: “dependents,” referring to the subject states (the Ambarri, Segusiavi, Aulerci) (A-G)) in

alliance with and dependent upon their power (Anthon). The smaller Gallic tribes naturally

attached themselves to the larger for the sake of protection, giving in return tribute and military

service. Some client states maintained a separate government and army, others did not (L-E).

semel atque iterum: “again and again,” literally, “once and again” (Harkness); “time and again”

(Kelsey).

calamitātem: explained by what follows (H-T).

pulsōs: sc. eōs as the subject of accēpisse and āmīsisse (Harkness): “as they were beaten, they

had suffered…and lost” (L-E).

omnem nōbilitātem, omnem senātum, omnem equitātum: an exaggeration; Diviciacus was

himself a nobleman, probably a senator; while his brother Dumnorix was a commander of the

Aeduan cavalry (A-G). The nobles and cavalry of the Aedui were, in fact, very prominent in the

campaigns of the Gallic War (L-E). Equitātum, collectively “knights,” mentioned last as the

broadest term in the enumeration: apparently the “nobles” were a subdivision of the “knights,”

preeminent on account of aristocratic birth as well as the possession of large resources (Kelsey).

senātum: a Roman name applied to a foreign institution. So also in Book 2, Chapter 28, Caesar

speaks of senātōrēs of the Nervii; they were probably the leading men of the tribe who were

members of the national council (M-T).

frāctōs: sc. eōs as the antecedent if quī and the subject of coāctōs esse (Harkness): “crushed”

(Kelsey).



quī…coāctōs esse: “although they had once [been the most powerful]” (Walpole),…were

compelled” (A-G). The antecedent is eōs (“they”) understood as the subject of coāctōs esse

(Hodges).

populī Rōmānō hospitiō: “by the [relation of] hospitality of the Roman people” (Harkness), less

close than the relation implied in amīcitia (Kelsey). Hospitium was a relation between two

independent states in consequence of which mutual favors of honor and hospitality were granted

(Hodges). When a nation was entitled to this, their ambassadors were allowed a place of honor at

public spectacles, and were splendidly entertained at public expense (Anthon). It was this

hospitium on the part of the Roman people that gave to the Aedui their power in Gaul (H-T).

amīcitiā: a compact by which each state engaged to adopt a friendly policy where the interests of

the other were concerned, without any definite treat of alliance (societās) (M-T).

plūrimum ante…potuissent: “had previously possessed the greatest power / influence”

(Kelsey). Even as far back as 121 B.C. the Aedui were allies of the Roman people (Walker).

nōbilissimōs: a substantive, “the noblest men” (Harkness).

sēsē: referring to the Aedui (Harkness).

neque obsidēs repetītūrōs: sc. esse: “they they would neither try to get back hostages” (Kelsey).

This is the substance of the oath they were compelled to take (Hodges):

auxilium…implōrātūrōs: sc. esse: “solicit” (Kelsey). This is a thing the Aedui would be likely

to do on account of the hospitium it enjoyed with Rome (L-E).

neque recūsātūrōs quōminus…essent: sc. esse: “nor refuse to be…,” literally, “by which the

less they should be” (Harkness). Quōminus = et eō minus; verbs of refusing (recūsātūrōs) and



hindering often take the subjunctive with quōminus, especially when the verb is not negatived

(AG 558 b). Recūsō (re-causa) literally means “to give reason against” doing a thing (M-T). The

use of quōminus springs from the euphemistic courtesy of the Latin language. It is more polite to

say, “I will hinder you so that you shall the less do what you wish,” than to say quīn (= ut nōn)

faciās, “so that you shall not do it.”

perpetuō: “forever” (Kelsey).

sub illōrum diciōne atque imperiō: illōrum = Sēquanōrum (Kelsey): “to be under the sway and

sovereignty of them,” i.e., to do the bidding of the Sequani (A-G).

ūnum sē: “that he alone” (Anthon); “that he was the only person” (Harkness). Divitiacus alludes

here to himself (Anthon).

quī…potuerit: the same in direct discourse; the perfect subjunctive has been retained, contrary

to the rule for tense sequence (A-G); relative clause of characteristic (AG 535) (Hodges).

ut iūrāret: “to take the oath” (Harkness).

obsidēs: “as hostages” (Harkness); accusative (Kelsey) in apposition to nōbilissimōs.

ob eam rem: compare the order of this phrase to that of quam ob rem (Harkness). In this phrase

the position of the preposition is never changed (H-T).

profūgisse: “had fled” (Kelsey).

Rōmam ad senātum vēnisse: Diviciacus had come to Rome where he made the acquaintance of

Cicero who was much interested in him and in what he had to say about nature; for Diviciacus

was a Druid, and the Druids professed knowledge of the Universe (Kelsey). He was thoroughly

impressed with the power and superiority of the Romans, and was a faithful friend and ally of



Caesar (Anthon). Notice that with a verb of motion (vēnisse) both nouns are in the accusative

expressing place to which (AG 426, 427) (H-T).

obsidibus: ablative of means / instrument (AG 409), used here instead of the ablative of agent

with ab, because it was not the hostages, but the “act of giving over hostages” that would bind

him (M-T).

auxilium postulātum: “to ask for help” (A-G); “to demand aid,” a strong word, justified by the

urgency of the cause and the friendly relations between the Aeduan state and Rome (Kelsey). His

application, however, was not successful (A-G): the senate, led by the consul Cicero, was

engaged in combating Catiline at the time, and could not be induced to pay attention to the

representatives of the Aeduan chief (L-E). Postulātum is an accusative supine expressing

purpose with a verb of motion (vēnisse) (AG 509).

sed pēius…comparandam: the speech continues in indirect discourse, converted thus to direct

discourse: Sed pēius victōribus Sēquanīs accidit,…quod Ariovistus…cōnsēdit tertiamque partem

agrī…quī est optimus…occupāvit, et nunc…dēcēdere iubet, proptereā quod…mīlia hominum

XXIIII…vēnērunt, quibus locus ac sēdēs parentur (possibly parārentur)… Paucīs annīs…

omnēs…pellentur atque omnēs Germānī Rhenum trānsībunt; …neque enim cōnferendus est

Gallicus cum Germānōrum agrō, neque haec cōnsuētūdō victūs cum illā comparanda.

pēius…accidisse: “that it had turned out worse” (L-E); “that a worse fate had befallen.” Pēius is

used substantively (Harkness) as the subject of accidisse (Hodges). Observe that a misfortune is

usually expressed with accidere, as it “fell” on one, while a good thing is expressed with ēvenīre

(A-G).



victōribus Sēquanīs quam Haeduīs victīs: note the order of victōribus and victīs. In such an

order the ideas cross; hence the name “chiasmus,” based on the Greek letter Χ (chi) (H-T). Dative

of disadvantage with accidisse (AG 376): “the victorious Sequani than the defeated Aedui.”

eōrum: refers to the Sequani (Harkness).

Ariovistus: supposed to be the German word Heerfürst, “prince of the host” (A-G).

Germānōrum: apparently the Suebi (Swabians), the largest and strongest tribe in Gemany (L-E)

(see Chapter 37). Ariovistus probably crossed the Rhine as early as 72 or 71 B.C. (Kelsey).

cōnsēdisset: Ariovistus had crossed the upper Rhine from modern Baden, his former home (L-E).

tertiam partem: this was probably an exaggeration. The part taken by Ariovistus corresponds

pretty well with the upper Alsace, on the Rhine (Walpole), also a part of the German conquest of

1870. This was the same proportion of conquered land taken by the German invaders

(Burgundians) in this very territory in the fifth century C.E. Such “annexation” seems to have

been the ancient common law of conquest (A-G).

agrī Sēquanī: the territory of the Sequani lay between the Saône, the Rhone, the Jura, and the

Rhine, and was very fertile (Harkness).

quī esset: “which was, according to him.” The subjunctive is here employed to express the

sentiments of the speaker, not those of the writer himself. The same remark will hold good with

respect to the other subjunctives in the course of the speech (Anthon).

optimus tōtīus Galliae: this district (Franche Comté) is one of the most beautiful in France (A-G).

occupāvisset, iubēret: be caeful to observe the tenses here (Hodges): the pluperfect indicates an

action that had happened previously, while the imperfect indicates an action that was happening



in present time: “he had seized…and he ordered to withdraw.”

et nunc…Sēquanōs dēcēdere iubēret: the same thing was afterwards done by the Burgundians

(A-G).

dē alterā parte tertiā: “from a second third-part” (Kelsey).

paucīs mēnsibus ante: “a few months before” (H-T); mēnsibus is ablative of degree / measure

of difference (AG 414), as ante has the force of a comparative (Hodges).

Harūdum mīlia hominum XXIIIĪ: “twenty-four thousand of the Harudes”; Harudum is a

partitive genitive (AG 346), depending upon the whole phrase mīlia hominum xxiiii (M-T).

These people came from the country above Lake Constance between the Rhine and the Danube

(Walker).

quibus locus ac sēdēs parārentur: “for whom a settlement and habitations were to be procured”

(Anthon); “for whom a place for habitation was to be provided” (A-G), literally, “that a place of

settlement might be provided for them” (H-T). Subjunctive in a relative purpose clause (AG

531.2) (A-G). Locus ac sēdēs is an instance of hendiadys (AG 640).

paucīs annīs: “in a few years”; ablative of time within which (AG 423).

futūrum esse utī…pellerentur atque…trānsīrent: “it would result that all would be

expelled… and…would cross over” (H-T); “the result would be that…” (A-G); “it would come

about that…” (Kelsey). Utī introduces a substantive result clause with subjunctive (AG 568).

The direct form was omnēs pellentur; as the future indicative must be rendered by the future

infinitive, one might expect pulsum īrī, but this form of the future passive infinitive is very rare



and the periphrasis found in the text is the usual method of expressing the future passive

infinitive (Walpole). Futūrum esse is a future active periphrastic (AG 194 a).

utī omnēs: emphatic (H-T): “that they all,” not the Sequani only, but all the tribes of central

Gaul (L-E).

omnēs…trānsīrent: as the Cimbri and Teutones had done fifty years before (L-E).

neque enim…comparandam: neque enim introduces an explanation admitting no doubt: “for

you see,” “for you know,” “for of course” (A-G): “for neither was the Gallic territory to be

compared with that of the Germans, nor the mode of living here to be placed on an equality with

that of theirs.” The Gallic territory was far superior in point of fertility to the German, and the

Gallic mode of life was more refined and civilized than that pursued by their German neighbors

(Anthon).

cōnferendum esse: “was not to be compared [in respect to fertility] with the German land” (H-

T). Caesar means that the land in Gaul is incomparably better than that in Germany; we usually

state such comparisons in the opposite way (Kelsey).

Gallicum: sc. agrum (A-G), the subject of conferendum esse (Hodges).

Gallicum cum Germānōrum agro: = Gallicum cum Germānō agrō: “the Gallic territory with

the German.” Such expressions as this are good illustrations of the fact that adjectives and the

genitives of nouns are kindred forms, which are often interchanges (Harkness).

hanc consuētūdinem vīctūs: hanc = nostram Gallicam, said with some feeling of superiority or

contempt (A-G): “this standard of living” (Kelsey); “this customary mode of life” (M-T); “this

mode of living [of ours],” referring to the mode of life in Gaul (Harkness), as opposed to illa,



“that of the Germans” (M-T). The Gauls looked upon the Germans as savages (A-G). Hic always

relates to that which is near or belongs to the person speaking, whereas ille refers to some remote

person or object (Anthon). The noun vīctus, vīctūs comes from the supine of vīvō, vīvere, vīxī,

vīctum (“to live”), not from vincō, vincere, vīcī, victum (“to conquer”).

Ariovistum…sustinērī: the speech continues in indirect discourse, converted thus to direct

discourse: Ariovistus ut semel…cōpiās…vīcit, quod proelium factum est ad Magetobrigam,

superbē…imperat, obsidēs…poscit, et…exempla cruciātūsque ēdit, sī qua rēs nōn ad nūtum…

eius…facta est. Homō est barbarus, īrācundus, temerārius; nōn possunt eius imperia diūtius

sustinērī.

From here to the end of the speech Caesar changes to the primary tenses, i.e., the original tenses

used by the speaker; perhaps because Divitiacus in these sections refers to the future, while up to

now his reference has been to the past (M-T). The change of tense sequence marks the speaker’s

approach to the topic of burning interest (Walker).

ut semel…vīcerit: “when once he had conquered” (Harkness), i.e., “as soon as…” (Anthon).

The perfect indicative of the direct discourse has become the perfect subjunctive of the indirect

discourse (Harkness).

Gallōrum copiās: i.e., the Aeduans and their allies (Kelsey).

vīcerit, imperāre (etc.): representing perfects and presents in direct discourse, used for

vividness; the pluperfect and perfect or imperfect in the direct discourse might have been

expected, and in translation past tenses should be used (Kelsey).

quod proelium: “a battle which” (Kelsey); the second use of proelium is redundant. This final

and decisive battle was fought two years before Caesar came to Gaul. It is probable that the



Sequani had joined forces with the Aedui in an effort to expel Ariovistus (Walpole).

Magetobrigam: “in the vicinity of Magetrobria” (Anthon) somewhere a little northwest of

Vesontio (Besançon) (A-G), probably near the upper Saône (L-E), where exactly we do not

know. The Gallic name is said to mean “the stronghold of Admagetos” (Kelsey) or, “great

mountain” (L-E). The battle is thought to have taken place in 61 or 60 B.C. (Hodges), three years

before this (L-E).

superbē et crūdēliter: “with arrogance and cruelty” (Kelsey).

nōbilissimī cuiusque: “of all of the highest rank” (H-T); “of every man of rank” (Kelsey). The

forms of quisque, “each,” with superlatives and ordinals have the force of “all” or “every” (L-E).

et in eōs exempla cruciātūsque ēdere: “and inflicted upon them all kinds of severity and torture”

(Harkness); “and exercised upon them all manner of cruelties” (Anthon). Exempla cruciātūsque

(“all forms [of punishment] and tortures”) is a so-called hendiadys (AG 640), put for exempla

cruciātuum (Anthon). Exempla (= genera (Stock)) ēdere is to use every known form of

(something) on the victims (A-G), which, by its severity, will be a warning or example to others

(Harkness); cruciātūs ēdere means to employ tortures. The phrase combines the two ideas (A-G).

sī qua…nōn: = sī aliqua. The word nōn does not belong in sense to the sī-clause, in which case

Caesar would have written nisi, but rather goes closely with ad nūtum, “if anything be done not

at his beck or will” (M-T).

ad nūtum aut ad voluntātem: “according to his bidding or desire.” Nūtus, a “nod,” “beck,” is

the outward expression of the desire, while voluntās is the desire itself (Harkness).



barbarum, īrācundum, temerārium: “rude, passionate, and reckless” (A-G); “that he was a

savage, quick-tempered, rash man” (H-T); īrācundus denotes one of a hot, quick, passionate

temper, īrātus one who is merely angry at some particular time (Anthon).

nōn posse: sc. sē (Harkness).

imperia: plural because containing the idea of “acts of despotism” (H-T).

nisi quid…posse dēfendere: the speech concludes in indirect discourse, converted thus to direct

discourse: Nisi quid in Caesare…erit auxiliī, omnibus…idem est faciedum quod Helvētiī

fēcērunt, ut domō ēmigrent, aliud domicilium…petant fortūnamque, quaecumque accidat,

experiantur. Haec sī ēnūntiāta Ariovistō sint, nōn dubitō quīn dē omnibus…quī apud eum sint (or

sunt)...supplicium sūmat. Caesar…dēterrēre potest nē māior multitūdō…trādūcātur,

Galliamque…potest dēfendere (A-G).

sustinērī: the subject sē is constantly omitted by Caesar (Walker).

nisi quid…sit auxiliī: “unless they find some help” (A-G); “unless, indeed, they could obtain

some help,” a modest or remote supposition (Moberly). Auxiliī is partitive genitive (AG 346)

with quid (Harkness).

Gallīs: dative of agent (AG 374) with esse faciendum (Hodges): “all the Celts would have to do

the same thing” (Kelsey).

idem: explained by the appositive clause ut…experiantur (Kelsey).

ut domō ēmigrent: “to forsake their home” (A-G); “[namely,] to emigrate from home”

(Anthon). A substantive result clause (AG 568) in apposition to idem.



fortūnamque, quaecumque accidat, experiantur: “and experience whatever fortune might

befall them” (Harkness), i.e., submit to whatever fortune may fall to their lot (Anthon).

Quaecumque, an indefinite relative (Kelsey), refers to fortūnam (Harkness).

haec: alluding to the disclosures he was now making (Anthon) and his appeal to Caesar

(Kelsey). Notice the emphasis at the beginning of the sentence, as if he had said, “Why! If this

very discussion should be reported…” (A-G).

nōn dubitāre: sc. sē, i.e., Diviciācum (A-G): “that he (the speaker) did not doubt” (Hodges).

quīn dē omnibus obsidibus quī apud eum sint gravissimum supplicium sūmat: “that he

(Ariovistus (Hodges)) would inflict the most severe punishment upon all the hostages who are in

his possession”; the conjunction quīn introduces a substantive clause dependent on a verb of

doubting (nōn dubitāre) (AG 558 a). Supplicium sūmere dē is “to inflict punishment upon”

someone; supplicium solvere / persolvere is “to suffer punishment” (A-G).

Caesarem: construe with posse (Harkness).

auctōritāte suā atque exercitūs: construe auctoritāte also with exercitūs (Harkness): “by his

authority and that of his army” (Anthon); i.e., his personal reputation and the fear that it inspires

(A-G), and the weight which the presence of his army would give to his interference in behalf of

the Gauls (Anthon).

dēterrēre: sc. eum, referring to Ariovistus (Anthon).

nē māior multitūdō… trādūcātur: with dēterrēre: “prevent a larger host of Germans from

being brought across the Rhine” (Kelsey); “so as to prevent any greater number of Germans from



being brought…,” literally, “in order that any greater number of Germans may not be led…”

(Anthon). Subjunctive in a clause of fearing (AG 564).

Rhēnum: accusative after trans- in trādūcātur (A-G).

ab Ariovistī iniūriā: “from the outrages of Ariovistus” (Anthon). Ariovistī is subjective genitive

(AG 343) (Harkness).

BOOK 1, Chapter 32:

Hāc ōrātiōne ab Dīviciācō habitā omnēs quī aderant magnō flētū auxilium ā Caesare

petere coepērunt. Animadvertit Caesar ūnōs ex omnibus Sēquanōs nihil eārum rērum facere

quās cēterī facerent sed trīstēs capite dēmissō terram intuērī. Eius reī quae causa esset mīrātus ex

ipsīs quaesiit. Nihil Sēquanī respondēre, sed in eādem trīstitiā tacitī permanēre. Cum ab hīs

saepius quaereret neque ūllam omnīnō vōcem exprimere posset, īdem Dīviciācus Haeduus

respondit: hōc esse miseriōrem et graviōrem fortūnam Sēquanōrum quam reliquōrum, quod sōlī

nē in occultō quidem querī neque auxilium implōrāre audērent absentisque Ariovistī

crūdēlitātem, velut sī cōram adesset, horrērent, proptereā quod reliquīs tamen fugae facultās

darētur, Sēquanīs vērō, quī intrā fīnēs suōs Ariovistum recēpissent, quōrum oppida omnia in

potestāte eius essent, omnēs cruciātūs essent perferendī.

The desperate lot of the Sequani, showing what might happen to all (Hodges).



hāc ōrātiōne habitā: the idiom ōrātiōnem habēre means “to deliver / give a speech.”

magnō flētū: = multīs cum lacrimīs (Walker); ablative of manner (AG 412). The shedding of

tears by men was much more common among the Gauls and Romans than among us (Hodges).

Caesar often mentions the demonstrative manners of the Gauls (Kelsey).

auxilium ā Caesare petere: the Gauls failed to see that they were simply changing masters in

appealing to Caesar against Ariovistus (Kelsey).

ūnōs…Sēquanōs: Ūnōs used in the plural with Sēquanōs, which, as the name of a people, is a

word without singular, i.e., it is plural in form and singular in sense (L-E): “the Sequani alone.”

Some commentators think it altogether incredible that the Sequani, who had invited Ariovistus

into Gaul against the Aedui, and who had been accustomed to wage continual wars with them,

should now be found acting in concert with the delegates of the latter people. The cruelty and

oppression of Ariovistus, however, which the Sequani had experienced in a still stronger degree

than even the Aedui, had very naturally brought about this result, and united in one common

cause those who had previously been open enemies to each other. It will be seen, moreover, from

Chapter 35, that the Sequani were desirous of restoring to the Aedui the hostages which they had

in their possession belonging to that nation, if Ariovistus would allow this to be done (Anthon).*

nihil eārum rērum: “none of those things,” i.e., supplications and tears (Kelsey); eārum rērum

is partitive genitive (AG 346) dependent on nihil.

quās cēterī facerent: relative clause with subjunctive in indirect discourse, as containing part of

Caesar’s thought (animadvertit) (L-E).

trīstēs: “disconsolately” (Hodges).



capite dēmissō: “with bowed head”; ablative absolute (AG 419), where the old instrumental

notion can be seen (H-T), or ablative of manner, which never takes cum (AG 412) (Walker).

intuērī: “looked upon” (Hodges).

eius reī: “of this [behavior],” i.e., their silence and sadness (Harkness).

quae causa esset: indirect question after mīrātus (AG 574) (A-G).

respondēre, permanēre: historical infinitives (AG 463) in place of the imperfects respondēbant

and permanēbant (Anthon).

eādem trīstitiā: their demeanor was intended as an appeal to the pity of Caesar (Kelsey).

saepius: “again and again” (Hodges).

quaereret: a pluperfect would seem more natural (Stock).

vōcem exprimere: “to extort an answer” (Harkness); “to force out an utterance” (Hodges); “to

elicit a response”; the phrase is used in reference to one who compels another to speak (Anthon).

Haeduus: ironically, an Aeduan is now speaking for the Sequani, who were formerly bitter

enemies of the Aeduans (Hodges).

hōc esse…perferendī: Diviciacus’ response is reported in indirect discourse. Here it is

converted to direct discourse, with changes underlined: Hōc est…gravior fortūna Sēquanōrum…

quod sōlī nē in occultō quidem querī…audent; absentisque Ariovistī crūdēlitātem, vēlut sī cōram

adsit, horrent, proptereā quod reliquīs tamen fugae facultās datur, Sēquanīs vērō, quī…

Ariovistum recēpērunt, quōrum oppida…in potestāte eius sunt, omnēs cruciātūs sunt perferendī.



hōc: “in this respect” (A-G); “on this account” (Anthon), explained by the following quod-clause

(Hodges). Ablative of cause (AG 404) (Stock).

quam reliquōrum: sc. fortūnam: “than that of the rest” (Harkness).

nē in occultō quidem: “not even in hiding”; notice the position of nē…quidem before and after

the emphatic word or phrase (A-G).

audērent: subjunctive in a subordinate quod-clause that is part of indirect discourse (AG 580).

absentis: “even when absent” (A-G); “though absent” (Harkness). A present participle used for a

concessive clause (Kelsey).

crūdēlitātem horrērent: the old signification of the verb horrēre had the intransitive sense of

“to bristle” or “become erect” (H-T). Used transitively with a direct object we may say

something like “to shudder [in horror] at” (Hodges); this is the only instance in Caesar where

horrēre is used transitively (L-E). In Latin horrēre applies always to disagreeable sensations, as

fear, dread, etc., although the root originally admitted the idea of both pleasure and pain (H-T).

velut sī cōram adesset: “just as if he were there in person”; the imperfect subjunctive adesset

would be used also in the direct discourse, since this is a present contrary-to-fact condition (AG

517) (Hodges).

cōram: = co-ōram, compounded of cum and ōs, ōris, literally meaning “face to face,” and so

used only with persons (L-E).

tamen: “at any rate,” as a last resort (Hodges), though they could not resist Ariovistus (Stock);

“in spite (of all they had suffered)” (M-T). Before this word a clause is understood with this



meaning: although the others may not be able to take vengeance on Ariovistus, or expel him, still

(tamen) they may take to flight (Moberly).

reliquīs fugae facultās darētur: “the rest might possibly escape from Ariovistus” (M-T); “to the

others the means of escape was offered” (Harkness), i.e., they still had it in their power to escape

his cruelty by flight (Anthon).

Sēquanīs: dative of agent (AG 374) with the passive periphrastic essent perferendī (A-G): “the

Sequani must endure” (A-G).

quōrum oppida omnia in potestāte eius essent: this is explained a little farther on (Chapter 44)

where Ariovistus states that he had settlements in Gaul granted by the people of that country

themselves. These settlements were the towns which he had first gotten possession of by

agreeing to garrison and defend them, and which he subsequently retained in order to keep the

Sequani and other Gauls under his control (Anthon). The Sequani still held Vesontio (Besançon),

which was their strongest fortified place (see Chaper 38) (Hodges).

omnēs cruciātūs: “all [possible] kinds of cruelties” (Anthon).



BOOK 1, Chapter 33:

Hīs rēbus cognitīs Caesar Gallōrum animōs verbīs cōnfirmāvit pollicitusque est sibi eam

rem cūrae futūram; magnam sē habēre spem et beneficiō suō et auctōritāte adductum Ariovistum

fīnem iniūriīs factūrum. Hāc ōrātiōne habitā, concilium dīmīsit. Et secundum ea multae rēs eum

hortābantur quārē sibi eam rem cōgitandam et suscipiendam putāret, in prīmīs quod Haeduōs,

frātrēs cōnsanguineōsque saepe numerō ā senātū appellātōs, in servitūte atque [in] diciōne

vidēbat Germānōrum tenērī eōrumque obsidēs esse apud Ariovistum ac Sēquanōs intellegēbat;

quod in tantō imperiō populī Rōmānī turpissimum sibi et reī pūblicae esse arbitrābātur. Paulātim

autem Germānōs cōnsuēscere Rhēnum trānsīre et in Galliam magnam eōrum multitūdinem

venīre populō Rōmānō perīculōsum vidēbat, neque sibi hominēs ferōs ac barbarōs temperātūrōs

exīstimābat quīn, cum omnem Galliam occupāvissent, ut ante Cimbrī Teutonīque fēcissent, in

prōvinciam exīrent atque inde in Ītaliam contenderent, [praesertim cum Sēquanōs ā prōvinciā

nostrā Rhodanus dīvideret]; quibus rēbus quam mātūrrimē occurrendum putābat. Ipse autem

Ariovistus tantōs sibi spīritūs, tantam arrogantiam sūmpserat, ut ferendus nōn vidērētur.

Caesar, for reasons of state, promises to help against Ariovistus (Kelsey).

Gallōrum animōs verbīs cōnfirmāvit: “strove to cheer by words the spirits of the Gauls”

(Anthon).



sibi eam rem cūrae futūram: sc. esse: “that this matter would receive his attention” (Kelsey);

“that he would attend to this matter,” literally, “that this matter would be to him for a concern”

(Harkness). Sibi cūrae is the double dative construction (AG 382.1): sibi is dative of reference,

cūrae is dative of purpose / service (A-G), together with a form of sum (futuram [esse]).

magnam sē habēre spem: = magnopere spērāvit: “he confidently expected” (L-E).

et beneficiō suō et auctōritāte adductum: “induced by both his [former] kindness [to him] and

by his authority”; the first et refers to services which would inspire gratitude, the second to the

prestige which would inspire fear in Ariovistus (A-G); no doubt the Gauls were greatly impressed

by Caesar’s confident bearing (L-E). Beneficiō refers to the fact that, during his consulship the year

previous, Caesar had obtained for Ariovistus, from the Roman senate, the title of “King and

friend” (Anthon). This had been done to keep Ariovistus from interfering with Roman interests in

Gaul until Caesar should be ready to take charge of his province (Walker). Compare Chapter 35,

cum in cōnsulātū suō rex atque amīcus ā senātū appellātus (H-T). Beneficiō and auctōritāte are

ablatives of cause (AG 404).

fīnem iniūriīs factūrum: “that he would put an end to his wrongdoings” (M-T); “that he would

end his outrages” (L-E). Iniūriīs is ablative of respect / specification (AG 418).

concilium: i.e., the private conference (L-E).

factūrum: sc. esse; after habēre spem (Hodges).

secundum ea: “in accordance with these considerations” (A-G); “in harmony with these things”

(H-T); “besides these arguments (of Diviciacus and the other Gauls)” (M-T); “next to these

considerations” (Walpole). Ea refers to the facts stated by Diviciacus (Harkness). The



preposition secundum (actually a participle from sequor (Walpole)) has here a meaning derived

directly from its primitive force of “following” after something which has gone before (Anthon).

“To have repulsed the Helvetii was nothing, if the Suevi invaded Gaul. Their migrations were

constant, and had already carried there 120,000 fighting men. Gaul was about to become

Germany. Caesar affected to yield to the prayers of the Aedui and Sequani, oppressed by

barbarians. The same Druid (i.e., Diviciacus) who had solicited the assistance of Rome,

undertook to explore the road, and to guide Caesar to Ariovistus” (Michelet’s History of France).

multae rēs eum hortābantur: “many considerations induced him.” Multae rēs refer to

considerations which he now proceeds to enumerate (Harkness). The reasons here assigned are

all a mere pretence. Caesar’s real object was to subjugate the whole of Gaul, and the present state

of affairs between the Gauls and Ariovistus afforded him a favorable opportunity of interfering

in the political concerns of the country, and of taking the first step towards the accomplishment

of his object (Anthon).

quārē…putāret: quārē = propter quās (A-G), ut proptereā (Spencer); subjunctive in a result

clause (AG 537): “to think,” literally, “by which thing (quā rē) / why he should think,” i.e., so

that he should… (Harkness); “to think that he must consider this business carefully and set about

it” (L-E).

sibi eam rem cōgitandam: sc. esse; sibi is the dative of agent (AG 374) with the passive

periphrastic construction cōgitandam [esse]: “that this matter ought to be taken under

consideration” (Hodges).

in prīmīs: “first of all” (Hodges).



Haeduōs: the subject of tenērī (A-G), creating indirect discourse dependent on vidēbat.

frātrēs cōnsanguineōsque: “brothers and kinsmen” (Anthon); predicate accusative after

appellātōs. Cōnsanguineōs, “kin,” implies blood-relationship, while frātrēs, like our “brethren,”

might be used as a title implying intimacy of relations without kinship. The use of the title here

may imply that the Aedui claimed descent from the Trojans, as did the Romans, and Caesar

himself (Hodges). Compare Chapter 11, necessāriī et cōnsanguineī (H-T).

saepe numerō: “repeatedly” (Hodges).

appellātōs: “who had been called” (A-G).

Germānōrum: to be construed as a subjective genitive (AG 343 note 1) with diciōne only, not

with servitūte (Harkness). The word is derived, according to some authorities, from ger, “lance,”

“spear”; hence it means “lancers,” “spearmen” (L-E).

quod: “and this,” i.e., the condition of the Aedui (Walker); “a state of affairs which”; a relative

pronoun, its antecedent being the fact just expressed by the infinitive clauses dependent on

vidēbat and intellegēbat (Hodges).

in tantō imperiō populī Rōmānī: “in view of the greatness of the power of the Roman people”

(Hodges); “in so great an empire as the Roman people had,” literally, “of the Roman people”

(Harkness); “while the empire of the Roman people was so great.” The prepositional ablative

absolute is used, as the verb sum has no present participle (Moberly).

turpissimum: “exceedingly disgraceful” (Hodges). Caesar saw this now more clearly than he

did at Rome. His point of view was different (L-E).



sibi: refers to Caesar, the subject of arbitrābātur, not to the subject of the clause in which it

stands; it is therefore an indirect reflexive (Walker).

paulātim autem Germānōs cōnsuēscere: “that the Germans, moreover, should gradually

become accustomed / get in the habit of” (Harkness). Germānōs cōnsuēscere and multitūdinem

venīre are the subject of esse, “was,” understood after vidēbat (Hodges).

perīculōsum: sc. esse, commonly omitted after verbs of perceiving, saying, judging, etc.

(Spencer): “it was full of danger” (Hodges); predicate, agreeing with Germānōs consuēscere…

multitūdinem venīre (A-G): “he saw it was dangerous to the Roman people for the Germans,

little by little, to become gradually accustomed to crossing the Rhine and for a throng of them to

come…” (Anthon). This potential situation would advance the German frontier from the Rhine

to the northern boundary of the Roman Province (L-E).

sibi…temperātūrōs…quīn…exīrent: “would refrain (literally, “would check / restrain

themselves”) from going forth” (A-G); quīn (“whereby” (H-T)) introduces a subjunctive clause

expressing result or purpose after a verb of hindering (AG 558). Temperāre with a dative indirect

object (sibi) signifies “to set bounds on something,” “to moderate,” or “restrain.” With the

accusative it means “to regulate” or “arrange something” (Anthon). Sibi refers to hominēs, the

subject of the clause in which it stands; it is therefore the direct reflexive (Walker).

Galliam: Gaul, in its limited sense of “Celtic Gaul” (Harkness).

ut ante Cimbrī Teutonīque fēcissent: “as the Cimbri and Teutoni had done before” (A-G). The

terrible hordes of the Cimbrians and Teutons (from Jutland and the coasts of the Baltic (L-E)) in

the closing years of the second century B.C. swept over Celtic Gaul and passed into the



Province, whence the Cimbrians made their way into Cisalpine Gaul. Finally the Teutons were

annihilated in a fierce battle at Aquae Sextiae (now Aix), about 20 miles north of Massilia, by

Gaius Marius in 102 B.C.; and a year later the Cimbrians met a similar fate at Vercellae in

Cisalpine Gaul, northeast of Turin (Hodges). Normally ut (“as”) takes indicative, but here

fēcissent is subjunctive because it is included in the indirect discourse (H-T).

in Ītaliam: here including Cisalpine Gaul (Hodges).

praesertim cum Sēquanōs ā prōvinciā nostrā Rhodanus dīvideret: “especially since the

Rhône alone separated the Sequani from our province” (Anthon); the Rhône, since it was

fordable (Spencer), was only a slight protection against an invading host (Hodges). Some editors

consider this clause to be an interpolation of some later hand (Anthon). Dīvideret is subjunctive

in a cum-causal clause (AG 549). Ā prōvinciā nostrā is ablative of separation (AG 400).

quibus rebus…occurrendum: sc. sibi esse: “possibilities which he thought must be met”;

“scenarios which he thought he must thwart” (Anthon); “that he must face this danger” (Walker).

Rēbus is dative with compound intransitive verb occurrendum [esse] (AG 370); the implied sibi

is the dative of agent (AG 374) with the impersonal passive periphrastic occurrendum [esse]. In

this clause two things are to be noticed: first, that the Latin regularly puts an antecedent, which is

in apposition with something preceding, in the relative clause, e.g., “which kind,” not “a kind

which”; and, second that a verb which governs the dative cannot be used in the passive with a

personal subject. In both these respects the form must be altered in translating to suit the English

idiom (A-G).

quam mātūrrimē: = quam prīmum: “as promptly as possible” (AG 291 c) (Harkness); “at once”

(A-G) “as speedily as possible” (H-T); “at the earliest possible moment” (Hodges). Mātūrrimē is



the superlative of mātūrē, however the form mātūrissimē is more common (M-T).

tantōs sibi spīritūs…sumpserat: “had taken on himself such haughty airs [of importance]”

(Anthon); “such insolent airs” (Hodges).

ut ferendus nōn vidērētur: in Latin the negative has an attraction for the main verb. We should

say instead, “that he seemed unendurable / unbearable / insufferable” connecting the negative

with the adjective idea (A-G). Result clause (AG 537).

Caesar’s statement of the reasons for espousing the cause of the Gauls is candid and convincing.

No doubt the enterprise fell in with his bold and ambitious spirit; but it appealed also to the

statesman and the lover of his country. Gaul must certainly yield to the barbarism of the German

or the civilization of the Roman. No half-way ground was possible (L-E).

Alternatively: Caesar here sums up with admirable brevity the grounds which induced him to go

to war with Ariovistus. To complete the view of the status, some other facts, however, must be

taken into accouont. The Sequani had originally attacked the Aedui (and called in Ariovistus to

their help), because of the tyranny exercised by them in laying excessive tolls on the dried meat

trade of the Saône. Shortly after this battle, in 61 B.C., the Roman senate, in order to guard

against the expected Helvetian invasion, had sent messengers to the chief Gallic cities to induce

them to oppose it; and in pursuance of this object had passed the decree for the protection of the

Aedui and other allied states, to which Caesar refers in Chapter 35, a step which, taken so late as

it was, showed but little “fraternal” affection. At the same moment, and with the same object,

they sent confidential messengers to Ariovistus, saluting him as rex et populī Rōmānī amīcus,

recognizing thus his claims on Gaul, and according to Plutarch, inviting him to Rome. In this

manner they persuaded him not to favor the Helvetian invasion; but their duplicity in allying



themselves with oppressed and oppressor at once led to its natural consequences in the war now

to be narrated (M-T).

BOOK 1, Chapter 34:

Quam ob rem placuit eī ut ad Ariovistum lēgātōs mitteret, quī ab eō postulārent utī

aliquem locum medium utrīusque colloquiō dīceret: velle sēsē dē rē pūblicā et summīs utrīusque

rēbus cum eō agere. Eī lēgātiōnī Ariovistus respondit: sī quid ipsī ā Caesare opus esset, sēsē ad

eum ventūrum fuisse; sī quid ille sē velit, illum ad sē venīre oportēre. Praetereā sē neque sine

exercitū in eās partēs Galliae venīre audēre quās Caesar possidēret, neque exercitum sine magnō

commeātū atque ēmōlīmentō in ūnum locum contrahere posse. Sibi autem mīrum vidērī quid in

suā Galliā, quam bellō vīcisset, aut Caesarī aut omnīnō populō Rōmānō negōtiī esset.

Caesar sends an embassy to Ariovistus, who returns an insolent reply (Hodges).

placuit eī: = statuit, cēnsuit (Walpole): “he resolved” (Kelsey); “he decided” (Harkness), i.e.,

Caesar (A-G).

ut…mitteret: “to send”; a substantive purpose clause (AG 563) which serves as the subject of

placuit (Kelsey).

quī ab eō postulārent: “to demand of him” (L-E); subjunctive in a relative purpose clause (AG

531) (Harkness).



utī aliquem locum medium utrīusque colloquiō dīceret: “that he should name for the

conference some place midway between both,” i.e., midway between Caesar and Ariovistus

(Harkness); “to name some intervening place for a conference on the part of each,” i.e., some

neutral spot (Moberly) where a mutual conference might be held (Anthon). Colloquiō is dative of

purpose (AG 382).

Caesar was anxious to secure his end without a war and probably thought that the diplomatic

relations which had been maintained with Ariovistus could be kept up. His army had just ended

one campaign and was not yet thoroughly to be relied upon, as was shown later on (Kelsey).

velle sēsē: “[stating] that he wished” (Kelsey); indirect discourse (AG 580) dependent on a verb

of saying to be supplied from postulārent (M-T). Sēsē refers to Caesar, the logical subject of the

main verb of the indirect discourse, since placuit eī means “he resolved” (M-T).

utrīusque: = inter utrumque, i.e., midway between Caesar and Ariovistus (A-G). Genitive is

used after the analogy of the partitive genitive with medius (cf. medium viae); the space of which

the spot chosen would be the middle point, being defined by reference to the two persons who

were at either end of it (M-T). The genitive with the adjective medius is rare in prose (Hodges).

dē rē pūblicā…agere: “to confer in regard to the common good,” i.e., interests and public

matters common to both parties (Harkness).

summīs utrīusque rēbus: “matters of the greatest importance to both of them” (H-T).

eī lēgātiōnī: = eīs lēgātīs (Hodges).



sī…oportēre: these conditional sentences are contained in an indirect discourse. Converting

them into direct discourse, with changes underlined, they are as follows: Sī quid mihi ā Caesare

opus esset, ego ad eum vēnissem (Hodges). Sī quid ille mē vult, illum ad mē venīre oportet

(Kelsey).

sī quid ipsī ā Caesare opus esset: the protasis of a contrary-to-fact condition: “that if he himself

had need of anything from Caesar” Opus est is either used impersonally, in which case it has,

like verbs of wanting, an ablative; or personally, and then the thing needed is in the nominative

(AG 411 b). This latter construction is most common with the neuters of pronouns and adjectives

(like quid in this sentence) (Anthon). Ipsī = sibi ipsī, as an antithesis to ille below (M-T); the

indirect reflexive sibi would be more usual, but ipsī is more emphatic (Walker).

sēsē ad eum ventūrum fuisse: the apodosis of the conditional sentence: “he would have come to

him.” When such a condition is turned into indirect discourse, the conclusion always takes the

infinitive form –ūrus fuisse (Walker).

sī quid ille sē velit: “if Caesar wanted him for any purpose” (Moberly); “if he [Caesar] wanted

anything of him [Ariovistus]”; a colloquial expression following the analogy of verbs of asking

which admit two accusatives (quid, sē) (Harkness). Sī velit stands for an original sī vult of direct

discourse (Walker). The syntax in this sentence makes Ariovistus imply that he did not want

anything from Caesar, but that Caesar might want something from him (Stock).

in eās partēs: Ariovistus was probably at this time between the Rhine and the Vosges

(Harkness), near modern Strasburg (L-E), a long distance from Caesar, who was probably in the

vicinity of Bibracte (Kelsey).



quās possidēret: “which he was occupying” (Kelsey); i.e., the land of the Aedui and the

Lingones, which Ariovistus assumes that Caesar has conquered (L-E).

sine magnō commeātū atque ēmōlīmentō: “without a large commissariat and much trouble

besides” (Moberly); “without great expenditure of means and great trouble.” Commeātus has

here a general reference to supplies of all kinds (Anthon), including provisions for an army (M-

T). Ēmōlīmentum is equivalent to “effort,” “exertion” (M-T), “trouble” in accumulating supplies

as well as in mobilizing his forces; for the army of Ariovistus, so long as it was scattered in small

detachments, could live off the country (Kelsey). Ēmōlīrī = moliendō efficere aliquid (“to

accomplish something through great effort”) and ēmōlīmentum = labor ipse (Anthon).

contrahere: “bring together” (Kelsey).

mīrum: “a cause for wonder” (Kelsey); “he wondered,” literally “it seemed strange to him”

(AG); predicate adjective with vidērī (Walker).

quid…esset: indirect question with subjunctive (AG 575) (Hodges), used as the subject of vidērī

(Kelsey).

quid…negōtiī: “what business” (A-G); negōtiī is partitive genitive (AG 346) with quid.

in suā Galliā: “in his [part of] Gaul” (L-E); these words depict very forcibly the arrogance of

Ariovistus. Florus gives the reply of the German leader as follows: “Quis est autem Caesar? Sī

vult, veniat. Quid ad illum quid agat Germānia nostra? Num ego mē interpōnō Rōmānīs?”

vīcisset: the subjunctive, used in reference to the sentiments of the speaker, not those of the

writer (A-G).



aut Caesarī aut…populō Rōmānō: datives of possession with esset (Hodges): “what business

either Caesar or the Roman people had” (Kelsey).

omnīnō: “in general” (L-E).



BOOK 1, Chapter 35:

Hīs respōnsīs ad Caesarem relātīs, iterum ad eum Caesar lēgātōs cum hīs mandātīs mittit:

quoniam tantō suō populīque Rōmānī beneficiō adfectus, cum in cōnsulātū suō rēx atque amīcus

ā senātū appellātus esset, hanc sibi populōque Rōmānō grātiam referret ut in colloquium venīre

invītātus gravārētur neque dē commūnī rē dīcendum sibi et cognōscendum putāret, haec esse

quae ab eō postulāret: prīmum nē quam multitūdinem hominum amplius trāns Rhēnum in

Galliam trādūceret; deinde obsidēs quōs habēret ab Haeduīs redderet Sēquanīsque permitteret ut

quōs illī habērent voluntāte eius reddere illīs licēret; nēve Haeduōs iniūriā lacesseret nēve hīs

sociīsque eōrum bellum īnferret. Sī [id] ita fēcisset, sibi populōque Rōmānō perpetuam grātiam

atque amīcitiam cum eō futūram; sī nōn impetrāret, sēsē, quoniam M. Messālā, M. Pīsōne

cōnsulibus senātus cēnsuisset utī quīcumque Galliam prōvinciam obtinēret, quod commodō reī

pūblicae facere posset, Haeduōs cēterōsque amīcōs populī Rōmānī dēfenderet, sē Haeduōrum

iniūriās nōn neglēctūrum.

Caesar sends an ultimatum, demanding that Ariovistus cease his oppression of the Gauls (Stock).

hīs respōnsīs: plural because Ariovistus’ answer consisted of several points (Walpole).

iterum ad eum Caesar lēgātōs…mittit: Caesar’s object, in sending these ambassdors a second

time, was purposely to irritate Ariovistus, and lead him on to some act of hostility (Anthon).

cum hīs mandātīs: “with these instructions” (Harkness) to the envoys, which were to be

presented orally, and summarized in the passage that follows (Kelsey). The defiant reply of the

king no doubt seemed to Caesar the height of impertinence (L-E).



quoniam…neglēctūrum: This portion of the chapter is reported in indirect discourse; converted

to direct discourse it is as follows, with changes underlined: Quoniam tantō meō populīque

Rōmānī beneficiō adfectus, cum in cōnsulātū meō rēx…appellātus sit, hanc mihi…grātiam refert,

ut in colloquium venīre…gravētur neque dē commūnī rē dīcendum sibi…putet, haec sunt quae

ab eō postulō: prīmum, nē quam multitūdinem…in Galliam trādūcat; deinde obsidēs quōs habet

ab Haeduīs reddat, Sēquanīsque permittat ut quōs illī habent (habeant) voluntāte eius reddere…

liceat; nēve Haeduōs…lacessat, nēve hīs…bellum īnferat. Sī id ita fēcerit, mihi…perpetua

grātia…cum eō erit; sī nōn impetrābō, ego,˗quoniam…senātus cēnsuit utī quīcumque Galliam

prōvinciam obtinēret…Haeduōs…dēfenderet,˗(ego) Haeduōrum iniūriās nōn neglegam. (A-G).

quoniam…putāret: a causal clause; quoniam (“since”) cannot introduce appellātus esset,

because another conjunction, cum, comes between. It must, therefore, introduce referret

(Hodges): “Since, though so greatly favored by the Romans, he made such an [ill] return (hanc

grātiam referret) as to grudge coming to a conference when invited, and did not consider that he

ought to speak or hear about their common business, [therefore] these were the demands he made

/ required of him…(etc.)” Observe that in Latin the significant word, the verb postulāret,

becomes in English a noun (“demands”) (A-G).

tantō suō populīque Rōmānī beneficiō adfectus: participle with a concessive force: “though

treated…” (Walpole); “having been treated with such great kindness on his part and that of the

Roman people” (Harkness). Ariovistus knew as well as anyone how much gratitude he owed to

Rome for these beneficia (Moberly). Beneficiō, an ablative of manner (AG 412) (Walpole), is

explained by cum…esset; and grātiam referret is explained by ut…putāret (A-G). Populī

Rōmānī is subjective genitive (AG 343 note 1).



in cōnsulātū suō: i.e., during Caesar’s consulship of the previous year, 59 B.C. (Kelsey), after

Ariovistus’ victory at Admagetos (M-T).

rēx atque amīcus ā senātū appellātus esset: The title of “king” bestowed by the senate was

equivalent to the formal recognition of a foreign potentate (Spencer). The truth seems to be that

in the strifes between the Aedui and Ariovistus the Roman senate thought it the best policy to

stand in well with both sides. The senate therefore continued to profess friendship for the Aedui,

but after they sustained a crushing defeat at Admagetos’s stronghold (see Chapter 31) it courted

Ariovistus. To what extent Caesar was personally responsible for the conferring of the titles on

Ariovistus, we do not know (Kelsey).

hanc…grātiam referret: “since he was making such a requital” (L-E); “since he made this

return,” explained by the substantive clause ut… gravārētur…putāret (Hodges). The plural of

grātia is used in the sense of “thanks” with agō, the singular usually appears with other verbs

(M-T).

ut in colloquium venīre…gravārētur: “that he raised objections to coming to a discussion”

(Kelsey), explaining hanc grātiam (M-T). Venīre is dependent on gravārētur (M-T).

invītātus: “when he had been invited” (Kelsey).

neque…dīcendum sibi et cognōscendum putāret: sc. esse (Harkness): “and did not consider

himself under obligation to discuss and take under advisement” (Kelsey); “and did not think it

necessary to discuss and learn” (Hodges). The gerundives express necessity (AG 500).

Cognōscere literally is “to find out” (what Caesar had to say) (M-T).

dē commūnī rē: “a matter of mutual interest” (Kelsey).



sibi…sibi: the first sibi refers to Caesar, and the second to Ariovistus (A-G).

haec esse quae ab eō pōstulāret: note the change of subject of pōstulāret to Caesar (Walpole):

“the following were the demands he [Caesar] made of him [Ariovistus]” (L-E); “that these were

[the things] which he demanded”; i.e., those which he now proceeds to specify. Esse depends

upon a verb of saying implied in lēgātōs mittit (Harkness). This is the principal clause of the

sentence (Hodges).

nē… trāns Rhēnum…trādūceret: this and the following clauses are in apposition with haec.

They have the form, therefore, which clauses depending on postulō regularly take (ut / nē +

subjunctive), substantive purpose clause (AG 531) (Harkness). We may supply ut to introduce

redderet and permitteret (Hodges). Observe the repetition of the preposition trāns (Hodges).

nē quam: “not any” (A-G); quam is shortened from aliquam.

hominum: partitive genitive (AG 346) with multitūdinem.

amplius: “in addition” (Kelsey), i.e., for the future (Walpole).

deinde: “in the next place” (Anthon).

Sēquanīsque permitteret: “and grant permission to the Sequani” (L-E); “and allow the

Sequani” (Moberly).

ut quōs illī habērent voluntāte eius reddere illīs licēret: “that they might return (literally, “it

might be allowed to them to return”) with his consent those which they had”; “to have his

[Ariovistus’s] approval in returning [to the Aedui the hostages] which” (Kelsey). Notice the

pleonasm of permitteret, voluntāte, and licēret which all contain the same idea (Moberly).

voluntāte eius: “with his full consent”; eius refers to Ariovistus (Anthon).



quōs illī, illīs: The antecedent of quōs is the omitted object of reddere (H-T), i.e., obsidēs. Illī

and illīs refer to the Sequani (A-G).

nēve…nēve: regularly used for et nē. It introduces Caesar’s third demand, which, like the

second, is in two parts: “and not….nor” (Hodges).

hīs sociīsque: dative indirect object with the compound verb inferret (AG 370): “to wage war

upon them and their allies.”

sī [id] ita fēcisset: sc. Ariovistus as subject (Walpole). Ita is not strictly necessary to the thought,

but is often thus combined with id in Caesar (Harkness). Fēcisset stands for a future perfect indi-

cative (Stock) in a future more vivid condition included as part of an indirect discourse (AG 583)

sibi populōque Rōmānō…futūram: sc. esse: “that he [Caesar] and the Roman people would

have” (L-E). Sibi refers to Caesar (Hodges); dative of the possessor (AG 373).

perpetuam grātiam: “lasting favor / gratitude” (Kelsey).

sī nōn impetrāret: “if he should not obtain his request” (Hodges); “if he fail in obtaining his

demands” (M-T), i.e., this pledge or assurance (A-G).

sēsē: the subject of neglectūrum [esse] (Hodges), i.e., Caesar.

M. Messālā, M. Pīsōne cōnsulibus: this was in 61 B.C. (A.U.C. 693). Caesar was in that year

appointed to the province of Further Spain as propraetor (Spencer). Ablative of time when (AG

423.1).

senātus cēnsuisset: “the senate had decreed” (Anthon). Cēnseō was the word used by senators

in declaring their vote or opinion (sententia) in a debate; so here it is used of the resolution of the



whole body (M-T). This decree of the senate was the only result of the entreaties of Diviciacus

(Chapter 31), and no governor had paid any attention to it, as Ariovistus very well knew (Stock).

quīcumque…obtinēret: “whoever should hold (as governor)” (A-G), i.e., might govern for the

time being (Anthon). This important government was always held by one of the outgoing consuls

(Walpole). Subjunctive in indirect discourse (AG 583), being a part of the senātūs cōnsultum,

which is itself dependent on indirect discourse, as part of Caesar’s answer to Ariovistus (M-T).

quod…dēfenderet: quod = quantum (Anthon) or quoad (Spencer): “should, as far as he could

do so consistently with the interests of the republic, protect…,” i.e., should take care that, while

he was protecting the Aedui and the other friendly states, none of the more important interests of

the Roman people were jeopardized by the step. This refers to the clause Aeduōs… dēfenderet as

its antecedent, and is itself the object of facere (Harkness). Ariovistus knew also the reasons of

this decree (see Chapter 33) (Moberly).

quod commodō reī pūblicae…facere posset: “so far as he could do so consistently with the

public interests / benefit of the state” (H-T); “…to the advantage of the state” (A-G); literally “as

regards that which he could do…” (M-T). Quod commodō reī pūblicae…posset is a common

formula in decrees of the senate (L-E). Commodō is ablative of specification (AG 418) (A-G) or

ablative of manner (AG 412) (M-T); reī pūblicae is objective genitive (AG 347).

dēfenderet: the purpose of this decree was to induce the tribes of central Gaul to oppose the

emigration of the Helvetii. It was passed in the interest of Rome, not Gaul, and Ariovistus knew

this (L-E).



sē Haeduōrum iniūriās nōn neglēctūrum: sc. esse: “that he would not leave unnoticed the

outrages done to the Aedui,” a threat sufficiently forceful, although veiled (Kelsey). Sē is a

repetition of the previous sēsē on account of the long parenthesis (A-G). Haeduōrum is objective

genitive (AG 347) with iniūriās.

BOOK 1, Chapter 36:

Ad haec Ariovistus respondit: iūs esse bellī ut quī vīcissent iīs quōs vīcissent quem ad

modum vellent imperārent. Item populum Rōmānum victīs nōn ad alterīus praescrīptum, sed ad

suum arbitrium imperāre cōnsuēsse. Sī ipse populō Rōmānō nōn praescrīberet quem ad modum

suō iūre ūterētur, nōn oportēre sē ā populō Rōmānō in suō iūre impedīrī. Haeduōs sibi, quoniam

bellī fortūnam temptāssent et armīs congressī ac superātī essent, stīpendiāriōs esse factōs.

Magnam Caesarem iniūriam facere, quī suō adventū vectīgālia sibi dēteriōra faceret. Haeduīs sē

obsidēs redditūrum nōn esse neque hīs neque eōrum sociīs iniūriā bellum inlātūrum, sī in eō

manērent quod convēnisset stīpendiumque quotannīs penderent; sī id nōn fēcissent, longē iīs

frāternum nōmen populī Rōmānī āfutūrum. Quod sibi Caesar dēnūntiāret sē Haeduōrum iniūriās

nōn neglēctūrum, nēminem sēcum sine suā perniciē contendisse. Cum vellet, congrederētur:

intellēctūrum quid invictī Germānī, exercitātissimī in armīs, quī inter annōs XIIIĪ tēctum nōn

subīssent, virtūte possent.

Ariovistus responds defiantly to Caesar’s ultimatum (Walker).



iūs esse…impedīrī: the response of Ariovistus is reported in indirect discourse dependent on

respondit. Converted to direct discourse the Latin is as follows, with changes underlined: iūs est

bellī, ut, quī vīcerint, eīs, quōs vīcerint, quem ad modum velint, imperent; item populus Rōmānus

victīs nōn ad alterīus praescrīptum, sed ad suum arbitrium, imperāre cōnsuēvit. Sī ego populō

Rōmānō nōn praescrībō, quem ad modum suō iūre ūtātur, nōn oportet mē ā populō Rōmānō in

meō iūre impedīrī (Kelsey).

ut quī vīcissent iīs quōs vīcissent…imperārent: a substantive clause in apposition with iūs

(Walker). The antecedent of quī is the implied subject of imperārent: “it was the right of war (iūs

bellī) that those who had conquered should rule over those whom they had conquered in

whatever way they should choose” (H-T). Vīcissent, vīcissent, vellent might all have been

indicative in the original direct discourse, but would probably be attracted into the subjunctive by

the influence of the substantive clause (AG 593) (Walker); the perfect respondit depresses the

perfect vīcerint into a pluperfect (Spencer). Iīs is the dative indirect object of imperārent (AG

367).

item populum Rōmānum…consuēsse: consuēsse = consuēvisse; “(and) in like manner

(Anthon), that the Roman people, [in particular], had been accustomed.” The et is omitted before

item (Spencer).

victīs: “their vanquished” (Harkness); masculine plural substantive of the participle (Hodges),

dative with imperāre (AG 367).

ad alterīus praescrīptum: “in accordance with the dictates of anyone else” (Walker); “…of a

second person” (M-T).



ad suum arbitrium: “according to their own discretion / judgment”; suum refers to the subject

of the infinitive consuēsse (M-T).

ipse: ego in the original direct discourse. The reflexive (AG 299) cannot be used to replace a

pronoun of the first person when a nominative is required, because it has no nominative. Usually

no pronoun is used; but if there is emphasis, as here, ipse is used (Walker).

nōn praescrīberet: “should not dictate” (Kelsey).

quem ad modum suō iūre ūterētur: “how / in what way they (i.e., the Roman people) should

exercise their own rights” (Walker). Suō iūre refers to the subject of ūterētur (i.e., the Roman

people) (Walpole); in the next line, however, in suō iūre refers to the subject of the main verb

respondit (i.e., Ariovistus) (M-T). The clause is an indirect question (AG 574).

nōn oportēre sē…impedīrī: “he [Ariovistus] ought not to be hampered / obstructed in his right”

(H-T). Sē impedīrī is the subject of oportēre (Hodges).

Haeduōs…āfutūrum: Ariovistus’s response continues in indirect discourse; converted to direct

discourse the Latin is as follows, with changes underlined: Aeduī mihi, quoniam bellī fortūnam

temptāvērunt et armīs congressī ac superātī sunt, stīpendiāriī factī sunt. Magnam Caesar

iniūriam facit, quī suō adventū vectīgālia mihi dēteriōra faciat. Aeduīs obsidēs nōn reddam;

neque hīs neque eōrum sociīs iniūriā bellum īnferam, sī in eō manēbunt, quod convēnit,

stīpendiumque quotannīs pendent; sī id nōn fēcerint (future perfect), longē eīs frāternum nōmen

populī Rōmānī aberit (Kelsey).

Haeduōs: the subject of esse factōs (Hodges).



armīs congressī: “had fought,” literally, “had contended in arms” (Kelsey). Armīs is ablative of

specification (AG 418).

sibi… stīpendiāriōs esse factōs: “had become tributary to him” (L-E); sibi is dative with the

adjective stīpendiāriōs (AG 383) (Walker), “subject to the payment of tribute” (Kelsey),

indicating that they paid him tribute in money, not in produce (L-E).

magnam Caesarem iniūriam facere: note the emphatic initial position of magnam (Kelsey): “it

was a great injustice that Caesar was committing” (Hodges).

temptāssent: = temptāvissent; subjunctive in a subordinate clause that is included in indirect

discourse (AG 583) (Hodges). Quoniam normally takes indicative in direct discourse.

quī…vectīgālia sibi dēteriōra faceret: with causal force, “since he was making his revenues

fall off” (Spencer); “seeing that he made his revenues less valuable / profitable (L-E). Sibi =

Ariovistō (Walpole), dative of reference (AG 376, 377). Subjunctive in a relative clause of

characteristic (AG 535). Ariovistus had imposed a certain tribute on the Aedui, the payment of

which was secured by hostages; Caesar required these hostages to be given back, an act which,

according to Ariovistus, would weaken his chance of a faithful payment of the tribute, and would

render it less valuable (dēteriōra), because less certain than before (Anthon). Caesar may have

instructed the Aedui and Sequani not to pay tribute any longer. In any case his mere presence

gave the Aedui hope and made them less careful to fulfill their obligations as to tribute (L-E).

suō adventū: i.e., Caesar’s arrival (M-T).

nōn…neque…neque: “on the one hand he would not restore hostages…, [but] on the other hand

he would not wrongfully…nor…” (Stock); neque…neque are correlated, and the clause is there-



fore not coordinated to the previous one. Asyndeton (AG 323 b) is one of the most noticeable

characteristics of Caesar’s style (Walpole).

hīs, sociīs: dative indirect objects of the compound verb illāturum [esse] (AG ): “nor would he

make war upon them or their allies” (Harkness).

iniūriā: “wrongfully” (Walpole); “without just cause” (L-E); ablative of manner (AG 412)

(Walpole).

inlātūrum…manērent: in the original direct discourse, this was a future more vivid condition

(AG 516, 589) (Walker).

sī in eō manērent quod convēnisset: “if they adhered to / abided by the terms which had been

agreed upon,” literally, “should remain [steadfast] in that which had been agreed upon”

(Walker). For quod convēnisset, sc. inter eōs (Walpole). Convenīre means “to come together,”

“to fit”; hence “to be arranged,” or “agreed upon” (M-T).

stipendium: among the Gauls a “tribute” or “war-tax” imposed upon the conquered (L-E).

sī id nōn fēcissent: fēcissent stands for a future perfect indicative in the direct discourse

(Walker), in a future more vivid condition.

longē iīs…āfutūrum: “would be too far off from aiding them” (Harkness); “the name / title of

brothers of the Roman people would be of little value to them” (Walker); “…would not help

them (H-T), i.e., would not save them from punishment. The language is a metaphor borrowed

from things that are far off, and consequently unable to lend any effectual aid (Harkness). Dēesse



is more common than abesse in this sense (M-T). Iīs (= eīs) is ablative of separation (AG 400)

with āfutūrum (esse).

frāternum nōmen: = frātrum nōmen (Harkness); a gibe at the pleasant relations between the

Aedui and the Romans (L-E).

quod…contendisse: “whereas Caesar was threatening him [Ariovistus]…” (Walpole) / “as to

Caesar’s threat that he [Caesar] would not overlook the wrongs of the Aedui, no one had ever

fought with him [Ariovistus] without coming to his utter destruction” (Walpole). The subjunctive

dēnūntiāret is due to indirect discourse (Hodges). Construe the whole quod-clause as an

adverbial accusative (AG 390 c) (A-G).

sēcum, suā: sēcum is the indirect reflexive referring to Ariovistus; suā is the direct reflexive

referring to his antagonist nēminem (A-G).

cum vellet, congrederētur: “let him encounter him when he would” (in direct form, cum volet,

congrediātur: “when he’s ready, let him bring it on!”) (H-T). As congrediātur is the direct

imperative, it follows that congrederētur is the depressed imperative in the indirect discourse

(Spencer).

intellēctūrum: sc. esse eum, i.e., Caesarem (Harkness).

invictī Germānī: “invincible Germans,” literally, “unconquered,” hence not liable to be (H-T);

see Chapter 39 (Walpole).

exercitātissimī in armīs: “well-trained [as they were] beyond all others in arms.”



inter annōs xiv: “during fourteen years” (Walker), i.e., ever since they crossed the Rhine in 72

B.C. Inter refers to something coming between two extremes. Hence, when applied to time, it

means th entire interval between the beginning and the end of a given period (A-G). This

expression, as well as per annōs for the simple accusative of duration of time (AG 423.2),

anticipates the future influence of the preposition (H-T).

tēctum nōn subīssent: = subiissent; “had not been in a settle home” (Walpole); “they had no

fixed abiding-place,” literally, “had not stepped under a roof” (Hodges). This is perhaps an

exaggeration, but a very natural one (L-E).

quid virtūte possent: “what they could accomplish by their valor” (Harkness); “what the

Germans were worth in the way of valor” (Spencer); virtūte is ablative of respect (AG ).

The two messages of Ariovistus, though they doubtless owe very much to the literary skill of his

rival, breathe a bold and frank spirit of defiance which is all his own. The candor of Caesar is

evident in his presenting with so much point the other side of the case (L-E).



BOOK 1, Chapter 37:

Haec eōdem tempore Caesarī mandāta referēbantur et lēgātī ab Haeduīs et ā Trēverīs

veniēbant: Haeduī questum quod Harūdēs, quī nūper in Galliam trānsportātī essent, fīnēs eōrum

populārentur: sēsē nē obsidibus quidem datīs pācem Ariovistī redimere potuisse; Trēverī autem,

pāgōs centum Suēbōrum ad rīpās Rhēnī cōnsēdisse, quī Rhēnum trānsīre cōnārentur; hīs praeesse

Nasuam et Cimbērium frātrēs. Quibus rēbus Caesar vehementer commōtus mātūrandum sibi

exīstimāvit, nē, sī nova manus Suēbōrum cum veteribus cōpiīs Ariovistī sēsē coniūnxisset, minus

facile resistī posset. Itaque rē frūmentāriā quam celerrimē potuit comparātā magnīs itineribus ad

Ariovistum contendit.

Caesar’s movements are hastened by news that the Suebi are gathering on the Rhine (Stock).

haec: put first for emphasis (Hodges).

eōdem tempore…et: the reply of Ariovistus and the complaints of the Gauls reached Caesar at

the same time (Walker). In Latin the two actions are made coordinate, but in English we should

be more likely to make one subordinate, “at the same time that this message was brought to

Caesar, messengers also came from the Aedui” (Moberly). The time was probably about the

beginning to middle of August (Hodges).

ab Haeduīs et ā Trēverīs: the repetition of the preposition makes prominent the two separate

embassies (H-T) from two separate tribes (M-T). The Treveri were from the region of Trèves in

the valley of the Moselle (A-G).



Haeduī: take as an adjective, with lēgātī understood (Stock).

questum: sc. veniēbant: “they were coming to complain” (L-E); accusative supine of queror

expressing purpose with a verb of motion (AG 509).

quod…trānsportātī essent…populārentur: the reason of the complaint is given, stated on the

authority of the Haedui, hence subjunctive in indirect discourse when stated by Caesar as it is

here (H-T).

Harūdēs quī nūper in Galliam trānsportātī essent: i.e., those who were brought over the

Rhine by Ariovistus (see Chapter 31) (M-T). The following passage is a good example of what is

called informal indirect discourse (AG 592). The formal indirect discourse introduced by a verb

of saying has the main clause in the infinitive and dependent clauses in the subjunctive. But often

the verb of saying and the thing said are expressed together in some one word or phrase, as here

with questum. In such cases the dependent clauses have the subjunctive just as in formal indirect

discourse (A-G).

eōrum, sēsē: both pronouns refer to the Aedui (Harkness). Eōrum is an irregular use referring to

the main subject of indirect discourse (M-T); the indirect reflexive suōs would have been more

correct, since the Aedui said “our” (Walker).

nē obsidibus quidem datīs: “not even by giving hostages” (H-T); ablative absolute.

pācem Ariovistī redimere potuisse: redimere means “to gain,” literally, “to take back” (in

exchange for the hostages) (Walpole): “able to purchase peace / good will (H-T) on the part of

Ariovistus” (Hodges). Peace is looked on as belonging to Ariovistus, being in his control (M-T).



Trēverī autem pāgōs centum…: sc. veniēbant questum (A-G): “and further the Treveri [kept

coming to complain] that [the people of] a hundred cantons…” (L-E); “…that the new levies

from the hundred cantons of the Suevi.” Here pāgōs, the name of the districts, is put for their

inhabitants (M-T). The Suevi, according to Caesar (see Book 4, Chapter 1), formed a hundred

cantons, from each of which a thousand warriors were annually levied, therefore, to 100,000

men. We must not, however, regard it as the entire military strength of the Suevi (Anthon). These

words, if taken literally, would include the whole body of the Suevi; but they seem to be used

here not of the people at large, but only of the army (Harkness).

Suēbōrum: this is a general name, embracing a number of tribes that lived in the interior of

Germany. Their habits and customs are described in the opening chapter of Book 4 (A-G). The

name survives in the modern “Swabia” (Hodges). This seems to have been an emigration like

that of the Helvetii, not merely a movement in support of Ariovistus (L-E).

ad rīpās: the plural of rīpa is used here not of both banks, but of various places on the east bank

in the neighboring country (M-T).

quī…cōnārentur: “who were endeavoring, as they said.” The subjunctive (replacing the

imperfect indicative of direct discourse (M-T)) here serves to mark the statement as that of the

speaker, not of the writer himself (Anthon).

Rhēnum trānsīre: somewhere north of where Ariovistus was, probably near modern Mayence.

The Treveri were a strong people, and it is probable that Ariovistus was marching north to help

the Suebi cross when he was interrupted by the news of Caesar’s approach (Walker).

quibus rebus: = propter quās; ablative of cause (AG 404) (Hodges).



vehementer commōtus: “greatly alarmed” (Anthon).

mātūrandum sibi: sc. esse; used impersonally (A-G): “that he must make all haste.”

sī…coniūnxisset: implied indirect discourse for the future perfect indicative of a future more

vivid condition. Caesar intended to strike Ariovistus before he could effect a junction with the

Suebi (Walker).

nova manus: “this new body / band [of troops]” (Anthon).

veteribus cōpiīs: i.e., the forces already in Gaul (M-T).

minus facile resistī posset: sc. Ariovistō (H-T): “resistance [to Ariovistus] could be less easily

offered” (Harkness); “he might be less easily / not very easily withstood” (Anthon). Caesar’s real

meaning is that the combined forces would then become irresistible. But to a Roman the use of

such an expression would of itself be a bad omen (Moberly). Resistī is the impersonal passive of

an intransitive verb (M-T).

rē frūmentāriā quam celerrimē potuit comparātā: “his arrangements for a supply of corn

being made as quickly as he could” (Anthon); ablative absolute.

magnīs itineribus: “by forced marches” (Hodges). An ordinary day’s march for soldiers was

eight Roman miles (something less than eight English miles) (Spencer).

ad Ariovistum: “upon Ariovistus”; i.e., directly against him (Moberly).

contendit: the place from which Caesar started is uncertain. After the destruction of the

Helvetian force, he appears in the country of the Lingones sixty to eighty miles north of Bibracte.

In that vicinity he held a council of the Gallic chiefs (see Chapter 30), but whether he remained



there is not stated. He probably came towards the north in the direct of Langres (A-G). Caesar

intended to strike Ariovistus before he could effect a junction with the Suebi (L-E).

BOOK 1, Chapter 38:

Cum trīduī viam prōcessisset, nūntiātum est eī Ariovistum cum suīs omnibus cōpiīs ad

occupandum Vesontiōnem, quod est oppidum maximum Sēquanōrum, contendere [trīduīque

viam ā suīs fīnibus prōcessisse]. Id nē accideret, magnopere sibi praecavendum Caesar

exīstimābat. Namque omnium rērum quae ad bellum ūsuī erant summa erat in eō oppidō facultās,

idque nātūrā locī sīc mūniēbātur ut magnam ad dūcendum bellum daret facultātem, proptereā

quod flūmen [alduās] Dūbis ut circinō circumductum paene tōtum oppidum cingit, reliquum

spatium, quod est nōn amplius pedum MDC, quā flūmen intermittit, mōns continet magnā

altitūdine, ita ut rādīcēs eius montis ex utrāque parte rīpae flūminis contingant, hunc mūrus

circumdatus arcem efficit et cum oppidō coniungit. Hūc Caesar magnīs nocturnīs diurnīsque

itineribus contendit occupātōque oppidō ibi praesidium conlocat.

Caesar forestalls Ariovistus in occupying Vesontio (Stock).

eī: = Caesarī.

trīduī viam: “a three-day’s journey”; this would bring him to the vicinity of modern Langres (L-E).

Trīduī is genitive of quality / description (AG 345 b); ordinarily the descriptive genitive must be



modified by an adjective, but here trīduī = trium diērum. The three days’ march was east from

Tonnerre, and brought Caesar to the point where his route turns to the southeast (Walker).

nūntiātum est: this report that Ariovistus was marching toward Vesontio proved false. Probably

it grew out of the fact that Ariovistus had got his army together for the purpose of marching

north to help the Suebi (Walker).

Ariovistum: while Caesar had been marching northeast, toward the Rhine, Ariovistus had been

slowly advancing south. Caesar now turned toward the southeast from Langres and moved with

all speed toward Vesontio (L-E).

ad occupandum: gerundive agreeing with Vesontiōnem (A-G), expressing purpose (AG 500):

“to seize Vesontio.”

Vesontiōnem, quod est oppidum: the relative generally agrees with an appositive or predicate

noun (here oppidum) in its own clause rather than with an antecedent (here Vesontiōnem) of

different gender and number (L-E). Est is indicative because this clause is not part of the

quotation (Hodges). Vesontiō, the modern Besançon, on the river Dubis, now called “Doubs”

(Spencer) is still a very important military stronghold (Stock); it lies about ninety miles E.N.E. of

the former battleground; there are many Roman remains here (A-G).

ā suīs fīnibus: the country which Ariovistus had taken from the Sequani (Upper Alsace) (A-G).

When these tidings were received, Caesar was at Arc-en-Barrois, about forty miles from

Vesontio, and supposed Ariovistus to be quite as near that important city as himself. Hence the

pressing need of haste (Harkness).

prōcessisse: “had advanced”; other editors read prōfēcisse, “had accomplished” (Spencer).



id nē accideret: “lest this happen,” i.e., the capture of Vesontio (L-E); a purpose clause (AG

531) dependent on praecavendum [esse] (A-G).

magnopere sibi praecavendum: sc. esse: “that he had to take the greatest precautions.”

omnium rērum: partitive genitive with summa facultās (AG 346). The generic word rēs is

constantly used in Caesar, where in English we should use the specific words, “occurrence,”

“movement,” “exploit,” “misfortune,” “undertaking,” “intelligence,” “fact,” “heads of a

summary,” “mode of life,” “supplies,” etc., according to the context (Moberly).

ad bellum ūsuī: “of use in war” (Harkness); ūsuī is dative of purpose (AG 382).

summa…facultās: facultās = cōpia (Anthon): “a very full supply” (L-E); “a very great

abundance” (Moberly). Facultās is literally “easiness,” hence “power” or “opportunity,” when

referred to actions; when referred to means, “abundance”; and in the plural, “wealth” (M-T).

nātūrā locī sīc mūniēbātur: the imperfect here expresses a continuous state in past time (“was

strong”), not a continuous action (“was being fortified”) (M-T): “was so naturally strong by the

character of the ground [it occupied]” (Moberly); “…by its natural position,” literally, “by the

nature of the place” (Harkness), i.e., its natural defenses (Hodges).

ut magnam daret facultātem: “that it furnished admirable opportunities (“abundant means”

(Anthon)) (L-E); “as to afford a great facility”; a result clause (AG 537). Facultātem is an

awkward repetition of the word (Walpole) after so short an interval, which led one editor to

suspect that facultās in the previous part of the sentence was a mere interpolation. It would appear

rather to be one among many arguments in favor of the opinion that these commentaries were

hastily penned on the spot (Anthon).



ad dūcendum bellum: “for prolonging the war,” i.e., against Caesar until the Suebi arrived (M-T).

Ariovistus made a great mistake in not holding Vesontio as he did other Sequanian towns (L-E);

accusative gerundive construction expressing purpose (AG 506).

ut circinō circumductum: “as if (“as it were” (A-G)) drawn around with a pair of compasses”

(Spencer), i.e., as if its circular course had been traced out precisely with compass (Anthon).

Circinō is ablative of means (AG 409). The neck of the loop of the river is occupied by

fortresses. The name Dūbis means “black river” (Moberly).

paene cingit: i.e., the river makes a loop, the two sides of which (according to Caesar), are at

one point only 600 feet apart. The neck of the land at this point is very high. The town lies within

the loop. A wall encloses both the town and the high neck of land (Walker).

reliquum spatium…mōns continet magnā altitūdine: “a hill of great height fills up (“adjoins”

(Stock), “occupies” (Anthon)) the space between.” Observe the unusually rapid succession of

different nominatives here, facultās, id, flūmen, mōns, rādīcēs, mūrus. The style here makes us

think of a general’s memorandum book (Moberly). Magnā altitūdine is ablative of quality /

description (AG 415).

nōn amplius pedum MDC: sc. spatiō (Harkness): “no more [than a space of] 1,600 feet” (M-T).

Amplius does not influence the case (Walpole). Quam is commonly omitted (without changing the

construction) after amplius, plūs, and minus, with numbers in expressions of distance, size, age,

etc. Pedum depends on spatium (M-T) as a predicate genitive after est (AG 343). The numeral M

is an insertion, to make the statement accord with facts: the real distance is about 1600 feet, but in

other respects the present site exactly corresponds to Caesar’s words (A-G). Perhaps Caesar

means here, in place of the ordinary “foot,” the pace of two and a half feet, which would reconcile



the text with the actual measurement (Anthon). The river is now connected with itself by what is

called the ‘Tunnel de la Navigation’ which flows under the citadel (Stock).

quā flūmen intermittit: “where the river leaves a gap [of dry land]” (Spencer). The river

continues its circular course until interrupted by the high hill which stood on one side of the town

(Harkness). Intermittit is here equivalent to cessat, dēficit, dēsinit, etc. (Spencer).

ita ut rādīcēs…rīpae flūminis contingant: “so closely that the banks of the river touch the base

of the mountain on both sides” (Stock). Rīpae is the subject of contingant, rādīcēs is the direct

object (M-T).

hunc: sc. montem (Spencer), the object of efficit; arcem is a predicate accusative (Walker): “this

[mountain] an encompassing wall makes into a fortress” (A-G); “a wall thrown around it makes

a citadel of this mountain, and connects it with the town.” Some of the remains of the wall are

still to be seen at the present day (Anthon).

circumdatus: “put around,” i.e., built around. In compounds dō often means “put” (Hodges).

hūc magnīs nocturnīs diurnīsque itineribus contendit: “he hastened with forced marches by

night and day” (M-T). He turned from his eastward march to the southeast. Caesar very rarely

marched at night, but if the report about Ariovistus had been true, Ariovistus would have been

much nearer Vesontio than Caesar was, and only the most extraordinary effort could have

enabled Caesar to arrive first (Walker). As it turned out, Caesar’s haste was unnecessary.

Ariovistus was considerably farther away than he had supposed. Hearing that Caesar had reached

Vesontio, he now paused in his advance, thinking it best to remain where reinforcements could



be more easily obtained from across the Rhine and where the open country was adapted to the

movements of his large force of cavalry (M-T).

oppidō: the town must be regarded as having occupied the lower ground towards the bend in the

river (A-G).

ibi: “therein” = preposition with a pronoun (Walpole).

praesidium conlocat: “he stations a garrison” (M-T).



BOOK 1, Chapter 39:

Dum paucōs diēs ad Vesontiōnem reī frūmentāriae commeātūsque causā morātur, ex

percontātiōne nostrōrum vōcibusque Gallōrum ac mercātōrum, quī ingentī magnitūdine

corporum Germānōs, incrēdibilī virtūte atque exercitātiōne in armīs esse praedicābant (saepe

numerō sēsē cum hīs congressōs nē vultum quidem atque aciem oculōrum dīcēbant ferre

potuisse), tantus subitō timor omnem exercitum occupāvit ut nōn mediocriter omnium mentēs

animōsque perturbāret. Hic prīmum ortus est ā tribūnīs mīlitum, praefectīs, reliquīsque quī ex

urbe amīcitiae causā Caesarem secūtī nōn magnum in rē mīlitārī ūsum habēbant: quōrum alius

aliā causā inlātā, quam sibi ad proficīscendum necessāriam esse dīceret, petēbat ut eius voluntāte

discēdere licēret; nōnnūllī pudōre adductī, ut timōris suspīciōnem vītārent, remanēbant. Hī neque

vultum fingere neque interdum lacrimās tenēre poterant: abditī in tabernāculīs aut suum fātum

querēbantur aut cum familiāribus suīs commūne perīculum miserābantur. Vulgō tōtīs castrīs

testāmenta obsignābantur. Hōrum vōcibus ac timōre paulātim etiam iī quī magnum in castrīs

ūsum habēbant, mīlitēs centuriōnēsque quīque equitātuī praeerant, perturbābantur. Quī sē ex hīs

minus timidōs exīstimārī volēbant, nōn sē hostem verērī, sed angustiās itineris et magnitūdinem

silvārum quae intercēderent inter ipsōs atque Ariovistum, aut rem frūmentāriam, ut satis

commodē supportārī posset, timēre dīcēbant. Nōn nūllī etiam Caesarī nūntiābant, cum castra

movērī ac signa ferrī iussisset, nōn fore dictō audientēs mīlitēs neque propter timōrem signa

lātūrōs.



Reports reach the Roman soldiers concerning the huge stature and remarkable skill of the

Germans. The army is in a state of panic (H-T).

dum…morātur: “while he was delaying”; temporal dum-clauses (“while”) take the present

indicative (AG 556) to express an action that takes place at the same time as the main verb; since

the main verb of this sentence is past (occupāvit), the verb in the dum-clause is also translated in

the past.

ad Vesontiōnem: “in the vicinity of / near Vesontio” (L-E) (AG 428 d). Only a garrison

(praesidium) was stationed at the citadel; the rest of the army were encamped “near” the town

(Kelsey).

reī frūmentāriae commeātūsque causā: “in order to secure grain and [other] supplies”

(Kelsey). Causā is accompanied by genitive (AG 359 b). Commeātus pertains to military stores,

generally corn, fodder, etc. (M-T). Observe how frequently Caesar refers to the procuring of

supplies. His care for the physical well-being of his men was constant and had much to do with

his success. He kept them in the very best condition. In the hand-to-hand conflicts of ancient

warfare this was an essential element in the success of the undersized Italians (L-E). Caesar had

no doubt arranged for supplies along his intended line of march, but he had suddenly changed the

direction of his march, and therefore failed to meet his convoys. Consequently he now had to

make new arrangements (Walker).

ex percontātiōne nostrōrum vōcibusque Gallōrum ac mercātōrum, quī…praedicābant:

“from the inquiries of our men, and the statements (“talk” (M-T), “random conversation”

(Moberly), “replies” (Walker)) of the Gauls and traders, who assured them.” Praedīcābant,

“were declaring” (Kelsey), here implies a positive assertion, made in order to impress another



with a full belief of what one says (Anthon). Ex percontātiōne, “in consequence of the

questioning” (Kelsey).

Gallōrum: these, it would seem, volunteered reports. The whole indicates a great deal of talk on

the subject, to which Caesar attributes the panic (A-G).

mercātōrum: many traders accompanied the army, to trade with friendly natives as well as to

purchase loot from the soldiers and supply them with extras not provided in the army rations

(Kelsey).

ingentī magnitūdine: ablative of quality / description (AG 415), used predicately (Hodges): “of

huge size” (Kelsey). Roman writers frequently speak of the huge size of the barbarians of the

north as compared with themselves (A-G). Caesar elsewhere (see Book 4, Chapter 1) speaks of

the huge size of the German who, by contrast in stature, seemed larger to the Romans than they

would have seemed to us (Kelsey).

incrēdibilī virtūte: the ablative is used to state details of character, and therefore where, as in

this place, many qualities are enumerated. On the other hand, the genitive of quality expresses a

leading quality or summary of character (Moberly).

exercitātiōne: “practiced skill” (Kelsey).

saepe numerō: like in hic locī, tum temporis, ubi gentium. In all these cases the Latin language

adds to the adverb the general idea of space, time, number, etc., under which it comes. So in

English we have “oftentimes,” “manifold,” etc. (Moberly).

sēsē: = Gallōs only, not the mercātōrēs, because congressōs refers to hostile encounters (L-E).



cum hīs congressōs: sc. armīs or bellō (Spencer): “having met them [in battle]” (A-G), i.e., the

Germans (Kelsey).

vultum…atque aciem oculōrum: “their look (“the sight of their faces” (Kelsey)) and the fierce

expression of their eyes” (Anthon); “…the fierce glare…” (Hodges); “…the flash of the eyes”

(L-E); “…the keen glance of their eyes” (M-T).

ferre: “to endure” (Kelsey).

tantus timor: “such a great panic” used of a groundless, cowardly fear (Kelsey).

ut…perturbāret: “so that it made all unusually anxious and dispirited” (L-E); subjunctive in a

result clause (AG 537) (Harkness), cued by tantus.

nōn mediocriter: “in no slight degree” (H-T). These words illustrate the rhetorical figure called

litotes (a mode of expressing something by denying the contrary (Spencer)) (AG 326 c, 641)

(Hodges).

mentēs animōsque: “minds and spirits” (Hodges); “reason and courage” (M-T). The Germans

were less familiar, therefore more terrible, than the Gauls (Hodges).

hic: sc. timor (A-G).

ortus est: “started with” (Kelsey).

tribūnīs mīlitum: “the military tribunes” (Kelsey). These were officers, appointed by the

general, in the Roman army who commanded a part of the legion, generally a thousand men

(Anthon). The number of military tribunes in a legion was originally four; afterwards the number

was increased to six. Their duties were to keep order in the camp, superintend military exercises,



inspect outposts and sentinels, procure provisions, etc. (Spencer). They were usually young

nobles, a kind of amateur soldiers, who accompanied a general in order to gain experience

(Walpole).

praefectīs: “the prefects.” There were various kinds of praefectī in the Roman army. Those

meant here, however, are the prefects of the auxiliary forces of the allies (Anthon); the prefects

held the same position among the auxiliaries as the tribunes did among the legionary soldiers

(Harkness). Not the “cavalry prefects,” but “subsidiary officials” in various positions of slight

responsibility, chiefly, we may assume, in connection with the light-armed troops (Kelsey).

reliquīs: young men who accompanied Caesar in order to gain some military experience under

an able general, or to see what life in the field was. They were called contubernālēs (“tent-

companions”) or comitēs (“aides” or “attachés) of the general (Hodges). These were often

appointed from mere personal or political motives, and were of small use in the service, as it

proved here (A-G). In giving them commissions, Caesar was simply paying his political debts

(L-E).

quī ex urbe amīcitiae causā Caesarem secūtī: ex urbe = Rōmā. These were the young nobility

to whom Plutarch alludes (Vīta Caesaris, Chp. 19), and who, according to him, had entered into

Caesar’s service only in hopes of living luxuriously and making their fortunes (Anthon). Caesar

is politic as well as polite in ascribing to personal attachment to himself the presence of these

milksops in his army (Kelsey). Probably Caesar was too deep in debt when he began

campaigning to be stern in refusing such appointments to his creditors’ friends where, on

military grounds, he ought to have done so (Moberly).



nōn magnum…ūsum habēbant: “they had little experience,” i.e., they were “holiday soldiers”

(L-E) who had little taste for real fighting (Walker).

rē mīlitārī: “warfare” (Kelsey).

quōrum alius aliā causā inlātā: “one of whom having assigned one excuse, another another

[excuse]” (Anthon); “and one of these alleging one reason, another, another [reason]” (L-E);

“each one offering a different excuse” (Kelsey); “each bringing forward a separate excuse”

(Walpole). Inlātā = in medium prōlātā (Walpole).

quam sibi ad proficīscendum necessāriam esse dīceret: “which, he said, was a necessary

(“indispensable” (Moberly), “urgent” (Walpole)) cause for his departure” (Harkness); “…made it

necessary for him to set out” (Hodges). The verb is singular in Latin on account of alius (A-G).

Ad proficīscendum is dependent on causam, not with necessāriam (M-T).

petēbat ut eius voluntāte discēdere licēret: “begged his (i.e., Caesar’s (Spencer)) permission to

leave” (Kelsey); ut with subjunctive in a substantive purpose clause (AG 563) dependent on

petēbat. As liceō means literally “to be left”, we see that the expression “that it might be left to

them by his good-will to leave” is not really so pleonastic as it seems to be (Moberly).

nōnnūllī: this double negative creates a positive: “some,” literally “not no.”

pudōre: “by a sense of shame” (Hodges).

remanēbant: “remained” in camp, after the exodus of the others (Kelsey).

ut timōris suspīciōnem vītārent: “in order to avoid the suspicion of fear”; a clause of purpose

(AG 531) dependent on remanēbant (Hodges).



vultum fingere: “to compose their faces,” i.e., look brave (H-T); “to command their

countenance” (Anthon), so as to conceal their fear (Hodges); “to look unconcerned” (Kelsey);

“to assume a cheerful expression” (M-T); “to put on a brave face”; vultum refers to the

expression of the face (A-G).

lacrimās: quite in keeping with the excitable temperament of the Italian (L-E).

abditī: “shutting themselves up” (Kelsey); “hiding themselves”; middle voice (AG 156 a)

(Moberly).

suum fātum querēbantur: “they were bewailing their fate” (Kelsey). Suum is emphatic,

contrasted with commūne (Hodges).

familiāribus: “intimate friends” (Kelsey).

miserābantur: “were despairingly discussing” (Kelsey).

vulgō tōtīs castrīs: “as a general matter, throughout the whole camp” (Anthon). Vulgō is an

adverb, “generally” (Kelsey), “universally” (Walpole). Tōtīs castrīs (sc. in) is ablative of place

where (AG 429.2) (M-T).

testāmenta obsignābantur: “wills were made” (Anthon), indicating their utter despair (A-G).

Soldiers most commonly made their wills by word of mouth, while girding themselves for battle,

and such a will was called testāmentum in prōcinctū factum, and had binding force. On the

present occasion, however, their wills were formally made in writing, as appears from the literal

meaning of obsignābantur (Anthon), referring to the process by which wax tablets (tabulae), on

which wills were ordinarily written, were sealed up (Kelsey), the seal being placed on the string

which was tied around the closed tabula (M-T), and then deposited with the quaestor (L-E).



quī…magnum ūsum habēbant…perturbābantur: even the experienced soldiers and officers

were affected by vague fears (L-E).

in castrīs: “in the army” is our corresponding phrase (Kelsey).

mīlitēs: i.e., the private soldiers (M-T).

centuriōnēs: “centurions” were soldiers, appointed especially for their bravery (Walker), who

commanded, when the legion was full, a hundred (centum) men, as the name itself indicates.

There were two in each maniple, and, consequently, six in each cohort, and sixty in each legion

(Anthon). According as the strength of the legion varied from about three to six thousand, the

numbers under a centurion’s command would vary in proportion from abouot fifty to a hundred

(Spencer).

quīque equitātuī praeerant: quīque = et eī quī (Kelsey): “and those who were in command of

the cavalry”; the cavalry prefects (praefectī) and decurions (dēcuriōnēs) are meant here (Kelsey).

The lack of a definite word for “officers” in Latin has often been remarked (Stock). Equitātuī is

dative with the intransitive compound verb praeerant (AG 370).

perturbābantur: “were getting frightened”; notice the use of imperfect here (Hodges).

quī sē ex hīs minus timidōs exīstimārī volēbant: ex hīs = hōrum: “those individuals of this

latter class, who wished themselves to be regarded as less timid (“cowardly” (Kelsey)) than the

rest of the army”; by hīs are meant those, quī magnum in castrīs ūsum habēbant (Anthon). The

antecedent of quī is iī, to be supplied as subject of dīcēbant (H-T). Minus is a weak form of

negative (Stock).



nōn sē verērī: “that they were not afraid of” (Kelsey); “they were not overawed by the enemy”

(Stock). Vereor implies “fear,” with the accessory notion of respect and awe (Harkness).

angustiās: the gorges in the valley of the Doubs, through which the most direct route led

northeast to the region where Ariovistus was (Kelsey), are narrow and very rough (L-E). If

Ariovistus had really been marching toward them it would have given opportunity for

ambuscades (Walker).

silvārum: there are still extensive forests on both sides of the upper Doubs (Kelsey).

intercēderent: “which intervened,” i.e., as they supposed; observe the force of the subjunctive

(Harkness), giving the reasons of the officers, not that of the author himself.

ipsōs: = sē ipsōs, in antithesis to Ariovistum (M-T).

rem frūmentāriam, ut satis commodē supportārī posset, timēre: = ut rēs frūmentāria…

posset: “was afraid that grain might not be furnished (“be brought up the country” (M-T)) with

sufficient readiness” (Harkness); “feared [for] the supply of corn, lest it might not be

conveniently brought in” (Stock), i.e., at such times and in such quantities as to keep the soldiers

in fighting trim (Walpole). Timēre governs angustiās itineris, rem frūmentāriam, etc. (Stock).

The conjunction ut, when joined in construction with a verb of fearing, such as timēre, requires

in our idiom the addition of a negative, while nē, on the other hand, when similarly construed,

has an affirmative force (AG 564). Thus timeō ut faciās means “I am afraid you will not do it,”

but timeō nē faciās means “I am afraid you will do it” (Anthon). Rem frūmentāriam is the

accusative of anticipation, a conversational rather than literary construction adopted from Greek,

where the nominative of the dependent clause becomes an accusative of reference (Moberly):

“they feared, in regard to the grain supplies, that they could not be brought in readily” (H-T).



cum…iussisset: “when he should give the order” (Kelsey); for cum iusseris (future perfect) of

direct discourse (A-G). This clause marks the time of fore and lātūrōs, not of renūntiābant

(Harkness).

fore: = futūrōs esse (Walker).

nūntiābant: some editors give nūntiārant (= nūntiāverant), the pluperfect expressing what had

occurred before, and had caused the rebuke (incūsāvit) in the next chapter (M-T).

castra movērī: “to break camp” (A-G).

sīgna ferrī: “the standards to be borne onward,” i.e., the troops to march forward (Anthon),

following the standards (M-T).

nōn fore dictō audientēs: “would not be obedient to his orders” (Anthon); “would not obey the

command” (Kelsey); “would not be attentive to the word (of command)” (H-T), i.e., mutinous

(Moberly). Dictō is dative with audientēs, here with the sense of “obedient” (Hodges).

According to Dio Cassius (38, 35), Caesar’s soldiers pronounced the war an unjust and

unauthorized one, and alleged that it had been merely undertaken by their commander to gratify

his own ambitious views. They threatened also to abandon him unless he changed his intention

of attacking the Germans (Anthon).

neque propter timōrem signa lātūrōs: “and would not advance in consequence of their fear”

(Anthon). The signiferī (“standard-bearers”) would refuse to advance, so that the order for the

army to march would be ineffectual (M-T). Sīgna ferre, i.e., “advance,” is the technical term, as

the standards were planted in the ground during a halt (A-G).



BOOK 1, Chapter 40:

Haec cum animadvertisset, convocātō cōnsiliō omniumque ōrdinum ad id cōnsilium

adhibitīs centuriōnibus, vehementer eōs incūsāvit: prīmum, quod aut quam in partem aut quō

cōnsiliō dūcerentur sibi quaerendum aut cōgitandum putārent. Ariovistum sē cōnsule

cupidissimē populī Rōmānī amīcitiam adpetīsse; cūr hunc tam temerē quisquam ab officiō

discessūrum iūdicāret? Sibi quidem persuādērī cognitīs suīs postulātīs atque aequitāte

condiciōnum perspectā eum neque suam neque populī Rōmānī grātiam repudiātūrum. Quod sī

furōre atque āmentiā impulsus bellum intulisset, quid tandem verērentur? Aut cūr dē suā virtūte

aut dē ipsīus dīligentiā dēspērārent? Factum eius hostis perīculum patrum nostrōrum memoriā

Cimbrīs et Teutonīs ā C. Mariō pulsīs [cum nōn minōrem laudem exercitūs quam ipse imperātor

meritus vidēbātur]; factum etiam nūper in Ītaliā servīlī tumultū, quōs tamen aliquid ūsus ac

disciplīna, quam ā nōbīs accēpissent, sublevārent. Ex quō iūdicārī posse quantum habēret in sē

bonī cōnstantia, proptereā quod quōs aliquamdiū inermōs sine causā timuissent hōs posteā

armātōs ac victōrēs superāssent. Dēnique hōs esse eōsdem Germānōs quibuscum saepe numerō

Helvētiī congressī nōn sōlum in suīs sed etiam in illōrum fīnibus plērumque superārint, quī

tamen parēs esse nostrō exercituī nōn potuerint. Sī quōs adversum proelium et fugā Gallōrum

commovēret, hōs, sī quaererent, reperīre posse diūturnitāte bellī dēfatīgātīs Gallīs Ariovistum,

cum multōs mēnsēs castrīs sē ac palūdibus tenuisset neque suī potestātem fēcisset, dēspērantēs

iam dē pugnā et dispersōs subitō adortum magis ratiōne et cōnsiliō quam virtūte vīcisse. Cui

ratiōnī contrā hominēs barbarōs atque imperītōs locus fuisset, hāc nē ipsum quidem spērāre

nostrōs exercitūs capī posse. Quī suum timōrem in reī frūmentāriae simulātiōnem angustiāsque

itineris cōnferrent, facere arroganter, cum aut dē officiō imperātōris dēspērāre aut praescrībere



vidērentur. Haec sibi esse cūrae; frūmentum Sēquanōs, Leucōs, Lingonēs subministrāre, iamque

esse in agrīs frūmenta mātūra; dē itinere ipsōs brevī tempore iūdicātūrōs. Quod nōn fore dictō

audientēs neque signa lātūrī dicantur, nihil sē eā rē commovērī: scīre enim, quibuscumque

exercitus dictō audiēns nōn fuerit, aut male rē gestā fortūnam dēfuisse aut aliquō facinore

compertō avāritiam esse convictam. Suam innocentiam perpetuā vītā, fēlīcitātem Helvētiōrum

bellō esse perspectam. Itaque sē quod in longiōrem diem conlātūrus fuisset repraesentātūrum et

proximā nocte dē quārtā vigiliā castra mōtūrum, ut quam prīmum intellegere posset utrum apud

eōs pudor atque officium an timor plūs valēret. Quod sī praetereā nēmō sequātur, tamen sē cum

sōlā decima legiōne itūrum, dē quā nōn dubitet, sibique eam praetōriam cohortem futūram. Huic

legiōnī Caesar et indulserat praecipuē et propter virtūtem cōnfīdēbat maximē.

Caesar encourages his officers (Walker).

convocātō cōnsiliō: “a council of war being called.” Dio Cassius states that Caesar would not

call an assembly of the soldiers, from a well-grounded apprehension that his troops might break

forth into open revolt and commit some act of violence (Anthon).

omniumque ōrdinum ad id cōnsilium adhibitīs centuriōnibus: “and the centurions of all

ranks being summoned to that council.” On this occasion all the centurions in the army (there

were sixty in each legion) were called to the council of war; whereas, on ordinary occasions, the

council was composed of the commander-in-chief, the lēgātī or lieutenants, the tribunes of the

soldiers (Anthon), and only those centurions of the first rank (prīmōrum ordinum) (Harkness).

They were brought together, not for deliberation, but for an address by the commander-in-chief



(Kelsey). Caesar now wishes, through the centurions, to reach the whole army as effectively as

possible (H-T).

vehementer eōs incūsāvit: “he berated them vigorously” (Moberly); “he severely reprimanded

them” (Kelsey), i.e., all the members of the council (M-T). Incūsāre means “blame,” “reproach”

(Hodges); “censure,” “find fault with”; accūsāre, on the other hand, means “accuse,” “make an

accusation,” as in a court of justice (Harkness). Caesar’s rebuke is put in the form of indirect

discourse (L-E), beginning with “Ariovistum…” below, which depends on the idea of saying

implied in incūsāvit (H-T).

prīmum, quod…putārent: “in the first place, [as he told them], for presuming to think that it

was for them to inquire or deliberate”; literally “because they thought that they must inquire,

etc.” (Anthon); “they thought that they had a right to inquire or consider” (A-G); “they thought it

incumbent on themselves to ask or consider” (Hodges); “that it was their business / place to

inquire or consider” (Kelsey). This gives Caesar’s reason alleged at the time of the accusation;

hence subjunctive is used, as if assigned on another’s authority (Harkness).

sibi quaerendum aut cōgitandum: sc. esse; passive periphrastic construction (AG 500.2) with

dative of agent (AG 374).

quam in partem aut quō cōnsiliō dūcerentur: “either in what direction or with what design

they were to be led”; indirect question (AG 574) (A-G).

Ariovistum… superāssent: Caesar’s speech to his troops is reported in the form of indirect

discourse. The conversion of this portion to direct discourse is as follows, with changes

underlined: Ariovistus mē cōnsule…populī Rōmānī amīcitiam adpetiit (adpetīvit); cūr hunc…

quisquam ab officiō discessūrum iūdicet? Mihi quidem persuādētur, cognitīs meīs postulātīs…



eum neque meam neque populī Rōmānī grātiam repudiātūrum. Quod sī furōre...impulsus bellum

intulerit, quid tandem vereāminī? Aut cūr dē vestrā virtūte aut dē meā dīligentiā dēspērētis?

Factum (est) eius hostis perīculum…; factum (est) etiam nūper in Italiā servīlī tumultū, quōs

tamen aliquid ūsus ac disciplīna quam ā nōbīs accēperant sublevābant. Ex quō iūdicārī potest

quantum habeat in sē bonī cōnstantia, proptereā quod, quōs…inermōs sine causā timuistis

(timueritis), hōs posteā armātōs superāvistis (A-G).

Ariovistum: subject of adpetīsse in indirect discourse (Hodges). As to this particular case, there

was no reason to expect war with Ariovistus (Moberly).

sē cōnsule: sē = Caesare; this was the preceding year (Harkness). Ablative absolute (AG 419 a)

(Spencer).

populī Rōmānī: subjective genitive (AG 343 note 1) with amīcitiam, as well as later with grātiam.

adpetīsse: = adpetīvisse or adpetiisse: “strove to secure,” a rhetorical exaggeration (Kelsey).

cūr…quisquam…iūdicāret? “why should any one suppose?” (Stock). A negative answer is

implied (Hodges); imperfect subjunctive for iūdicet in direct discourse, deliberative subjunctive in

an indirect question (AG 444, 575 b). In a particular negative aliquis (aliquī) “someone”

(“some”) is regularly used, where in a universal negative quisquam (“anyone”), or ūllus

(“any”) would be required (AG 311): “there is no reason why anyone should think” (M-T).

hunc: = Ariovistum (A-G); note its emphatic position: “that this man would deviate from the

path of duty so causelessly” (L-E).

temerē: “recklessly” (Kelsey).



ab officiō: “from his obligation” of allegiance (Kelsey); “from his loyalty” (Walpole). Officium, in

this case, is the duty imposed by gratitude of acting in a friendly spirit toward the Romans (M-T).

discessūrum: sc. esse.

sibi…persuādērī: “for his part, he was becoming convinced,” more literally, “to him at least it

was being proved” (Hodges); “in fact he was convinced” (L-E), literally, “that it was persuaded

to him” (Harkness). The subject of persuādērī is eum…repudiātūrum [esse] (A-G). The passive

of intransitive verbs which govern the dative is used only impersonally and the dative (sibi) is

then retained (L-E).

cognitīs suīs postulātīs: see Chapter 35. Translate by a clause commencing with “after” (Kelsey):

“after his demands were made known.”

aequitāte: “the fairness” (Anthon).

perspectā: “should have been clearly understood” (Kelsey).

eum: = Ariovistum (Hodges).

suam: = Caesaris (Walpole).

repudiātūrum: sc. esse: “that he would reject.” Repudiō is formed from re- and ped- (the stem

of pēs, pedis, “foot”) meaning “to spurn” or “reject” (M-T).

quod sī…bellum intulisset: “but if he had attacked them.” Caesar puts the responsibility of war

on Ariovistus (M-T). Intulisset replaces intulerit in the direct form (Hodges).

furōre…impulsus: “carried away by rage and madness” (Kelsey).



āmentiā: denotes simply a “lack of reason,” as an idiot; dēmentia, in contrast, is a “perversion of

reason,” as in a madman (Harkness).

quid tandem verērentur?: in interrogative and exclamatory sentences tandem denotes strong

feeling, usually disgust or impatience, and gets its translation from the context (H-T): “what, pray

tell, should they be afraid of?” (A-G); “what in the world should they be afraid of?” (Hodges).

Verērentur replaces verēminī of direct discourse (Walpole).

aut cūr dē suā virtūte aut dē ipsīus dīligentiā dēspērārent?: “or why should they despair either

of their own valor or of his prudent activity? (Anthon); “…his careful leadership” (Kelsey); “…

his watchful care” (Spencer).

suā:“their own” (= vestra in direct discourse), a direct reflexive referring to the army, the subject

of dēspērārent (L-E), which Caesar is addressing through its representatives (Hodges).

ipsīus: “his, of himself,” refers to Caesar (Harkness), used in this way to avoid the repetition of

suā; it is an indirect reflexive (AG 300.2) (A-G).

factum eius hostis perīculum patrum nostrōrum memoriā: sc. esse with factum: “that a trial /

test had been made of this foe within the memory of our fathers,” i.e., in the days of our fathers

(Anthon). The hostis referred to here is the Germans, not Ariovistus (M-T). The root of

perīculum (“trial”) is in experior (A-G). Eius hostis is objective genitive (AG 348) with

perīculum. Notice the emphatic position of the word factum (Hodges).

Cimbrīs et Teutonīs ā C. Mariō pulsīs: see Chapter 33; this victory of Marius was gained in

102, 101 B.C., a little more than 40 years before (Harkness), and was the worst danger that had

threatened the Romans since the destruction of the city by the Gauls three centuries before (A-G).



C. Mariō: Gaius Marius was Caesar’s uncle. “What the uncle has done, can not the nephew do?”

would be the thought suggested to his listeners (L-E).

cum…meritus vidēbātur: sc. esse with meritus: “an occasion on which the army was seen to

have earned” (Hodges), “…clearly earned” (Kelsey). The statement seems artfully thrown in as

a hint to the army to be equally deserving of praise in the current situation (Hodges). Although

this clause was a part of Caesar’s speech to his officers, the indicative is used to emphasize to the

reader the reality of the fact it asserts (A-G), and that it contains a statement of the writer, not of

the person whose speech is being reported (M-T). This is the only instance in the Gallic War of

an imperfect indicative after cum.

meritus: sc. esse (A-G).

factum etiam: sc. perīculum esse (Anthon). Anaphora (AG 598 f) (Moberly).

nūper: “more recently” (Hodges), i.e., fourteen years previous (Anthon); among the centurions

present there were probably a number who had served as soldiers in the war with Spartacus, the

term of military service being twenty years (Kelsey).

servīlī tumultū: = tumultū servōrum (Kelsey), ablative of time when (AG 423): “at the time of

the insurrection of the slaves,” literally, “during the servile war” (Anthon), i.e., the insurrection

led by Spartacus, 73-71 B.C. (A-G). For several years this mixed army of gladiators, slaves, and

outlaws (to the number of 120,000), carried devastation over some of the finest districts of Italy

(Spencer). Many of the slaves who joined Spartacus were Germans taken captive by Marius in his

victories over the Cimbri and Teutones (M-T). The Romans applied the word tumultus (a much

stronger term than bellum) to a sudden war or revolt in Italy or an invasion of the Gauls (Anthon);

in such case all citizens were bound to serve, and were summoned by the signal of flags hung out



from the Capitol by the magistrate appointed to command the hasty levies (exercitus

tumultuārius) (M-T).

quōs tamen aliquid ūsus ac disciplīna, quam ā nōbīs accēpissent, sublevārent: = quamvīs

ūsus ac disciplīna…eōs sublevārent, hence the subjunctive in accēpissent (Moberly): “and yet

these [last] the experience [from practice] and training [from a teacher], which they had received

from us, assisted in some respect” (Anthon), i.e., they had been taught the Roman drill, and the

use of Roman arms in the gladiators’ training school (M-T). The antecedent of quōs is implied in

servīlī, i.e., servōrum: “in the revolt of the slaves, whom” (Harkness). Aliquid, “somewhat”

(Harkness), “to some extent” (Walpole) is an adverbial accusative (AG 390 c).

tamen: answers to an unexpressed quamquam (M-T): “and yet” (Anthon); “not withstanding the

fact that” (Kelsey), i.e., though they were defeated (Hodges).

ex quō: “from this.” Though introduced by a relative, this is practically an independent sentence;

hence posse, not posset, in indirect discourse (Hodges).

posse: the subject is quantum…cōnstantia (L-E).

quantum habēret in sē bonī: bonī is partitive genitive (AG 346) with quantum (Harkness):

“how great an advantage (“value” (Hodges)) resolution has” (Walker), literally, “how much [of]

good steadfastness has in itself” (Kelsey). In Latin such expressions of a general, or permanent,

truth usually conform to the law of sequence of tenses (Hodges).

cōnstantia: “a firm and resolute spirit” (Anthon), i.e., a mind not to be moved by fear (Spencer).

aliquamdiū: “for a long time” (Kelsey).



inermōs: from a nominative inermus (a contraction for inarmātus (Moberly)), less common than

the 3rd declension form inermis (M-T), referring to the slaves of Spartacus’s force (A-G). At first

the insurgents were without arms to any great extent (or their arms were of the most primitive

kind (Hodges)), and hence, they are here called “unarmed” (Anthon). They subsequently

obtained arms and gained many victories (armātōs ac victōrēs). They were finally defeated by

Crassus with the help of Pompey in 71 B.C. (Harkness).

hōs: antecedent of quōs (Kelsey).

armātōs: “equipped with arms” (Kelsey).

posteā: i.e., in the Servile War (L-E).

superāssent: = superāvissent.

dēnique…posse: Caesar’s speech continues in the form of indirect discourse. Converted to direct

discourse, it is as follows, with changes underlined: dēnique hī sunt īdem Germānī quibuscum

saepe numerō Helvētiī congressī, nōn sōlum in suīs sed etiam in illōrum fīnibus, plērumque

superāvērunt; quī tamen parēs esse nostrō exercituī nōn potuērunt. Sī quōs adversum proelium…

commovet, hī, sī quaerent (quaerant), reperīre possunt…Ariovistum…dispersōs subitō adortum,

magis ratiōne…quam virtūte vīcisse. Cui ratiōnī contrā hominēs barbarōs… locus fuit, hāc nē

ipse quidem spērat nostrōs exercitūs capī posse (A-G).

dēnique: “finally,” closing the argument about the Germans (Kelsey).

hōs esse: i.e., the Germans with Ariovistus (A-G).

quibuscum…superārint: (changing the relative clause), “with whom the Helvetii had often met

and [whom they] had beaten not only on their own ground, but even…” (A-G). Quibuscum goes



with congressī, and the object of superārint (= superāverint) and potuerint (M-T).

suīs: sc. fīnibus, referring to the territories of the Helvetii (Anthon).

illōrum: = Germānōrum (Kelsey).

plērumque superārint: “generally defeated [them]” (Kelsey). The object, not expressed, is to be

supplied from quibuscum above (M-T). The changed tense sequence (superārint and potuerint)

(cf. superāssent) serves to emphasize the victories of the Helvetii over the Germans and their

defeat by the Romans as matters of fact (Stock). In the next sentence Caesar returns to the

regular tense sequence (Hodges).

quī tamen: the antecedent is Helvētiī (Walker): “and they nevertheless” (Kelsey); though the

Helvetians were strong enough to beat the Germans (A-G). Tamen refers, as often, to a

suppressed clause (Walpole). The argument is that since the Helvetii have beaten the Germans,

and the Romans have beaten the Helvetii, the Romans can beat the Germans (Walker).

nostrō exercituī: dative with the adjective parēs (AG 384).

sī quōs…commovēret: “if any were alarmed by…,” literally, “if the disastrous battle disturbed

any [of them]” (A-G).

adversum proelium et fuga Gallōrum: i.e., the “defeat” at Admagetos’s stronghold (Kelsey);

see Chapter 31 (Anthon).

diūturnitāte bellī: “by the length of the war” (Kelsey).

dēfatīgātīs Gallīs: ablative absolute (AG 419), expressing both time and cause (Hodges).

Ordinarily the accusative would be used as the object of the infinitive vīcisse; the construction is

varied here because of the distance between Gallīs and vīcisse; and the participles dēspērantēs,



dispersōs imply an accusative pronoun as the grammatical object of the verb: “the Gauls being

worn out…, Ariovistus conquered them” (M-T).

Ariovistum: subject of vīcisse (A-G).

cum…sē…tenuisset: “after he had kept himself secluded” (Kelsey).

castrīs: a preposition is not used because the ablative is one of means as well as place (Hodges).

palūdibus: “marshes,” added to explain how the encampments were shut off from approach

(Kelsey): “entrenched himself in a camp amongst the fens” (M-T).

neque suī potestātem fēcisset: “and had not given them the opportunity to fight with him” (H-

T); “had not given them an opportunity of approaching him” (M-T); “and had never offered them

battle at all” (Moberly). Facere potestātem suī means generally, “to allow one’s self to be

approached,” “to allow access to” (Anthon).

dēspērantēs, dispersōs: sc. Gallōs (H-T), which is the object of adortum (Walker): “when they

were despairing of a battle (literally, “giving up hope of battle” (Kelsey)) and scattered”

(Hodges).

adortum: sc. eōs: “having attacked them suddenly” (Hodges); agrees with Ariovistum and

governs dēspērantēs, with which a pronoun must be supplied. This may always be omitted in

Latin if any word appears to show its case (A-G).

magis ratiōne et cōnsiliō: “more by stratagem and cunning” (Spencer).

cui ratiōnī…hāc…(etc.): = hāc ratiōne cui, with ratiōnī attracted into the relative clause: “by

that cunning for which” (Harkness); “as for the mode of warfare which had been possible against

unskilled barbarians” (Moberly); “not even Ariovistus himself hoped that our armies could be



caught by this ruse, for which there had been a place in fighting against unskilled barbarians”

(Hodges).

ipsum: sc. Ariovistum (Kelsey).

capī: = in fraudem dūcī (Walpole): “be caught” (Kelsey); “be ensnared.”

quī…maximē: Caesar’s speech continues in the form of indirect discourse. Converted to direct

discourse, it is as follows, with changes underlined: Quī suum timōrem in reī frūmentāriae

simulātiōnem…cōnferunt, faciunt arroganter, cum…dē officiō imperātōris dēspērāre…videantur

(videntur). Haec mihi sunt cūrae; frūmentum Sēquanī, Leucī…subministrant, iamque sunt…

frūmenta mātūra; dē itinere (vōs) ipsī…iūdicābitis. Quod nōn fore dictō audientēs…dīciminī

(more probably dīcuntur mīlitēs), nihil (ego) eā rē commoveor; sciō enim, quibuscumque

exercitus dictō audiēns nōn fuerit,…avāritiam esse convictam; mea innocentia perpetuā vītā,

fēlīcitās…bellō est perspecta. Itaque (ego) quod…conlātūrus fuī repraesentābō, et…castra

movēbō, ut…intellegere possim utrum apud vōs pudor...an timor plūs valeat. Quod sī praetereā

nēmō sequitur, tamen (ego) cum sōlā decimā legiōne ībō, dē quā nōn dubitō, mihique ea

praetoria cohors erit (A-G).

quī…vidērentur: “that they, who ascribed their fear to a pretended alarm relative to provisions

and the narrowness of the roads, acted presumptuously, since they appeared either to distrust the

official qualifications of their commander, or to dictate to him” (Anthon). The antecedent is eōs,

to be supplied as subject of facere (H-T): “as for those who pretended that their fears were about

supplies and the difficulties of the route” (Stock).

in reī frūmentāriae simulātiōnem: “to a pretended anxiety in regard to supplies” (Harkness); “to

the pretext / pretence of the corn supply,” i.e., of the supposed difficulty of procuring it (M-T).



Reī is an objective genitive (AG 348) with simulātionem (Walker).

cōnferrent: “attribute to” or “lay on”; so often with culpam, causam, etc. (M-T).

arroganter: “presumptuously” (Kelsey); from ad-rogāre, “asking more than their due” (M-T).

facere: sc. eōs as its subject, which is also the antecedent of quī (Harkness).

dē officiō imperātōris dēspērāre: “to be discouraged about the commander’s discharge of his

duty” (A-G); “to despair of the diligence (duty) of their commander” (Harkness); “to lack

confidence in the general’s performance of duty” (L-E); “to lack faith in the ability or qualify-

cations of the commander” (Spencer).

praescrībere: sc. officium: “to dictate to him” what his duty was (A-G).

haec sibi esse cūrae: “that he was looking after these matters” (L-E), literally, “that these things

were a care to him,” i.e., that he had not neglected these things (Anthon). The double dative

construction (AG 382.1): sibi is dative of reference; cūrae is dative of purpose / service.

Leucōs: located about Toul in the department of Meurthe-et-Moselle (Stock).

subministrāre: “were [now] furnishing” (A-G); “were supplying” (Kelsey). The prefix sub-

gives the sense of “supplying deficiencies,” as in cōnsul suffectus (a consul elected to fill a

vacancy) (M-T).

esse: “were beginning to be” (A-G).

frūmenta mātūra: “crops were ripe” (A-G); Napoleon III calculates that it was now (iamque)

Aug. 22 (Stock). In the plural frūmenta means “crops”; in the singular it means “grain,” “corn.”

ipsōs: = vōs ipsī in direct address, i.e., the soldiers (L-E).



brevī tempore iūdicātūrōs: “would soon have an opportunity to judge” (Anthon).

quod nōn fore…dīcantur: sc. mīlitēs (Kelsey): “as to the fact that it was said that the soldiers

would not be obedient to command or move forward” (Hodges); i.e., as to the report which had

reached him of the soldiers intending to disobey his orders (Anthon). Notice the primary tense

(Hodges); the present tense is probably intended to signify that the rumor of mutiny was still

current, i.e., it is used of a present incompleted action (M-T).

nihil sē eā rē commovērī: “that he [Caesar] was not at all disturbed by their statement…” (L-E).

scīre enim…esse convictam: sc. sē: “for he [Caesar] knew that either, in consequence of some

mismanagement of an affair, fortune had failed those commanders with whom an army was not

obedient to orders; or else, that the charge of avarice had been fastened upon their characters, in

consequence of some act of misconduct having been discovered” (Anthon); “for he knew that

because of an unsuccessful battle good luck had failed, or from some manifested crime greed had

been proven, in the case of any whose orders the army had not obeyed” (L-E).

quibuscumque: dative after audiēns dictō (“obedient”) (AG 367): “that to whomsoever an army

had not been obedient” (Walker); i.e., no one has ever had a mutinous army who has not either

been unsuccessful by his own fault, so that his men had no confidence in his ability, or been

convicted of avarice by some overt act, so that they had no confidence in his integrity (A-G). For

an antecedent supply eīs after dēfuisse: “that in the case of any [commanders] whatever who had

found their armies mutinous, either their luck had failed them in consequence of the bad handing

of some enterprise, or…” (Kelsey).

fuerit: perfect tense of a general, and therefore always present, truth (M-T).

male rē gestā: “in consequence of some mismanagement” (Harkness).



fortūnam: the Romans were superstitious in avoiding anything that seemed unlucky (Kelsey).

facinore: “crime” (Kelsey); referring to dishonesty or meanness in regard to financial matters

(Spencer).

avāritiam esse convictam: sc. eōrum: “avarice was brought home [against them]” (Walpole);

“greed had been clearly proved [against them]”; greed was the underlying cause of the crimes

committed by generals, according to Caesar (Kelsey). Convincere aliquem, “to prove a person

guilty or wrong,” is the usual construction; but convincere aliquid alicui, “to prove a thing (fault

or crime) against a person” is also found (M-T).

suam: emphatic by position; equivalent to “in his case” (A-G).

innocentiam: “blamelessness,” “freedom from avarice,” as opposed to avāritiam (Harkness);

“integrity,” i.e., freedom from corruption (Kelsey); “fair dealing”; what the soldiers would object

to would be the general’s keeping too large a share of the booty for himself (Walker). Innocentia

was one of the virtues which constituted the Roman ideal of character. We may translate “the

cleanness of his own hands.” Other component parts of the Roman ideal were fidēs, cōnstantia,

gravitās, industria, temperantia, clementia, facilitās, and humānitās (Stock). In a technical sense

innocentia means freedom from the charge of plunder and extortion. In fact, Caesar’s fault lay

just the other way, a lavish and reckless generosity at the expense of subjects or allies (A-G).

perpetuā vītā: “throughout the whole of his [past] life” (Anthon); ablative of time within which

(AG 423). Perpetuus is derived from per- and the root of pateō, of an unbroken surface (M-T).

fēlīcitātem: “his good fortune” (Anthon); “luck” as a personal quality (Hodges). This was an

important qualification for a general (Spencer). With the Romans fēlīcitās was not so much a

result of other qualities, as a quality in itself. It was an attribute which one man might have and



another might lack, apart from any other difference between the two. Sulla claimed it and called

himself “Felix” and his son “Faustus.” Cicero enumerates it among the indispensable requisites

of a general, ascribing it to Fabius Maximus, Marcellus, Scipio, Marius and Pompeius. Here

Caesar advances for himself the same claim as Sulla. Whether the Roman view of fortune be

correct or not, at all events a belief in their star, in divine favor, or simply in themselves, has

been characteristic of great men of action, and a contributing cause of their success: possunt quia

posse videntur (Stock).

itaque sē quod in longiōrem diem conlātūrus fuisset repraesentātūrum: sc. esse: “that he

would, therefore, immediately do what he intended to have put off to a more distant day”

(Anthon); “that he would perform immediately what he had intended to defer until some future

time (L-E). Longiōrem = longinquiōrem, “more distant” (M-T). Conlātūrus is used here in the

sense of dīlātūrus (Anthon): “which he had intended to defer” (Harkness). Repraesentātūrum is a

legal term, meaning “to do a thing before the time” (A-G) or “do at once,” literally, “to bring

back to the present” from the past or future (M-T). Thus a person is said solūtiōnem

repraesentāre, who pays the money owed before the day it is due. It is from this general meaning

that the verb also obtains the meaning of doing a thing immediately (Anthon).

dē quārtā vigiliā: “during the fourth watch,” i.e., between three and six o’clock in the morning

(Harkness).

quam prīmum: “as soon as possible” (Harkness).

utrum apud eōs pudor atque officium an timor plūs valēret: “whether a sense of honor and

duty, or whether fear had more influence with them” (Hodges). Pudor is a “feeling of shame” at



doing a disgraceful thing, hence a “sense of honor” (M-T). Valēret, “were the strong or ruling

motive” (M-T). An indirect double question (Walker).

quod sī…nēmō sequātur, tamen sē…itūrum: sē itūrum [esse] = ego ībō (i.e., Caesar) in direct

discourse: “But that, if no one else should follow, yet he would go with only the tenth legion.”

Sequātur stands in for the future indicative of direct discourse (M-T).

decimā legiōne: Caesar’s favorite legion (M-T). This was the legion which had been stationed in

the province of Gallia Transalpina when Caesar first came there; it was distinguished for

discipline and courage (A-G). The legions were called “first,” “second,” etc. from the order in

which they were raised (Anthon).

dē quā nōn dubitet: “about which he had no doubts” (L-E).

praetōriam cohortem: “the cohort of the commander (praetor)” (Spencer); “the general’s body-

guard,” made up of the bravest men (A-G). Among the Romans, the general was usually attended

by a select band, called cohors praetōria, so called, according to Festus, because it never left the

commander, or, as he was called in early Latin, the praetor (= quī praeit exercituī) (Anthon). The

Latin word cohortem eventually passed over to the meaning of its English derivative “court”: 1)

“a body of troops”; 2) in imperial times, “the emperor’s body-guard”; 3) “the suite of the

emperor,” or the “official staff of a governor” (H-T).

huic legiōnī Caesar cōnfidēbat maximē: “in this legion trusted most”; confidō (AG 367) in

Caesar generally is followed by dative of a person to whom trust is given, by an ablative of a

thing trusted in (e.g., confidere nātūrā locī) (M-T).

Editorials on Caesar’s speech:



This speech deserves to be carefully studied as a specimen of oratory. Caesar was ranked by the

Romans second only to Cicero among their orators. As a general he relied much on his power of

persuasion. This speech produced an instantaneous effect, as will be seen in the next chapter

(Hodges).

The oratorical skill of this speech is worth notice. Caesar appeals first to the reason of the men

by showing the groundlessness of their fear; then to their pride in their reputation as soldiers of

Rome; to the confidence in himself which his career ought to inspire; and lastly, by threatening

to march with only one legion he touches their sense of honor, which would not let them

abandon their general to certain destruction, and at the same time secures the loyalty of his best

veterans of the tenth legion by so special a mark of trust in them (M-T).

Observe the excellence of this speech. It is quiet and appeals to reason; yet the topics are of the

unquestionable character which alone can convince a blind panic. After displaying these briefly

but fully, he returns to his favorite mode of thought and expression: there will be no mutiny,

because he has not deserved any, and he ends by a bold rhetorical declaration that he is ready to

march with the tenth legion only (Moberly).

This speech, one of the most remarkable, if not one of the most famous of antiquity, stamps

Caesar as a consummate orator as well as an able general. His whole fortunes may be said to

have depended on this campaign, at the outset of which he is confronted with a mutiny. By this

skillfully contrived address, in which he glosses over the difficulties of the undertaking, which he

must have known well, he contrives to inspire in his soldiers the Roman spirit, which was

invincible whenever it was really roused. Caesar’s marvelous conquest of Gaul depended quite

as much on the devotion of his soldiers as on his unequalled ability as a general (A-G). The

tactful and self-reliant combination of rebuke and encouragement makes the speech very



effective. Military discipline demands severe punishment for mutiny, but this speech prevented

open mutiny and served Caesar’s purpose better than punishment. There was never again any

sign of mutiny in the Gallic war (Walker).

BOOK 1, Chapter 41:

Hāc ōrātiōne habitā mīrum in modum conversae sunt omnium mentēs summaque

alacritās et cupiditās bellī gerendī innāta est, prīncepsque X. legiō per tribūnōs mīlitum eī grātiās

ēgit quod dē sē optimum iūdicium fēcisset, sēque esse ad bellum gerendum parātissimam

cōnfirmāvit. Deinde reliquae legiōnēs cum tribūnīs mīlitum et prīmōrum ōrdinum centuriōnibus

ēgērunt utī Caesarī satisfacerent: sē neque umquam dubitāsse neque timuisse neque dē summā

bellī suum iūdicium sed imperātōris esse exīstimāvisse. Eōrum satisfactiōne acceptā et itinere

exquīsītō per Dīviciācum, quod ex aliīs eī maximam fidem habēbat, ut mīlium amplius

quīnquāgintā circuitū locīs apertīs exercitum dūceret, dē quārtā vigiliā, ut dīxerat, profectus est.

Septimō diē, cum iter nōn intermitteret, ab explōrātōribus certior factus est Ariovistī cōpiās ā

nostrīs mīlia passuum IIIĪ et XX abesse.

Fear and mutiny give place to enthusiasm. Caesar advances (Kelsey).

hāc ōrātiōne habitā: “after this address” (Kelsey).

mīrum in modum: “in a wonderful way” (Kelsey).



conversae sunt: “were transformed” (Hodges). The tenth legion gave the impulse, and the others

were ashamed to remain behind (Moberly).

omnium: including not only the officers but also the soldiers, to whom the speech was promptly

reported by the centurions (Kelsey).

mentēs: rather than animī, to show that their judgments were convinced (Harkness).

summaque alacritās: “the utmost enthusiasm” (Kelsey).

innāta est: sc. omnium mentibus: “arose” (Kelsey); “sprang up in them” (M-T), agreeing with

the last noun, cupiditās (A-G).

prīnceps: = prīma (Anthon), which would be somewhat objectionable before the ordinal decima

(Harkness): “foremost” (Hodges); “taking the lead” (Kelsey); “was the first to…” (Walpole).

eī grātiās ēgit: “conveyed / expressed their thanks to him” (Kelsey).

quod dē sē optimum iūdicium fēcisset: “for the very high opinion he had formed of them” (a

technical phrase) (A-G); “[gave thanks] for his having expressed the most favorable opinion of

them” (H-T). Subjunctive in indirect discourse as being part of what they said (M-T).

sēque esse…parātissimam: “and that it (decimam legiōnem) was entirely ready” (L-E).

cōnfirmāvit: “affirmed” (M-T).

cum tribūnīs…ēgērunt: “urged upon the tribunes…to apologize” (A-G); “conferred with the

tribunes…in order to make apology” (L-E); “arranged with the tribunes to…” (Harkness);



“begged the tribunes to…” (Hodges). They had a meeting with their tribunes and centurions

(Spencer), in which they urged those officers to be spokesmen for them with Caesar (M-T).

prīmōrum ōrdinum centuriōnibus: “with the centurions of the first rank.” The six centurions

of the first cohort in each legion are probably meant (Harkness). The centurions of the first

maniple of the Triarii, the centurions of the first maniple of the Principes, and the centurions of

the first maniple of Hastati (Anthon).

utī Caesarī satisfacerent: “to excuse themselves to Caesar [saying…]” (Anthon); “to apologize

to Caesar” (Kelsey). Utī…satisfacerent is a substantive result clause (AG 568), the object of

ēgērunt (Hodges).

sē neque umquam dubitāsse neque timuisse: “[declaring] that they had never doubted and had

not feared” (Kelsey). Indirect discourse dependent on an implied verb of saying. Dubitāsse =

dubitāvisse (H-T).

neque…suum iūdicium sed imperātōris esse exīstimāvisse: “and had not thought that any

decision…pertained to them but to their commander” (Anthon). Indirect discourse after the idea

of saying implied in satisfacerent (H-T).

summā bellī: “the policy of the campaign” (A-G); “the management of the war” (Anthon); “the

conduct of the war” (H-T); “the general plan of campaign” (Kelsey). Summa is a favorite word

with Caesar (Stock).

suum iūdicium sed imperātōris: predicates after esse (A-G): “was not their determination /

business, but the commander’s” (Kelsey).



satisfactiōne: “apology,” cf. satisfacerent above (A-G); “excuse” (Anthon); “apology” (Kelsey).

itinere exquīsītō per Diviciācum: “the route having been sought out / reconnoitered with the

help of Diviciacus” (Hodges), i.e., the route by which to reach Ariovistus (L-E).

ex aliīs: sc. Gallīs: “of [all] the Gauls” (Walker). Here aliīs = cēterīs, i.e., of the other Gauls,

whom he could turn to account (Walpole). Notice the idiom: “in which he placed the most trust

of the rest” (M-T); “beyond all others” (H-T). Some MSS. show ex Gallīs (Moberly).

eī maximam fidem habēbat: “he had the fullest confidence in him” (Kelsey); eī is dative on the

analogy of dative with a verb of trusting (fidem habēbat = confidēbat) (Walpole).

ut… exercitum dūceret: a result clause (AG 537.1), explaining itinere exquisītō; dūceret refers

to itinere. The sense is, “found to be such [a route] that would lead his army” (Anthon); “found

to be a road which led…” Caesar might have said quod dūceret but for the quod in the previous

line (A-G). By taking a circuit of somewhat more than fifty miles, he might lead his army along

it through an open country (Anthon). The valley of the Doubs above Besançon is very narrow

and the mountains precipitous; but, turning first to the north by the railroad coming from Vesoul

and then up the valley of the Ognon River, the country becomes tolerably open to Villersexel and

to Belfort, which lies in the gap between the Vosges and the Jura. This pass is interesting as

having been for ages one of the great avenues from Germany into Gaul (A-G). The change of

route was a wise concession to the fears of his men (see Chapter 39, angustiās…silvārum) (L-E).

mīlium amplius quīnquāgintā circuitū: sc. passuum to mīlium, genitive of quality / description

(AG 345 b) after amplius, with quam being omitted (M-T): “by [taking] a circuit of more than

fifty miles” (A-G); “although with a detour of more than fifty miles,” in order to avoid the



dangerous defiles of the Doubs valley (Kelsey). He did this in order to guard against all risk of a

recurrence of the panic, not trusting too completely in his troops’ new-found valor (Moberly).

Ariovistus, whom Caesar wished to meet, was in the valley of the Rhine. The direct route would

lead over the northern part of the Jura chain, but Caesar preferred a circuitous route through the

open country (Harkness).

locīs apertīs: “through an open country” (H-T); ablative of route / way by which (AG 429 a).

septimō diē cum iter nōn intermitteret: “on the seventh day of unbroken marching”; i.e., he

did not allow the day of rest which was usually given about every fifth day (Walker). Caesar had

probably covered about 120 miles since leaving Vesontio. He was now in the valley of the

Rhine, never previously entered by a Roman general with an army (Kelsey). Ariovistus was then

some twenty-four miles farther on (A-G). The army in a seven days march at the usual rate

would cover about one hundred miles, and reach a position near Cernay, not far from the Rhine

(L-E). Cum with the subjunctive brings out the causality more strongly than an ablative absolute

would have done: owing to the hard marching, he came up. Caesar well knew how much

depended upon the coming pon Ariovistus as soon as possible (Walpole).

ā nostrīs: sc. cōpiīs: “from our forces” (A-G); ablative of separation (AG 402).

mīlia: accusative of extent of space (AG 425). Probably Caesar had reached the Fecht, between

Ostheim and Gemar (Hodges). Napoleon III places Caesar’s camp at Cernay, a town of Upper

Alsace, at the foot of the Vosges; and that of Ariovistus near Colmar, lying northeast of Cernay.

Between them is the plain of Cernay, watered by the Ill, a tributary of the Rhine, and its own

tributary the Thur (M-T).



BOOK 1, Chapter 42:

Cognitō Caesaris adventū Ariovistus lēgātōs ad eum mittit: quod anteā dē conloquiō

postulāsset, id per sē fierī licēre, quoniam propius accessisset sēque id sine perīculō facere posse

exīstimāret. Nōn respuit condiciōnem Caesar iamque eum ad sānitātem revertī arbitrābātur, cum

id quod anteā petentī dēnegāsset ultrō pollicērētur, magnamque in spem veniēbat prō suīs tantīs

populīque Rōmānī in eum beneficiīs cognitīs suīs postulātīs fore utī pertināciā dēsisteret. Diēs

conloquiō dictus est ex eō diē quīntus. Interim saepe cum lēgātī ultrō citrōque inter eōs

mitterentur, Ariovistus postulāvit nē quem peditem ad conloquium Caesar addūceret: verērī sē nē

per īnsidiās ab eō circumvenīrētur; uterque cum equitātū venīret: āliā ratiōne sēsē nōn esse

ventūrum. Caesar, quod neque conloquium interpositā causā tollī volēbat neque salūtem suam

Gallōrum equitātuī committere audēbat, commodissimum esse statuit omnibus equīs Gallīs

equitibus dētractīs eō legiōnāriōs mīlitēs legiōnis X., cui quam maximē cōnfīdēbat, impōnere, ut

praesidium quam amīcissimum, sī quid opus factō esset, habēret. Quod cum fieret, nōn inrīdiculē

quīdam ex mīlitibus X. legiōnis dīxit: plūs quam pollicitus esset Caesarem facere; pollicitum sē

in cohortis praetōriae locō X. legiōnem habitūrum ad equum rescrībere.

Ariovistus asks for a conference and stipulated conditions which Caesar grants (L-E).

quod…(etc.): a relative pronoun, “whereas” (M-T), object of postulāsset (Hodges); its

antecedent is id (A-G), subject of fierī (Hodges): “[stating that], as to his previous demand in

regard to a conference, this might now be carried into effect through his own means, since he had

come nearer” (Anthon).



dē conloquiō: dē used with transitive verbs is characteristic of Caesar’s style (Walpole).

postulāsset: = postulāvisset; sc. Caesar (L-E).

id…licēre: “this could be done” (M-T).

per sē: “so far as he was concerned” (a common expression with licet) (A-G); “with his

consent,” i.e., with the consent of Ariovistus; literally, “through himself” (Harkness).

accessisset: the subject is Caesar (A-G). Ariovistus’ reason initially for refusing a conference

(see Chapter 34) no longer held good. Caesar’s prompt advance had surprised him and he was

more inclined to confer (L-E).

sine perīculō: Ariovistus wanted to avoid seeming to be forced into a conference (L-E).

nōn respuit condiciōnem: “Caesar did not refuse the terms of agreement offered” (Mobery), (as

one might have supposed he would do). Notice the emphatic placement of nōn respuit (A-G).

ad sānitātem revertī arbitrābātur: “he thought that he was beginning to return to a rational

state of mind”; “…he was coming back to his senses” (Kelsey), literally “to a sound mind”

(Anthon); “to a correct way of thinking” (Spencer). The imperfect tense indicates here the

beginning of an action (A-G).

petentī: sc. sibi; i.e., Caesarī (Harkness): “when he requested it” (L-E); “to his request,”

literally, “to him asking [it]” (H-T).

dēnegāsset: = dēnegāvisset: “had utterly refused” (Hodges), i.e., Ariovistus (Kelsey).

Subjunctive, as being part of Caesar’s thought (M-T).



ultrō pollicerētur: ultrō (“of his own initiative” (Kelsey); “unasked” (M-T)) as opposed to

petentī (A-G): “he actually promised” (H-T). The original meaning of ultrō is “to a place

beyond.” Thence comes its secondary meaning of going “beyond” what is required, i.e., doing a

thing “voluntarily” (M-T).

magnam in spem veniēbat: “he was coming to have great hopes” (Kelsey); “and he began

confidently to expect” (L-E); “he began to entertain hope” (Moberly).

prō suīs…beneficiīs: “in gratitude for…” (Hodges); “in return for…” (Kelsey); “in view of…”

(M-T); “considering…” (Walpole). From Caesar’s point of view, Ariovistus was showing great

ingratitude (L-E). Compare Chapter 35, beneficiō suō (H-T).

suīs: = Caesaris as a subjective genitive (Walpole).

in eum: “to him,” i.e., Ariovistus (Harkness).

fore utī pertināciā dēsisteret: “that he would give up his stubbornness” (Walker); “that he

would cease from his stubbornness”; literally, “that it would come to pass that he would

cease…” (Hodges). Pertināciā is ablative of separation (AG 402). The use of this periphrasis is

here a matter of choice on Caesar’s part, since the verb dēsisteret is active and has a future

infinitive form (Walker). It is preferable in translating to omit the circumlocution (Walpole).

conloquiō: dative of purpose (AG 382) (A-G): “for the conference” (Hodges).

quīntus: remember that the Latin reckoning was inclusive (Walpole).

ultrō citrōque: “hither and thither” (H-T); “on that side and on this” (Harkness); “to and fro”

(M-T); “back and forth” between the headquarters of the two commanders (Kelsey).



postulāvit: notice the form of the two demands following this verb, each expressed by the

subjunctive, and each having an explanatory clause with the accusative and infinitive appended

to it (Hodges).

nē quem peditem: “that no (i.e., not any) foot soldier” (Kelsey).

verērī: a verb of saying is understood from postulāvit (A-G): “[saying] that he was afraid”

(Kelsey). Translate nē that introduces the following fear clause (AG 564) with “that” (Kelsey).

venīret: standing for veniat (hortatory subjunctive (AG 439)) in indirect discourse (A-G). This

may be taken as a substantive clause, like nē…addūceret. But it is better to regard it as simply

the indirect form of uterque veniat, “let each come” (Hodges).

āliā ratiōne sē nōn esse ventūrum: “that he would not come on any other terms / condition”

(Anthon). Aliā ratiōne is a conditional ablative, “if there were any other terms” (Walpole).

interpositā causā: causā = impedīmentō: “by putting in an excuse” (A-G); “by allowing

difficulties or excuses to intervene” (Moberly); “by alleging any excuse” (H-T); “by the

interposing of any pretext” (Anthon), i.e., by Ariovistus (Harkness). Caesar did not wish to allow

Ariovistus any pretext for jeopardizing the conference (M-T). Ablative absolute (AG 419) (A-G).

conloquium…tollī: “the conference to be thwarted / prevented” (Anthon).

neque audēbat: “nor was rash enough to” (Walpole).

Gallōrum equitātuī: the cavalry in Caesar’s army were all Gauls. He was afraid, therefore, lest,

if attacked during the conference by the German horse, they might not prove a sufficient

protection for his person (Anthon). Caesar’s natural distrust of the Gallic cavalry may have been



increased by Ariovistus’ demand that cavalry only should escort him (L-E). He knew that, in any

case, they were no match for the German cavalry (Walker). The Gallic cavalry numbered about

4000, about the same as a legion (A-G). Equitātuī is the dative object of a verb of trusting (AG

367); some editions have equitātū, the old form of the dative (Anthon).

commodissimum: predicate adjective after esse, whose subject is the infinitive clause eō…

impōnere (A-G): “he deemed it most expedient that…” (Anthon).

omnibus equīs Gallīs equitibus dētractīs: “all their horses having been taken from the Gallic

cavalry” (Anthon). Gallīs equitibus is dative following dētractīs (A-G), though translated with

“from” (Hodges).

eō legiōnāriōs mīlitēs…impōnere: “to mount on them the legionary soldiers.” The adverbial

form eō (“thereon” (Hodges) is equivalent here to in eōs [equōs]: “upon them” (Anthon). The

horses of the Gallic cavalry were assigned to the soldiers of the famous tenth legion (Harkness).

Legiōnāriōs is contrasted with equitibus (Hodges).

cui: “in which” (Kelsey); dative with the notion of trusting (AG 367).

quam amīcissimum: “guards as devoted as possible” (Moberly).

sī quid opus factō esset: “if there should be need of any active measures” (A-G); “if there

should be any occasion for their services” (L-E). Quid (= aliquid) is an adverbial accusative (AG

397 a); factō (a participle, not the noun) is ablative of means with opus esset (AG 411) (A-G).

This phrase appears to be a mixture of the two common constructions: Sī quid opus est, “if

anything is needed”; and sī factō (or factū) opus est, “if there is need of action.” Observe that



quid alone is the subject, opus the predicate (Moberly). Esset is subjunctive in implied indirect

discourse, for in making his plans Caesar thought sī erit, “if there shall be” (Walker).

quod cum fieret: quod = hoc: “while this was going on” (A-G).

nōn inrīdiculē: “not without some humor,” i.e., humorously enough (Anthon); “wittily” (L-E).

Litotes (AG 641), in which an affirmation is made in the form of a denial of the opposite (M-T).

plūs quam pollicitus esset Caesarem facere: plūs is the object of facere (Kelsey): “that Caesar

was doing more [for that legion] than he had promised” (Harkness).

pollicitum sē in cohortis praetōriae locō X. legiōnem habitūrum: sc. eum, referring to Caesar,

the subject of rescrībere (Kelsey): “having promised [merely] that he would have the tenth

legion as his body-guard” (Hodges). See Chapter 36 (A-G).

cohortis praetōriae: “the cohort of the praetorium,” i.e., of headquarters. They were to supply

the guards and escorts required by Caesar (Moberly).

nunc…ad equum rescrībere: “that now he was transferring them to the cavalry” (Harkness);

“that now he enrolled them among the knights” (A-G); “now that he was making knights of

them” (H-T). The soldier said, in substance, “After promising only to make us his body-guard,

Caesar is actually making us cavaliers” (Walker). Perhaps the wit of the remark consists in part

in the pun involved in ad equum rescrībere, which may mean either to transfer to the cavalry (a

part of the army looked down upon by the soldiers of the legion (L-E)) or to raise to the rank of

knight (Harkness), a special privileged class in Roman society (A-G). When soldiers were first

enlisted they were said to be scrībī, i.e., their names were entered in the roll of the legion. If they



were afterward transferred, from the corps into which they had been enrolled, to some other part

of the service, they were said to be rescrībī (Anthon).

The equitēs were originally the cavalry soldiers of the Roman citizen-army. According to the

arrangement attributed to Servius Tullius they formed the highest class in the state after the

senators. Some received their horses at the public cost (hence the phrase rescrībere ad equum,

“to enroll for a horse”); some served on horses of their own. But by a law of C. Gracchus all

persons possessing the requisite property-qualification were enrolled in the ordō equestris

irrespective of service in the army; so that from this date (123 B.C.) the name equitēs is applied

in two distinct senses, military and civil; and the Equestrian order became the great middle class

in Roman society, in which most of the merchants, financiers, etc. were found (M-T).



BOOK 1, Chapter 43:

Plānitiēs erat magna et in eā tumulus terrēnus satis grandis. Hic locus aequō ferē spatiō ā

castrīs Ariovistī et Caesaris aberat. Eō, ut erat dictum, ad conloquium vēnērunt. Legiōnem

Caesar, quam equīs dēvēxerat, passibus CC ab eō tumulō cōnstituit. Item equitēs Ariovistī pārī

intervāllō cōnstitērunt. Ariovistus ex equīs ut conloquerentur et praeter sē dēnōs ad conloquium

addūcerent postulāvit. Ubi eō ventum est, Caesar initiō ōrātiōnis sua senātūsque in eum beneficia

commemorāvit, quod rēx appellātus esset ā senātū, quod amīcus, quod mūnera amplissimē

missa; quam rem et paucīs contigisse et prō magnīs hominum officiīs cōnsuēsse tribuī docēbat;

illum, cum neque aditum neque causam postulandī iūstam habēret, beneficiō ac līberālitāte suā

ac senātus ea praemia cōnsecūtum. Docēbat etiam quam veterēs quamque iūstae causae

necessitūdinis ipsīs cum Haeduīs intercēderent, quae senātūs cōnsulta quotiēns quamque

honōrifica in eōs facta essent, ut omnī tempore tōtīus Galliae prīncipātum Haeduī tenuissent,

prius etiam quam nostram amīcitiam adpetīssent. Populī Rōmānī hanc esse cōnsuētūdinem, ut

sociōs atque amīcōs nōn modo suī nihil dēperdere, sed grātiā, dignitāte, honōre auctiōrēs velit

esse; quod vērō ad amīcitiam populī Rōmānī attulissent, id iīs ēripī quis patī posset? Postulāvit

deinde eadem quae lēgātīs in mandātīs dederat: nē aut Haeduīs aut eōrum sociīs bellum īnferret,

obsidēs redderet, sī nūllam partem

A conference is held, in which Caesar makes demands of Ariovistus (Hodges).



plānitiēs: Caesar made a rapid march from Tonnerre to Besançon (see Chapter 38). Then,

avoiding the mountainous and wooded country on the direct line by Montbeliard, he went by a

detour of fifty miles by Pennesières and Vallerois les Bois to Arcey. At this place, after four

days’ march, he resumed the direct road to the Rhine by Belfort, as far as Cernay. Arriving there

on the seventh day he found himself within twenty-four miles of Ariovistus, who was encamped

near Colmar. The plain was the one crossed by the rivers Ill and Thur (Moberly). Belfort, some

distance southwest of Cernay, is thought by some authorities to be the place near which these

negotiations were carried on; but there is no large plain near Belfort (L-E).

tumulus terrēnus: “a rising ground,” literally, “a mound (or hill) of earth” (Anthon), whose

sides, free from rocks and ledges, furnished an easy ascent for horsemen. This has been

identified with the hill of Plettig, an elevation of oval shape about 24 miles southwest of

Strassburg, between the villages of Epfig and Dambach; it rises in isolation more than 160 feet

above the surrounding plain (Kelsey).

satis grandis: “of considerable height” (Anthon); “of a moderate size”; satis means “up to the

average” (M-T).

aequō ferē spatiō…aberat: “was nearly an equal distance away” (H-T). Spatiō is ablative of

degree of difference (AG 414).

eō: adverb, = ad tumulum (Hodges).

ut erat dictum: = constitūtum (Spencer): “as had been agreed” (Walker).

quam equīs dēvēxerat: “which he had brought on horseback,” referring to the tenth legion

(Harkness). Equīs is ablative of means (AG 409) (A-G), the horses being the means by which the



soldiers are brought to the hill (Walker).

passibus CC: about 320 yards; ablative of degree of difference with ab (AG 414) (A-G).

pārī intervāllō: also ablative of degree of difference: “at an equal distance” (Walker).

cōnstitērunt: distinguish carefully between cōnsistō and cōnstituō (Walker).

ex equīs: “on horseback” (Anthon), literally, “from horses” (Harkness). The ex expresses the

place from which the action comes (M-T).

ut conloquerentur: “that they should converse” (M-T); subjunctive in a purpose clause (AG 531).

praeter sē: “besides themselves”; sē is plural (A-G).

dēnōs: a distributive numeral, “ten each” (Harkness); “ten apiece” (Hodges).

postulāvit: Caesar does not say that he made any objection to this request, or demand. Probably

he agreed to it at once, being desirous to let nothing prevent a meeting (L-E).

ubi eō ventum est: = vēnērunt (L-E); impersonal passive use of an intransitive verb (AG 208 d)

(Harkness).

initiō: ablative of place where without a preposition (M-T).

beneficia: “acts of kindness” (Spencer).

sua…commemorāvit: “reminded him of his own (favors) and the senate’s favors to him” (L-E);

“he recounted…” (Anthon). See Chapter 33 (Moberly).



quod…quod…quod…: these appositional clauses explain what the beneficia were: “how

that…” (Anthon). An example of anaphora, the repetition of a word at the beginning of

successive clauses, instead of conjunctions (Spencer).

appellātus esst: subjunctive in a subordinate clause that is part of indirect discourse (AG 583)

dependent on commemorāvit.

amīcus: sc. appellātus esset (A-G).

mūnera missa: sc. essent. What these “presents” were, we do not know (Kelsey). It was

customary with the Romans to send presents to those whom the senate had honored with the title

of king (Anthon). Livy (xxx. 15) tells us that these gifts consisted of a golden crown and cup, an

ivory curule chair and scepter, and embroidered robes (Moberly).

amplissimē: “of the most dignified character” (Moberly); “in rich abundance” (Walpole).

quam rem et paucīs contigisse…tribuī: quam rem = et eam rem (M-T): “a mark of respect

which had come to few (persons)” (L-E); “and that this recognition…” (Kelsey); “a tribute

which…” (A-G); “a thing which…” Quam rem is the subject of contigisse and cōnsuēsse (=

cōnsuēvisse) (Hodges). We may add Masinissa to the ranks of those so honored by the Romans;

he was also saluted as rex and given triumphal insignia by Scipio Africanus (Stock).

prō magnīs hominum officiīs: “in return for important services on the part of individuals”

(Anthon). Hominum is subjective genitive (AG 343, note 1).

docēbat etiam…: “he also stated” (Kelsey); “he then proceeded to inform him” (Moberly); “he

tried to make clear to him, furthermore.” On docēbat depend three indirect questions, quam…



intercēderent, quae…facta essent, and ut…tenuissent (AG 575) (Hodges).

illum, cum neque aditum neque causam postulandī iūstam habēret: illum, the subject of

cōnsecūtum [esse], is emphatic, as opposed to other beneficiaries implied in the preceding (A-

G): “that he [Ariovistus], although he had neither the means of deserving them, nor just cause to

ask for them” (Anthon). A cum-concessive clause (AG 549) with subjunctive.

aditum: sc. ad senātum (Spencer): “the right of approach” (Hodges); “access,” i.e., to the senate,

by whom the honor was conferred (Harkness). In Roman law aditus meant right of way to one’s

own field through another’s; so here generally “right of access” (M-T). Aditum nōn habēre implies

the absence of any services on the part of Ariovistus towards the Roman people (Anthon);

postulandī: sc. ea praemia (Spencer).

ea praemia cōnsecūtum: sc. esse: “had attained these honors / distinctions,” as if he had eagerly

sought them (A-G). The turn of this last phrase, if literally spoken by Caesar, must have been

offensive to Ariovistus, as implying that he had obtained this recognition by suing for it (Moberly).

No special reason is known why Ariovistus should have sought the recognition of Rome (Kelsey).

quam veterēs quamque iūstae causae necessitūdinis…intercēderent: “how ancient and how

reasonable were the occasions for an alliance between them, [the Romans] and the Aedui” (L-E);

“what old and just causes of alliance existed between themselves [the Romans] and the Aedui.”

The Aedui were said by Strabo to have been the first among the Gauls who embraced the

friendship of the Romans (Spencer).

necessitūdinis: “of close relationship” (Kelsey); “of alliance” (Harkness), whether of blood or

friendship. So also the adjective necessāriī means “kinsmen” (M-T).



ipsīs: = Rōmānīs (Kelsey), in slight antithesis to Aeduīs (M-T), instead of sibi, which would

refer to Caesar alone (A-G).

intercēderent: “existed between”; subjunctive in an indirect question (AG 575) (A-G).

quae senātūs cōnsulta quotiēns quamque honōrifica in eōs facta essent: “what decrees of the

senate had been made in their favor (“had been passed on their behalf” (Kelsey)), how often, and

how flattering” (Hodges). Senātūs cōnsulta is the technical expression for decrees of the senate,

as distinct from a vote of the popular assembly, plebiscītum (M-T).

ut…prīncipātum Haeduī tenuissent: “how [completely] the Aedui had held / enjoyed the

leadership” (Anthon). Ut is used here as an interrogative adverb, introducing an indirect question

(L-E).

omnī tempore: = semper (M-T).

Galliae: i.e., Celtic Gaul (L-E). But we have learned in Chapter 31 that even there their

supremacy had always been disputed (Walker).

prius etiam quam nostram amīcitiam adpetīssent: “even before they had sought our

friendship” (Kelsey). Prius…quam is an instance of tmesis: the separation of the two parts of a

compound word by other words (AG 640). The subjunctive is due to the indirect discourse of

which this clause is a part (Walker). Nostram = Rōmānōrum (M-T).

adpetīssent: = adpetīvissent or adpetiissent. In the direct discourse this might be either perfect

indicative or the same as here. If only priority of time is meant, it would be indicative; if there is



any internal relation between the main clause and the time clause, it would require the

subjunctive. In this case the latter seems more probable (A-G).

populī…posset?: converted to direct discourse, with changes underlined: Populī Rōmānī haec

est cōnsuētūdō ut sociōs atque amīcōs nōn modo suī nihil dēperdere, sed grātiā…auctiōrēs velit

esse; quod vērō ad amīcitiam populī Rōmānī attulērunt, id iīs ēripī quid patī possit?

hanc esse cōnsuētūdinem: “the practice was this, [namely…]” (L-E).

nōn modo…sed: note that etiam is omitted (Walpole).

suī nihil dēperdere: “should lose nothing of what they had” (Kelsey), literally, “nothing of their

own,” i.e., none of their rights, power, influence, resources, etc. (Spencer). Suī is used

substantively as a partitive genitive (AG 346) (A-G).

ut…velit: “to wish,” literally, “that they (populus Rōmānus) wish its allies and friends not only

to lose nothing of their own” (Hodges).” Velit is subjunctive in a substantive result clause (AG

571), explaining cōnsuētūdinem (Harkness); it is present tense in a general statement (M-T).

grātiā, dignitāte, honōre auctiōrēs…esse: “but even to be still farther advanced (literally,

“more increased”) in favor, dignity, [and] honor” (Harkness). Grātiā, dignitāte, honōre are

ablatives of specification / respect (AG 418).

quod…ad amīcitiam…attulissent: “what they had indeed brought” to the friendship of the

Roman people,” i.e., which they possessed when they became their friends (Harkness); “which

they had brought with them when they obtained the friendship of the Roman people” (Anthon);

“what they had brought to the alliance” (A-G). Caesar refers to the independence of the Aedui



and their influence among the Gauls in former times (Hodges). How far Rome observed this law

herself, we see from the fact that in 100 B.C. some lands in Cisalpine Gaul were confiscated on

the pretence that they had been conquered by the Cimbri (Moberly).

id iīs ēripī quis patī posset?: “who then could bear to have that taken from them…?” (Anthon).

Id is the antecedent of the preceding quod clause. Iīs is dative of separation (AG 381) with ēripī.

The direct form of the question would be quis possit? (Hodges), deliberative subjunctive (AG

444).

postulāvit eadem: “he made the same demands” (A-G).

in mandātīs: = in locō mandātōrum (Walpole): “in his instructions” (Harkness); “by way of

instructions,” not “amongst their instructions,” for these were all he gave (M-T).

nē…(etc.): these substantive clauses are in apposition with eadem, and are indirectly quoted

from imperative forms of the direct discourse (A-G).

nē bellum inferret: “that he should not make war.” In the direct form this clause would be a

prohibition, Nōlī bellum infer! (Hodges).

at: “at least” (Harkness); “at any rate” (Kelsey).

nē quōs amplius Rhēnum trānsīre paterētur: “that he should not allow any more to cross the

Rhine” (Hodges).

BOOK 1, Chapter 44:



Ariovistus ad postulāta Caesaris pauca respondit; dē suīs virtūtibus multa praedicāvit:

trānsīsse Rhēnum sēsē nōn suā sponte, sed rogātum et arcessītum ā Gallīs; nōn sine magnā spē

magnīsque praemiīs domum propinquōsque relīquisse; sēdēs habēre in Galliā ab ipsīs concessās,

obsidēs ipsōrum voluntāte datōs; stīpendium capere iūre bellī, quod victōrēs victīs impōnere

consuērint. Nōn sēsē Gallīs sed Gallōs sibi bellum intulisse: omnēs Galliae cīvitātēs ad sē

oppugnandum vēnisse ac contrā sē castra habuisse; eās omnēs cōpiās ā sē ūnō proeliō pulsās ac

superātās esse. Sī iterum experīrī velint, sē iterum parātum esse dēcertāre; sī pāce ūtī velint,

inīquum esse dē stīpendiō recūsāre, quod suā voluntāte ad id tempus pependerint.

Amīcitiam populī Rōmānī sibi ōrnāmentō et praesidiō, nōn dētrīmentō esse oportēre,

idque sē hāc spē petīsse. Sī per populum Rōmānum stīpendium remittātur et dēditiciī

subtrahantur, nōn minus libenter sēsē recūsātūrum populī Rōmānī amīcitiam quam adpetierit.

Quod multitūdinem Germānōrum in Galliam trādūcat, id sē suī mūniendī, nōn Galliae

oppugnandae causā facere; eius reī testimōnium esse quod nisi rogātus nōn vēnerit et quod

bellum nōn intulerit sed dēfenderit. Sē prius in Galliam vēnisse quam populum Rōmānum.

Numquam ante hoc tempus exercitum populī Rōmānī Galliae prōvinciae fīnibus ēgressum. Quid

sibi vellet? Cūr in suās possessiōnēs venīret? Prōvinciam suam hanc esse Galliam, sīcut illam

nostram. Ut ipsī concēdī nōn oportēret, sī in nostrōs fīnēs impetum faceret, sīc item nōs esse

inīquōs, quod in suō iūre sē interpellārēmus.

Quod frātrēs ā senātū Haeduōs appellātōs dīceret, nōn sē tam barbarum neque tam

imperītum esse rērum ut nōn scīret neque bellō Allobrogum proximō Haeduōs Rōmānīs auxilium

tulisse neque ipsōs in iīs contentiōnibus quās Haeduī sēcum et cum Sēquanīs habuissent auxiliō

populī Rōmānī ūsōs esse.



Dēbēre sē suspicārī simulātā Caesarem amīcitiā, quod exercitum in Galliā habeat, suī

opprimendī causā habēre. Quī nisi dēcēdat atque exercitum dēdūcat ex hīs regiōnibus, sēsē illum

nōn prō amīcō sed prō hoste habitūrum. Quod sī eum interfēcerit, multīs sēsē nōbilibus

prīncipibusque populī Rōmānī grātum esse facturum (id sē ab ipsīs per eōrum nūntiōs

compertum habēre), quōrum omnium grātiam atque amīcitiam eius morte redimere posset. Quod

sī dēcessisset et līberam possessiōnem Galliae sibi trādidisset, magnō sē illum praemiō

remūnerātūrum et quaecumque bella gerī vellet sine ūllō eius labōre et perīculō cōnfectūrum.

Ariovistus justifies his own course and makes counter demands and proposals (Walker).

pauca: sc. verba; object of respondit (Kelsey): “briefly” (L-E).

dē suīs virtūtibus multa praedicāvit: “he spoke much and boastfully about his own merits”

(Anthon); “he boasted much of…” (Harkness); “he had much to say about…” (Kelsey). Observe

the asyndeton, the omission of a conjunction connecting this to the preceding sentence (H-T).

trānsiisse…pependerint: Ariovistus’s response to Caesar’s demands is reported in indirect

discourse. Converted to direct discourse it is as follows, with changes underlined: Trānsiī

Rhēnum [ego] nōn meā sponte, sed rogātus et arcessītus ā Gallīs; nōn sine magnā spē magnīs-

que praemiīs domum propinquōsque relīquī; sēdēs habeō in Galliā ab ipsīs concessās, obsidēs

ipsōrum voluntāte datōs; stīpendium capiō iūre bellī, quod victōrēs victīs impōnere consuērunt

(= consuēvērunt). Nōn ego Gallīs sed Gallī mihi bellum intulērunt: omnēs Galliae cīvitātēs ad

mē oppugnandum vēnērunt ac contrā mē castra habuērunt; eae omnēs cōpiae ā mē ūnō proeliō



pulsae ac superātae sunt. Sī iterum experīrī volunt, [ego] iterum parātus sum dēcertāre; sī pāce

ūtī volunt, inīquum est dē stīpendiō recūsāre, quod suā voluntāte ad hoc tempus pependērunt.

trānsīsse: = trānsiisse. The whole chapter, from this point on is in indirect discourse (Harkness).

rogātum et arcessītum: = quod rogātus esset et arcessītus esset (L-E), participles expressing

cause (A-G), agreeing with sēsē (H-T): “because he had been asked and summoned” (Kelsey);

“but on being requested and sent for by the Gauls,” i.e., by the Arverni and Sequani. See Chapter

31 (Anthon).

nōn sine magnā spē magnīsque praemiīs: = nōn sine magnā spē magnōrum praemiōrum: “not

without high hopes and inducements” (Moberly). Hendiadys, the use of two nouns, with a

conjunction, instead of a single modified noun (AG 640) (A-G). Note the litotes of nōn sine.

ab ipsīs: sc. Gallīs: “by the Gauls themselves” (Anthon); “by their own act,” ipse often having

the force of ultrō (M-T).

concessās: “which had been ceded” (Kelsey).

obsidēs: the second object of habēre, i.e, sē habēre sēdēs et obsidēs (Kelsey).

ipsōrum voluntāte: the Gauls state the facts differently; see Chapter 31 (M-T).

stīpendium capere: sc. sēsē: “that he exacted tribute” (Anthon).

iūre bellī: “in accordance with the right of war” (Kelsey). Iūre is ablative of specification /

accordance (AG 418 a) (Walker).

quod: a relative pronoun; its antecedent is stīpendium (Kelsey).



victōrēs victīs: victōrēs = quī vīcissent; victīs = iīs quōs vīcissent (Harkness). Note the

collocation of these two related words (H-T).

victīs impōnere: “to impose upon the vanquished” (Hodges). Victīs is dative with the compound

verb (AG 370).

sēsē Gallīs sed Gallōs sibi: sēsē is the subject of intulisse (Harkness). Note the chiastic order of

these words (AG 598) (Hodges).

consuērint: = consuēverint. A perfect-present (like nōvī) is used of a general truth. But in all the

first part of this reported speech, Caesar uses the original tenses of the speaker (M-T).

omnēs Galliae cīvitātēs: Ariovistus here indulges in a little exaggeration. Only the Aedui and

their allies had fought against him (Harkness).

sibi: “on him,” referring to the main subject, Ariovistus (A-G).

ad sē oppugnandum: gerundive expressing purpose (AG 506) (A-G): “to attack him” (Harkness).

ac: rarely found before a word beginning with c (Walpole).

contrā sē castra habuisse: “had encamped against him” (Harkness).

ūnō proeliō: see Chapter 31 (H-T) regarding the battle at Magetobriga (Walker).

sī iterum experīrī velint: sc. Gallī (Spencer); in direct discourse, sī…volunt (H-T): “if they

wished to try again” (Hodges).

parātum esse dēcertāre: “he was ready to fight it out again” (Hodges); the sense of the prefix

dē- is “to the end,” “down to the dregs” (M-T). The infinitive dēcertāre is used with parātum



(Harkness); in other places, however, parātus takes a gerundive construction with ad, e.g., in

Chapter 5: parātiōrēs ad omnia perīcula subeunda (H-T).

sī pāce ūtī velint: “if they wish to enjoy peace” (H-T); pāce is an ablative object of the deponent

verb ūtī (AG 410) (Harkness).

inīquum esse: “it is unfair” (Kelsey).

dē stīpendiō recūsāre: “to raise an objection in regard to / on the subject of the tribute”

(Harkness); “to make excuses about paying tribute,” i.e., refuse to pay (Hodges). Caesar in his

demands (as stated above) had made no allusion to the stīpendium; but his demanding Ariovistus

to restore the hostages would have deprived Ariovistus of the means of compelling the Gauls to

pay it, hence the expressions dē stīpendiō recūsāre, and not stīpendium recūsāre (Spencer).

suā voluntāte: ablative of manner (AG 412). Suā refers to the Gauls. They however, told a

different story, as we learned from Chapter 31 (Kelsey).

pependerint: from pendō, not pendeō (Hodges).

amīcitiam…adpetierit: Ariovistus’ response continues, reported in indirect discourse.

Converted to direct discourse it is as follows, with changes underlined: Amīcitiam populī Rōmānī

mihi ōrnāmentō et praesidiō, nōn dētrīmentō esse oportet, idque hāc spē petiī (petīvī). Sī per

populum Rōmānum stīpendium remittētur et dēditiciī subtrahentur, nōn minus libenter recūsābō

populī Rōmānī amīcitiam quam adpetiī (adpetīvī).

sibi ōrnāmentō et praesidiō, nōn dētrīmentō esse: “ought to be a source of prestige and a

protection, not a loss / injury” (Kelsey). The double dative construction; sibi is dative of



reference, ōrnāmentō, praesidiō, and dētrīmentō are datives of purpose (AG 382). Dētrīmentum

(from dēterō) is loss through wear and tear (M-T).

oportēre: impersonal; its subject is amīcitiam…esse (A-G): “friendship ought to be” (Harkness);

“that it was right for friendship to be” (Walker).

idque sē hāc spē petīsse: “and that he sought it with this expectation” (Anthon); “and that he

had aimed at the whole thing with this object” (M-T). Id (“that relation” (Harkness)), not eam,

because it refers to the more comprehensive meaning of ut amīcus populī Rōmānī esset (A-G).

Ariovistus admits here that he had sued for the honor (L-E).

petīsse: = petīvisse or petiisse.

sī…stīpendium remittātur: future more vivid condition (sī…remittētur) in indirect discourse,

with the present subjunctive for imperfect, contrary to regular tense sequence, for greater

vividness (A-G): “if the tribute due him is to be withheld” (Anthon); “…is slackened /

neglected” (M-T). The power of exacting tribute would be lost if the Aeduan hostages were

returned, as Caesar demanded (Hodges).

per populum Rōmānum: “through the action of the Roman people” (A-G). Why not ā populō?

Because the result here contemplated, stīpendium remittitur, is not viewed as the proposed object

of the Roman people ̶ an act performed “by” them as a voluntary agent ̶ but merely as brought

about indirectly “through” their means (Harkness).

dēditiciī subtrahantur: “and if those who have surrendered to him are to be withdrawn from

their allegiance” (Anthon); “…are got away” (by underhanded means) (A-G); “should be taken



from under” his control. The dēditīciī were “prisoners of war,” held as hostages to force the

payment of tribute (Kelsey).

nōn minus libenter…quam adpetierit: “and he would cast away the friendship of the Roman

people no less readily than he had sought it.” The stronger tenses used in the dramatic indirect

discourse express strongly the peremptory energy of Ariovistus’ manner (M-T).

adpetierit: sc. eam (Harkness), i.e., amīcitiam.

quod…interpellārēmus: Ariovistus’ response continues, reported in indirect discourse.

Converted to direct discourse it is as follows, with changes underlined: Quod multitūdinem

Germānōrum in Galliam trādūcō, id meī mūniendī, nōn Galliae oppugnandae causā faciō; eius

reī testimōnium est quod nisi rogātus nōn vēnī et quod bellum nōn intulī sed dēfendī. Ego prius

in Galliam vēnī quam populus Rōmānus. Numquam ante hoc tempus exercitus populī Rōmānī

Galliae prōvinciae fīnibus ēgressus (est). Quid tibi vīs? Cūr in meās possessiōnēs venīs?

Prōvincia mea haec est Gallia, sīcut illa vestra. Ut mihi concēdī nōn oportet, sī in vestrōs fīnēs

impetum faciam, sīc item vōs estis inīquī, quod in meō iūre mē interpellātis.

quod…trādūcat: “as to his leading a multitude of Germans across the Rhine into Gaul” (Anthon);

“as for his bringing over hordes of Germans…” (Moberly); “in regard to his bringing over…”

(Kelsey). Subjunctive by indirect discourse (A-G).

id: refers to the preceding clause (Hodges).

suī mūniendī: a genitive gerundive construction (AG 504 b) dependent upon causā (Harkness)

to express purpose: “in order to protect himself” (Hodges).



esse: the subject is the clause quod…dēfenderit (Harkness).

quod nisi rogātus nōn vēnerit: “[the fact] that he did not come without being asked.” The

clause is the subject of esse, with testimōnium (“proof” (Kelsey)) being predicate (Hodges).

sed dēfenderit: sc. id, referring to bellum: “but had warded it off” (Harkness), i.e., had acted

merely on the defensive (A-G). The verb is used in its original sense of “strike down from,” with

the thing warded off as direct object; used of defensive, not offensive, war. The derived sense,

“to protect,” is more common with accusative of the thing protected (M-T).

sē prius in Galliam vēnisse quam populum Rōmānum: = priusquam populus Rōmānus

vēnerit (Walker). Here again Ariovistus misrepresents the facts in the case, as Domitius (consul,

122 B.C.) conquered the Arverni long before he came into Gaul (Harkness). Priusquam, a

conjunction, is divided and separated through tmesis.

Galliam: i.e., Celtic Gaul, excluding the Prōvincia which had been under Roman control since

121 B.C. (Kelsey).

quid sibi vellet: the oblique form of quid tibi vīs? (Moberly). By sibi Caesar is meant (Anthon),

the subject of its own verb vellet (M-T): “What did he wish for himself?” an idiomatic

expression for “what did he mean?” (Walker); “what was his intention?”

cūr in suās possessiōnēs venīret: suās refers to the subject of the main verb of the indirect

discourse (M-T), the possessions of Ariovistus himself (Anthon). Ariovistus here questions

Caesar’s object in coming into his possessions (Spencer).



prōvinciam suam hanc esse Galliam, sīcut illam nostram: “this [part of] Gaul was his

province, just as that [part] was ours” (Hodges). Hanc refers to the quarter (toward the Rhine

(Kelsey)) that Ariovistus is now occupying, viz. the country of the Aedui and Sequani (Spencer);

illam (sc. Galliam) refers to the distant Roman province in the south of Gaul (Anthon). The word

prōvinciam implies very forcibly that Ariovistus considered himself not merely to have

conquered, but to have incorporated his Gallic territory (Moberly).

ut ipsī concēdī nōn oportēret: “as it would not be proper to yield to him” (Harkness); “no

concession ought to be made to him” (Kelsey); “just as there ought to be no yielding to him” (L-

E). Ipsī = sibi ipsī (M-T), i.e., Ariovistus (H-T). Concēdī is an impersonal passive (Harkness):

intransitive verbs that govern the dative are used impersonally in the passive, and the dative is

retained (AG 372).

sī…faceret: in direct discourse, sī…faciam: “if I should make.” This is a future less vivid

condition; such a condition has the same form in indirect discourse as a future more vivid

condition, and can be distinguished only by the sense of the passage (Walker).

quod in suō iūre sē interpellārēmus: “since we interrupted him in the enjoyment of his right”

(Anthon); “we were interfering with him…” (Kelsey). Up to this point dependent subjunctives in

this speech have been either present or perfect; now we have also imperfects and pluperfects

(Hodges), apparently for change’s sake (M-T).

quod frātrēs…ūsōs esse: Ariovistus’ response continues, reported in indirect discourse.

Converted to direct discourse it is as follows, with changes underlined: Quod frātrēs ā senātū

Haeduōs appellātōs dīcis, nōn (ego) tam barbarus neque tam imperītus sum rērum ut nōn sciam

neque bellō Allobrogum proximō Haeduōs Rōmānīs auxilium tulisse neque ipsōs in iīs



contentiōnibus quās Haeduī mēcum et cum Sēquanīs habuērunt (habuerint) auxiliō populī

Rōmānī ūsōs esse (A-G).

quod frātrēs ā senātū Haeduōs appellātōs dīceret: sc. Caesar, by an unmarked change of

subject, the sense being unmistakable (M-T): “as to his [Caesar’s] saying that the Aedui had been

styled brothers by the senate” (A-G); “as to his statement that…” (Walker). See Chapter 33

(Kelsey): frātrēs cōnsanguineōsque (Stock).

imperītum rērum: “ignorant of affairs” (H-T); “so ignorant of the course of events” (Hodges);

“unversed in affairs” (Kelssey); “ignorant of political matters” (L-E); i.e., unsophisticated (A-G).

Adjectives denoting knowledge govern the genitive (AG 349 a).

ut nōn scīret: “as not to know”; a result clause after tam (AG 537) (Hodges).

bellō Allobrogum proximō: i.e., only three years before in 61 B.C. (Kelsey). This is the war

which Cneius Pontinus successfully waged (Anthon). It followed immediately after their

revelation of Catiline’s conspiracy (Moberly). Ablative of time (AG 423).

ipsōs: “they,” i.e., the Aedui (Harkness).

iīs contentiōnibus: “these struggles” (Kelsey); “these latter disputes” (M-T).

sēcum: = cum Ariovistō (Walpole).

auxiliō populī Rōmānī ūsōs esse: “had derived any assistance from the Roman people” (Anthon).

Auxiliō is the ablative object of ūsōs esse (AG 410) (Hodges). Ariovistus here lays his finger upon

a weak point in Caesar’s argument (L-E); for in fact the alliance of the Aedui and the Romans had

been mere words until now when it suited Caesar’s purpose to consider it binding (Walker).



dēbēre…cōnfectūrum: Ariovistus’ response concludes, reported in indirect discourse.

Converted to direct discourse it is as follows, with changes underlined: Dēbeō suspicārī simulātā

tē amīcitiā, quod exercitum in Galliā habēs, meī opprimendī causā habēre. Tū nisi dēcēdēs

atque exercitum dēdūcēs ex hīs regiōnibus, ego tē nōn prō amīcō sed prō hoste habēbō. Quod sī

tē interfēcerō, (ego) multīs nōbilibus prīncipibusque populī Rōmānī grātum faciam (id ego ab

ipsīs per eōrum nūntiōs compertum habeō) quōrum omnium grātiam atque amīcitiam tuā morte

redimere possum. Quod sī dēcesseris et līberam possessiōnem Galliae mihi trādideris, magnō

ego tē praemiō remūnerābō et quaecumque bella gerī volēs sine ūllō tuō labōre et perīculō

cōnficiam.

dēbēre sē suspicārī: “that he had grounds to suspect” (A-G); “that he has strong reason to

suspect” (Anthon); “that he had a right (legal and moral (L-E)) to suspect” (H-T).

simulātā amīcitiā: “under the pretence of friendship” (A-G); “under the guise of friendship”

(Hodges); “although [Caesar] pretended friendship” (Kelsey), i.e., for the Aedui; perhaps

reference may be to the friendship alleged to exist between the Romans and Ariovistus

(Spencer). Note the concessive force of the ablative absolute (AG 419) (L-E).

quod exercitum in Galliā habeat: “in keeping an army in Gaul” (A-G); “inasmuch as he is

keeping…” (Anthon); “now that he is keeping…” (Moberly). The return to the primary tenses is

perhaps for the sake of keeping the sense of habeat clear, as being a present-imperfect, i.e., it

denotes an incompleted action in the present, “is keeping.” The imperfect in indirect discourse

corresponds to the perfect as well as the present and past-imperfect of direct discourse (M-T).

suī opprimendī causā: “for the purpose of crushing him,” i.e., Ariovistus (A-G).



habēre: sc. Caesarem as subject (Kelsey), and eum as object, referring to exercitum (Harkness):

“and that he [Caesar] was keeping it there” (Hodges).

quī…quod…quod: the three relatives illustrate the principal that the relative, serving to connect

with the previous proposition, may represent various conjunctions: “if then he should not

withdraw” (quī = is igitur); “and if he should kill him” (quod, adverbial accusative); “but if he

should withdraw” (quod = sed) (A-G).

quī nisi dēcēdat: quī = Caesar (Hodges): “if he would not depart” (Harkness); “so unless he

departs” (Kelsey).

sēsē illum nōn prō amīcō sed prō hoste habitūrum: sc. esse (Hodges): “that he [Ariovistus]

would not regard him [Caesar] as a friend but as an enemy” (L-E).

quod sī eum interfēcerit: eum = Caesarem: “moreover / but, if he were to kill him.” It cannot

be supposed that this was a mere idle boast on the part of Ariovistus. Caesar already had at Rome

many violent political enemies, who were eager for his destruction (Anthon). The death of

Caesar would be a welcome thing to the aristocracy, and Ariovistus was aware of the party

rivalries at Rome (H-T). It is entirely possible that Caesar’s enemies at the capital, embittered by

his acts as consul and dreading the consequences of his insatiable ambition (Spencer), had

indicated to the king their desire to have him put out of the way (L-E). This very year was the

one when Clodius, under Caesar’s patronage, got Cicero exiled, in spite of the sympathy of

20,000 citizens (Moberly).

nōbilibus prīncipibusque populī Rōmānī: Caesar was the recognized head of the party

opposed to the senate and nobility. The violence of party spirit at Rome was so excessive that the



statement is not in itself improbable (M-T).

grātum esse factūrum: “that he would do an agreeable thing,” i.e., he would be doing them a

favor (Anthon). There was, doubtless, some truth in this statement of Ariovistus (Harkness).

id…compertum habēre: has almost the force of comperisse (A-G): “he had ascertained this

fact” (Harkness), literally “he possessed this as a thing fully ascertained” (Walker). Compertum

agrees with id (Harkness).

per eōrum nūntiōs: “agents” rather than “messengers” (Hodges). Plutarch seems to suggest a

similar concert between Vercingetorix and Caesar’s enemies at Rome (Stock).

quōrum omnium: “of all of whom” (Hodges). Its antecedent is nōbiibus prīncipibusque (Kelsey).

eius morte redimere posset: “he could purchase / buy back with his [Caesar’s] death” (Anthon).

Ariovistus had been in favor before. Morte is ablative of price (AG 416) (Kelsey).

quod sī dēcessisset: “on the other hand, if he should withdraw entirely” (Hodges). Dēcessisset

replaces the future perfect of a future more vivid condition in direct discourse (Kelsey).

līberam: i.e., “without interference” (Hodges).

Galliae: Celtic Gaul (Hodges).

illum: translate as if Caesarem (Hodges).

remūnerātūrum: sc. esse: “he would compensate” (Hodges).

quaecumque bella gerī vellet: quaecumque bella is the subject of gerī (Kelsey).



sine ūllō eius labōre et perīculō: “without any trouble and hazard on his part”; eius again refers

to Caesar (Anthon). If Caesar will withdraw, Ariovistus will fight his battles for him. The

attitude of Ariovistus seems somewhat less defiant than in his former reply, sent by messengers

as summarized in Chapter 36 (Hodges).

BOOK 1, Chapter 45:

Multa ā Caesare in eam sententiam dicta sunt quārē negōtiō dēsistere nōn posset: neque

suam neque populī Rōmānī cōnsuētūdinem patī ut optimē meritōs sociōs dēsereret, neque sē

iūdicāre Galliam potius esse Ariovistī quam populī Rōmānī. Bellō superātōs esse Arvernōs et

Rutēnōs ā Q. Fabiō Maximō, quibus populus Rōmānus ignōvisset neque in prōvinciam redēgisset

neque stīpendium imposuisset. Quod sī antīquissimum quodque tempus spectārī oportēret, populī

Rōmānī iūstissimum esse in Galliā imperium; sī iūdicium senātūs observārī oportēret, līberam

dēbēre esse Galliam, quam bellō victam suīs lēgibus ūtī voluisset.

Caesar declines to make any concessions (Kelsey) and insists on Roman rights in Gaul (L-E).

multa ā Caesare…dicta sunt: “many arguments were urged by Caesar” (Anthon).

in eam sententiam…quārē: “to this effect [to show] why” (A-G); “for the purpose of showing

why”; this use of the preposition in is an anticipation of the force it was to have in the post-

Ciceronian writers to denote result or purpose, e.g. in lībertātem pugnāre (“to fight for



freedom”), Livy xxiv. 2,4; so also the phrase in memoriam makes use of in to denote purpose,

but such a notion in the preposition is entirely unclassical (H-T).

quārē…posset: “why, namely, he could not desist from his purpose,” i.e., to show why he could

not (etc.) (Anthon); “why it was impossible…” (M-T). Subjunctive in indirect question (AG 574).

negōtiō: ablative of separation (AG 402) (A-G) with dēsistere.

neque…voluisset: starting here Caesar’s response is reported in indirect discourse. Converted to

direct discourse it is as follows, with changes underlined: neque mea neque populī Rōmānī

cōnsuētūdō patitur ut optimē meritōs sociōs dēseram, neque ego iūdicō Galliam potius esse

Ariovistī quam populī Rōmānī. Bellō superātī sunt Arvernī et Rutēnī ā Q. Fabiō Maximō, quibus

populus Rōmānus ignōvit neque in prōvinciam redēgit neque stīpendium imposuit. Quod sī

antīquissimum quodque tempus spectārī oportet, populī Rōmānī iūstissimum est in Galliā

imperium; sī iūdicium senātūs observārī oportet, lībera dēbet esse Gallia, quam bellō victam

suīs lēgibus ūtī voluerit.

patī ut dēsereret: “allowed him to abandon” (L-E). The subject of patī is consuētūdinem

(Hodges); ut…dēsereret is a substantive clause used as the object of patī (Harkness). In Chapter

43 we saw patī followed by accusative and infinitive: id iīs ēripī quis patī posset? (“who could

allow this to be taken away from them?”).

optimē meritōs: “most deserving” (Harkness).

neque sē iūdicāre Galliam potius esse Ariovistī quam populī Rōmānī: “nor could he

admit…” (Moberly); “and he thought Gaul did not belong to Ariovistus rather than to the Roman

people.” This was the real question between Caesar and Ariovistus (L-E).



Galliam: = Celticam Galliam (H-T).

Ariovistī, populī Rōmānī: note the possessive force of these predicate genitives with esse (L-E).

bellō superātōs: in the year 121 B.C. they were conquered by Q. Fabius the consul, who killed

120,000 men and carried off the king and his son as captives (L-E). The Allobroges also were

subdued in this year, and the Province probably organized. As this occurred fifty years before

Ariovistus had entered Gaul, this disposed of the claim (see Chapter 44) that Ariovistus had

come into the country before the Roman people (Walker). Notice the emphasis: these peoples

had been “conquered,” a fact which gave special rights to the Romans (A-G).

Arvernōs et Rutēnōs: conquered, but not included in the Province excepting a small division of

the Ruteni, called Rutēnī prōvinciālēs (Kelsey). The Arverni and Ruteni lay on the other side of

the Cèvennes Mountains, which formed a natural frontier for the Roman province (Walker).

ā Q. Fabiō Maximō: consul in 121 B.C. (Spencer). He was nephew to the younger Africanus.

With not quite 300,000 men Fabius Maximus cut to pieces an army of 200,000 Gauls at the

junction of the Rhône and Isère (Stock).

quibus…ignōvisset: “whom the Roman people had pardoned.” The Romans were said “to

pardon” a conquered people when they allowed them to retain their freedom, to enjoy their own

laws, and create their own magistrates (Anthon). In fact, their country lay beyond the naturally

strong frontier of the Cèvennes, and so could not then be conveniently occupied by the Romans

(A-G). Ignoscō governs the dative (quibus) (AG 367).

in prōvinciam redēgisset: sc. quōs, understood with the transitive verb redēgisset (Moberly). A

state was said to be “reduced to a Roman province” when it was deprived of its laws, and was



subjected to the control of Roman magistrates, and to the payment of a certain tribute (Anthon).

The Cévennes lay between these tribes and the Roman province, so that it would have been hard

to incorporate them with the latter (Hodges) and the real reason for the forbearance of the Romans.

quod sī antīquissimum quodque tempus spectārī oportēret: “but if the most ancient time

should ever be regarded” (Harkness); “if priority of time (literally, “each most ancient time”)

ought to be considered” (Hodges); “if in every case claims on the ground of priority ought to be

regarded,” or “respect ought to be paid to antiquity” (Walpole); “if, then, the most distant period

ought to be regarded,” i.e., if the question was to turn upon the claims of earliest possession

(Anthon). Caesar, answering Ariovistus’ claim of priority of conquest, states that the defeat of

the Arverni and Ruteni in 121 B.C. gives the Romans the first claim (L-E).

iūstissimum: “most valid” (Hodges).

imperium: “right of rule” (Hodges).

sī iūdicium senātūs observārī oportēret: “if, on the other hand, the decision of the senate ought

to be taken into consideration” (Anthon); “…ought to be regarded” (Kelsey).

līberam: those provinces which used their own laws were called līberae (Spencer).

quam…suīs lēgibus ūtī voluisset: “since they [the senate] had willed / decreed that this

[country] should still enjoy its own laws” (Anthon); “…should live under its own laws”

(Moberly), i.e., should remain independent (Hodges). The Romans had conquered two Gallic

tribes in 121 B.C., and so had had the right of war to annex them; but they had judged it best to

leave the Gauls free, and therefore opposed any attack on their liberty by others (M-T). Suīs, “its

own,” refers to Galliam through quam (A-G), which is the subject of ūtī (Hodges).



victam: with concessive force, “though conquered” (Hodges).

voluisset: sc. senātus as subject (A-G): “had allowed” (L-E).



BOOK 1, Chapter 46:

Dum haec in conloquiō geruntur, Caesarī nūntiātum est equitēs Ariovistī propius

tumulum accēdere et ad nostrōs adequitāre, lapidēs tēlaque in nostrōs coicere. Caesar loquendī

fīnem fēcit sēque ad suōs recēpit suīsque imperāvit nē quod omnīnō tēlum in hostēs reicerent.

Nam etsī sine ūllō perīculō legiōnis dēlēctae cum equitātū proelium fore vidēbat, tamen

committendum nōn putābat ut, pulsīs hostibus, dīcī posset eōs ab sē per fidem in conloquiō

circumventōs. Posteāquam in vulgus mīlitum ēlātum est quā arrogantiā in conloquiō Ariovistus

ūsus omnī Galliā Rōmānīs interdīxisset, impetumque in nostrōs eius equitēs fēcissent, eaque rēs

conloquium ut dirēmisset, multō maior alacritās studiumque pugnandī maius exercituī iniectum

est.

Caesar’s reply is interrupted by a treacherous attack from Ariovistus’s escort, and the conference

is broken up (M-T).

geruntur: “were going on” (Hodges). The present indicative is generally governed by dum

(“while”) (AG 556), even when the principal verb is strongly in a past tense (Moberly).

propius tumulum accēdere: “were approaching nearer the mound.” Tumulum is the accusative

with the adverb propius, after the analogy of the preposition prope (H-T). This tumulum was

referred to in Chapter 43; the German cavalry were about a thousand Roman feet from the hill,

the tenth legion at an equal distance (Kelsey).



ad nostrōs adequitāre: “were riding up to our [men]” (Kelsey). With most of the compound

verbs the preposition may be repeated with its proper case. This is often done to impart strength

to the expression (Anthon).

in nostrōs: note the repetition of nostrōs, to avoid eōs, referring to a word in the same sentence

(Moberly). So also the repetition of suus in ad suōs recēpit suīsque imperāvit (M-T).

loquendī fīnem fēcit: “he stopped talking,” literally, “he made an end of talking.” Loquendī is a

gerund used as subjective genitive with fīnem (AG 504). In Chapter 33, fīnem facere appears

with dative (Hodges): fīnem iniūriīs factūrum, “that he would put a stop to wrongdoings.”

nē quod omnīnō tēlum… reicerent: “not to throw back any weapon at all” (Hodges); “not to

hurl in return…” (L-E). Quod (“any”) is the indefinite adjective aliquod, which loses its prefix

when following nē. Quid (for aliquid) is generally substantive (Hodges).

perīculō legiōnis dēlēctae: “danger to his picked legion” (Walker). Notice that in Latin the

genitive is the regular form of one noun dependent on another, whatever preposition we may use

in English to express the relationship (A-G). Legiōnis is objective genitive (AG 348) (Harkness).

You will recall from Chapter 42 that Caesar’s favorite, the “chosen” tenth legion, had been

mounted on horseback and it accompanied him to this conference.

proelium: sc. legiōnis from perīculō legiōnis (Walpole).

committendum nōn putābat, ut dīcī posset: sc. esse sibi with committendum: “he did not think

that he ought to permit it to be said,” literally, “that it could be said” (Harkness); “he thought that

occasion ought not to be given for saying” (M-T); “he thought that no ground should be given

for saying.” The subject of the impersonal committendum is the ut…posset clause (A-G).



ut…dīcī posset eōs ab sē…circumventōs: “that it could be alleged that they [i.e., the enemy]

had been deceived by him” (Hodges). Caesar would have his readers believe that Ariovistus was

the aggressor. As the whole expedition was of doubtful legality, the Roman general would

naturally put prominently in view the plea of necessity (L-E).

pulsīs hostibus: “by routing the enemy” (Kelsey); “after the enemy were defeated.” As Caesar

takes victory for granted, it is better not to regard pulsīs hostibus as conditional (Hodges): “in

case of the defeat of the enemy” (L-E).

per fidem: = fidē datā adductōs (Walpole): “though [misplaced] trust” (A-G); “through a pledge

of good faith,” used to entrap them (Kelsey); “through their trust in his promise” (M-T);

“treacherously”; the phrase per fidem which originally meant “by reliance on” is here on its way

to the sense expressed by “perfidy” (Stock); “because of their confidence [in Caesar’s honor]”

(Walker); “under cover of plighted faith” (Anthon), i.e., by the plighted word of Caesar, who had

invited them to this interview (Harkness). A pledge had been made to abstain from hostilities

during the time of the conference (Spencer).

circumventōs: “entrapped” (M-T).

posteāquam in vulgus mīlitum ēlātum est: “after it was spread about / reported among the

common soldiers” (Anthon). Vulgus is the rank and file soldier (Kelsey). Observe the regular

mood and tense after posteāquam (A-G).

quā arrogantiā…ūsus: “with what arrogance,” literally, “using what arrogance” (Harkness).

Ūsus governs the ablative (AG 410). The participle of ūtor may often be translated by the

preposition “with” (L-E).



interdīxisset, fēcissent, dirēmisset: subjunctives in indirect questions (AG 574) (Harkness).

omnī Galliā: ablative of separation (AG 401) with interdīxisset (A-G), a verb of prohibiting (M-

T) (like in the phrase interdīcere aquā et ignī, “to ban from water and fire”): “had interdicted /

banned the Romans from all Gaul” (Anthon); “had forbidden the Romans all Gaul” (Harkness);

“had ordered the Romans out of…” (Hodges); “had denied to the Romans all right to be in Gaul”

(Kelsey). Ariovistus had wished to confine the Romans to the Province, and to keep the rest of

Gaul tributary to himself (Moberly).

Rōmānīs: interdīxisset governs dative of the person and ablative of the thing (Spencer).

impetum fēcissent: depends upon quā arrogantiā, supplying ūsī to mīlitēs from the preceding

sentence (Walpole). There is no relative or conjunction to govern this verb, so that strict

sequence would require fēcisse; but it seems to be attracted into the subjunctive by the influence

of the surrounding verbs (Stock).

eaque rēs conloquium ut dirēmisset: ut = quōmodo (Anthon) in an indirect question (A-G),

and would more naturally precede impetum (Walker): “and how this circumstance had broken off

the conference (Anthon). Caesar labors earnestly to make his acts appear justifiable, and in a

certain sense they were so. Gaul had to be either Romanized or Germanized, and there can be no

doubt which was the better for the country at that time (Hodges).

multō: ablative of degree of difference (AG 414) (Harkess), taken with māior and māius.

studiumque pugnandī: “eagerness for fighting” (Kelsey). Pugnandī is a gerund used as

objective genitive (AG 504) with studium.



iniectum est: “was infused” (Anthon).

BOOK 1, Chapter 47:

Bīduō post Ariovistus ad Caesarem lēgātōs mīsit: velle sē dē iīs rēbus quae inter eōs agī

coeptae neque perfectae essent agere cum eō: utī aut iterum conloquiō diem cōnstitueret aut, sī id

minus vellet, ex suīs lēgātīs aliquem ad sē mitteret. Conloquendī Caesarī causa vīsa nōn est, et eō

magis quod prīdiē eius diēī Germānī retinērī nōn potuerant quīn tēla in nostrōs coicerent.

Lēgātum ex suīs sēsē magnō cum perīculō ad eum missūrum et hominibus ferīs obiectūrum

exīstimābat. Commodissimum vīsum est C. Valerium Procillum, C. Valeriī Cabūrī fīlium,

summā virtūte et hūmānitāte adulēscentem, cuius pater ā C. Valeriō Flaccō cīvitāte dōnātus erat,

et propter fidem et propter linguae Gallicae scientiam, quā multā iam Ariovistus longinquā

cōnsuētūdine ūtēbātur, et quod in eō peccandī Germānīs causa nōn esset, ad eum mittere, et ūnā

M. Metium, quī hospitiō Ariovistī ūtēbātur. Hīs mandāvit quae dīceret Ariovistus cognōscerent

et ad sē referrent. Quōs cum apud sē in castrīs Ariovistus cōnspexisset, exercitū suō praesente

conclāmāvit: quid ad sē venīrent? an speculandī causā? Cōnantēs dīcere prohibuit et in catēnās

coniēcit.

Ariovistus wishes to renew negotiations, but casts into chains envoys whom Caesar sends

(Hodges).



bīduō post: “two days after,” i.e., “the next day,” literally “afterwards by two days” (Walker),

according to the inclusive reckoning of the Romans (Stock). The Romans counted the day from

which, as well as the day to which, they reckoned (H-T). Post is used adverbially (Harkness).

lēgātōs mīsit: this expression implies both “to say” and “to ask.” On the former idea depends the

following clause with the accusative and infinitive, on the latter idea depends the utī clause

(Hodges).

velle sē…mitteret: Ariovistus’ message to Caesar is presented here in indirect discourse.

Converted to direct discourse it is as follows, with changes underlined: Volō dē iīs rēbus quae

inter nōs agī coeptae neque perfectae sunt tēcum agere:[rogō] utī [Caesar] aut iterum

conloquiō diem cōnstitueret aut, sī id minus vellet, ex suīs lēgātīs aliquem ad sē mitteret.

inter eōs: = inter nōs of direct discourse, and therefore deviating from the strict rule which

requires sē. But the reason is no doubt that the sē plural would have been awkward after the sē

singular (= Ariovistum) employed before (M-T).

quae agī coeptae essent: “which had begun to be discussed” (H-T); “which they had begun to

discuss” (Walker). Coepī is regularly passive when used, as here, with a passive infinitive (AG

205 a) (A-G).

neque perfectae essent: “and had not been brought to a conclusion” (Anthon).

agere cum eō: “to treat with him” (Hodges).

utī…cōnstitueret: sc. et postulāns (Anthon): “[asking of him] that…” (Spencer). Substantive

purpose clause (563), dependent upon lēgātōs mittit, involving the idea of asking or demanding

(Harkness).



conloquiō: dative of purpose / service (AG 382).

sī id minus vellet: minus = nōn (Kelsey): “if he hardly wished [to do] that” (Hodges).

ex suīs lēgātīs aliquem: “one of his legates” (Hodges) (AG 346 c). Suīs refers to Caesar (A-G).

Ariovistus wanted Caesar to send not a messenger but one of his highest officers, probably in

order to hold him as a hostage (Kelsey).

sē: refers to Ariovistus (A-G).

conloquendī Caesarī causa vīsa nōn est: “there did not seem to Caesar [to be any sufficient]

reason for a conference” (L-E); “Caesar saw no occasion for a conference” (Walker).

eō magis: “all the more” (Hodges); “especially,” literally, “and on this account the more,” eō

being explained by the following quod-clause (Kelsey).

prīdiē eius diēī: “the day before,” only a fuller expression for prīdiē (Walker). Prīdiē may be

qualified like any other noun by a genitive (M-T).

retinērī…quīn…coicerent: “be kept from hurling” (A-G). Quīn introduces a subjunctive clause

after expressions of hindrance and refusal (AG 558) (L-E).

lēgātum ex suīs: sc. lēgātīs: “one of his own [officers] as an envoy” (A-G); “an envoy from his

staff,” i.e., one of his officers (Kelsey); “an ambassador from among his men” (Walpole).

Lēgātum is the object of missūrum and obiectūrum (Hodges).

sēsē magnō cum perīculō ad eum missūrum: “it would be exceedingly hazardous for him to

send to him [Ariovistus]” (Kelsey). The Latin often puts into one sentence ideas which we are

inclined to express (for emphasis) in two (A-G).



hominibus ferīs: “uncivilized men,” therefore without respect for the rules of civilized warfare,

the sanctity of a flag of truce, etc. (M-T). Dative with the compound verb obiectūrum (AG 370).

commodissimum vīsum est: “it seemed most fitting”; the subject of vīsum est is mittere (Hodges).

C. Valerium Procillum: mentioned previously in Chapter 19 (Anthon). C. = Gāī (Kelsey).

summā virtūte: ablative of quality (AG 415) describing adulēscentem.

hūmānitāte: “culture” (Harkness); “refinement” (Kelsey), referring to his education, not his

“humanity” (A-G).

C. Valeriō Flaccō: governor of the province of Gaul in 83 B.C. (Kelsey).

cīvitāte dōnātus erat: “he had been presented with the rights of [Roman] citizenship.” Cīvitās is

the Roman franchise, literally, “the being a cīvis.” It conferred the political privileges of voting

in the assemblies and at elections, and of candidature for public office; and the private rights of

intermarriage and trading with Romans, inheriting and holding property according to Roman

law, and the like. Cīvēs also were (at this time) exempt from direct taxation (M-T). Roman

citizenship was often conferred upon foreigners who had rendered some service to Rome

(Kelsey). Those on whom this favor was conferred, prefixed to their own name the praenōmen

and nōmen of the individual, through whose influence the privilege in question had been

obtained, and regarded that person ever after as their patron. Thus Caburus, the father of

Procillus, assumed the name of Gāius Valerius Cabūrus, having taken the first and second names

of Gāius Valerius Flaccus, his patron (Anthon). Dōnō may take either the dative of the person

and the accusative of the thing (dōnat corōnās suīs, “he presents wreaths to his men”) or the

accusative of the person and the ablative of the thing (dōnat suōs corōnīs, “he presents his men

with wreaths”) (AG 364).



propter fidem et propter linguae Gallicae scientiam: the reasons why it seemed best to send

Procillus. Procillus was a Gaul, not a Roman, and thus spoke the Celtic language (Hodges).

quā multā iam Ariovistus longinquā cōnsuētūdine ūtēbātur: “which, with long practice,

Ariovistus now spoke freely” (A-G); “of which Ariovistus now, from long habit, made frequent

use,” i.e., which he now spoke fluently (Anthon). Quā refers to linguae, and multā agrees with

quā (ablative with ūtēbātur (AG 410)), though it may be rendered adverbially (= saepe),

“much,” “often,” or “freely” (Harkness). Longinquā cōnsuētūdine, “owing to long familiarity”

(Walpole), is ablative of cause (AG 404) (Hodges). Longinquus is normally used of distance, but

here of time (M-T).

in eō: “in him” (A-G); “in his case” (Harkness); “as regards him” (Moberly).

quod…esset: “because [as he thought] there was not” (Kelsey). The subjunctive verb indicates

that this was Caesar’s opinion at the time, not that assigned by him as narrator (Harkness).

peccandī Germānīs causa nōn esset: “the Germans would have no motive for committing

violence”; “the Germans would have no reason for doing wrong” (H-T); “there was no ground of

offence for the Germans” (A-G), i.e., by treachery, which Ariovistus was less likely to show to a

Gaul than to a Roman (M-T). Germānīs is dative of possession (AG 373).

hospitiō Ariovistī ūtēbātur: “enjoyed guest-friendship with Ariovistus” (Hodges), i.e., was

connected with him by the ties of hospitality. As the ancients did not have proper inns for the

accommodation of travellers, the Romans, when they were in foreign countries, or at a distance

from home, used to lodge at the houses of certain persons, whom they in return entertained at

their houses in Rome. This was considered a very intimate connection, called hospitium, or iūs

hospitiī (Anthon). This relationship created a sacred bond far closer than that of simple



“hospitality” (A-G), and the violation of the laws of hospitality was considered the greatest

impiety (Spencer). Metius may have been received and entertained by Ariovistus in the course of

the negotiations which in 59 B.C. culminated in the recognition of the German ruler by the

Roman senate (see Chapter 35) (Kelsey). Hospitiō is ablative with ūtēbātur (AG 410).

quae dīceret Ariovistus: “what Ariovistus might have to say” (Anthon). Indirect question (AG

574).

cognōscerent: sc. ut: “to ascertain” (Walpole); a substantive purpose clause (AG 563),

dependent on mandāvit.

quōs: = illōs virōs [C. Valerium Procillum et M. Metium].

cōnspexisset: subjunctive in a cum-circumstantial clause (AG 546).

exercitū suō praesente: “in the presence of his army”; a circumstantial ablative absolute (AG

419). Ariovistus wished his men to hear him denounce the envoys as spies, and so avoid the

charge of bad faith (M-T).

conclāmāvit: “he called out in a loud tone and demanded” (Anthon); “he cried out for all to

hear” (Moberly). The prefix con- serves to intensify the action (Walpole). Ariovistus’s course

can be accounted for only on the theory that he had expected Caesar to accede to his suggestion

for a second personal interview and was disappointed and angry (L-E).

quid: = cūr? (M-T); grammatically a cognate accusative (AG 390 c) after venīrent, like quod =

“whereas” (M-T).

venīrent: the imperfect subjunctive standing for venītis in indirect discourse (A-G).



an speculandī causā: “was it to act as spies?” (Anthon), literally, “or was it for the purpose of

spying?” (Hodges). Causā with a genitive case gerund expresses purpose (AG 504). An is

frequently used in questions apparently simple, but which may be regarded as really the second

member of an alternative question, the first being left to be inferred from the context (M-T).

cōnantēs dīcere prohibuit sc. eōs with cōnantēs (Harkness): “when they tried to speak he

stopped them,” lest they should declare the real purpose of their errand (M-T).

et in catēnās coniēcit: sc. eōs (Harkness): “he threw them into chains” (Kelsey).



BOOK 1, Chapter 48:

Eōdem diē castra prōmōvit et mīlibus passuum VĪ ā Caesaris castrīs sub monte cōnsēdit.

Postrīdiē eius diēī praeter castra Caesaris suās cōpiās trādūxit et mīlibus passuum duōbus ultrā

eum castra fēcit eō cōnsiliō utī frūmentō commeātūque quī ex Sēquanīs et Haeduīs supportārētur

Caesarem interclūderet. Ex eō diē diēs continuōs V Caesar prō castrīs suās cōpiās prōdūxit et

aciem īnstrūctam habuit, ut, sī vellet Ariovistus proeliō contendere, eī potestās nōn dēesset.

Ariovistus hīs omnibus diēbus exercitum castrīs continuit, equestrī proeliō cotīdiē contendit.

Genus hoc erat pugnae, quō sē Germānī exercuerant: equitum mīlia erant VĪ, totidem numerō

peditēs vēlōcissimī ac fortissimī, quōs ex omnī cōpiā singulī singulōs suae salūtis causā

dēlēgerant: cum hīs in proeliīs versābantur, ad hōs sē equitēs recipiēbant; hī, sī quid erat dūrius,

concurrēbant, sī quī graviōre vulnere acceptō equō dēciderat, circumsistēbant; sī quō erat longius

prōdeundum aut celerius recipiendum, tanta erat hōrum exercitātiōne celeritās ut iubīs sublevātī

equōrum cursum adaequārent.

Ariovistus marches past Caesar’s camp. The German cavalry tactics (Walker).

castra prōmōvit: “[Ariovistus] moved his camp forward” (Anthon), first to a spot close upon

the Vosges near Feldkirch, and then on the following day to a hill near Reininger. This last was a

decisive movement; for a general who falls thus on his adversary’s communications must mean

to force him to fight (Moberly). Castra is repeated four times in various cases in this section, an

illustration of Caesar’s preference on occasion of distinctness to every other quality of style

(Walpole).



mīlibus passuum VĪ: mīlibus is ablative of measure / degree of difference (AG 414). Ariovistus

had been twenty-four miles north of Caesar’s camp (Walker).

postrīdiē eius diēī: = postrīdiē (Walker): “on the following day,” literally, “on the day after that

day” (Anthon).

ā Caesaris castrīs: this camp is placed by Napoleon III at the southern foot of the Vosges

Mountains near Cernay (Sennheim), a few miles northwest of Mühlhausen, and thirty miles

beyond Belfort, the fortress which now defends this pass on the frontier between France and

Germany. The march of Ariovistus placed him nearer the passage, so as to cut off Caesar’s

supplies (A-G).

sub monte: “at the foot of the mountain,” probably the Vosges (Harkness), between Soulz and

Feldkirch, according to Napoleon III (M-T), north of Caesar’s camp, from which he was

separated by a heavy forest (L-E).

praeter castra Caesaris: “past Caesar’s camp” (Anthon). Ariovistus’ line of march probably

skirted or traversed the foothills of the Vosges in such a way that Caesar could not attack him

while executing this movement (Kelsey). The forest may have protected him from observation

(L-E).

ultrā eum castra fēcit: fēcit = posuit (L-E); i.e., in the direction from which Caesar had come

(i.e., south of Caesar, near Reiningen (M-T)). This skillful maneuver was embarrassing to Caesar

and made him anxious to fight, as Ariovistus knew it would (L-E). Whether this camp, favorably

located for defense (Kelsey), was between Caesar and the Vosges Mountains or merely beyond

him in the open is uncertain (A-G).

eō cōnsiliō: “with this design,” explained by the ut-clause that follows (Spencer).



utī …Caesarem interclūderet: subjunctive in a purpose clause (AG 531), in apposition with

cōnsiliō, and at the same time expresses the purpose of trānsdūxit and fēcit (Harkness).

Ariovistus did not encamp on the road which the convoys of provisions would have to take, for

her preferred a safer position on the hills; but he was near enough to the road to cut off the

supplies if they tried to pass (Walker).

frūmentō commeātūque: ablatives of separation (AG 402) with interclūderet. Ariovistus

thought that by cutting off Caesar’s supplies he could force Caesar to retire, or else to fight on

ground of his own choosing (Kelsey).

quī ex Sēquanīs et Haeduīs supportārētur: “which were being conveyed to him from the

Sequani and Aedui” (H-T). This route led up from the south. The communications with the Leuci

and Lingones farther north, were not affected, so that Caesar was not entirely cut off from

supplies; but only a small part of his supplies came from that quarter (L-E). This clause is

subjunctive by attraction with the preceding clause (AG 593), as being part of the purpose of

Ariovistus (M-T). Quī agrees with its nearest antecedent, commeātū (Hodges).

ex eō diē diēs continuōs V: “for five successive days after that day” (Anthon); “for five days

successively” (Spencer). Diēs is accusative of duration of time (AG 423.2).

prō castrīs: “before his camp” (Anthon). The Romans preferred to fight with the camp in the

rear as a place of retreat in case of necessity (L-E). Although Caesar could not tempt the

Germans to fight him in this position, he at least encouraged his men by making it clear that the

Germans were not anxious to fight them (Walker). The use of prō in the sense of prae is

common in Caesar (Stock).



aciem īnstrūctam habuit: = aciem instrūxisse: “he kept his army drawn up in [triple] line of

battle” (Hodges).

sī vellet Ariovistus proeliō contendere: as a matter of fact, it was Caesar who wished to fight;

but he was naturally reticent on this point, knowing that his opponent had scored an advantage

over him (L-E). The thought in Caesar’s mind was sī vult, “if he wishes.” Here, in implied

indirect discourse, it changes to the imperfect subjunctive, sī vellet (Walker).

ut eī potestās nōn dēesset: “so that he might not lack the opportunity,” literally, “so that the

means of so doing (Anthon) might not be wanting to him” (Harkness). We have ut nōn instead of

nē for this negative purpose clause (AG 531), because the negative is closely connected with the

verb (Hodges). It may possibly be a result clause (AG 537), in which case there is no irregularity

with ut…nōn (M-T). All compounds of esse (except abesse and posse) govern the dative (AG

381) (L-E).

exercitum: i.e., the German infantry (Kelsey), expressly opposed to equitātus (Walpole).

castrīs: “within the camp” (Kelsey); Ariovistus was perfectly satisfied with his position and

hoped to compel Caesar to retreat in order to secure his communications with the Sequani and

Aedui (L-E). Ariovistus had a superstitious reason for refusing to fight, as appears later

(Walker). Ablative of place where may omit the preposition when the idea of means is prominent

(A-G); this is especially common with the verbs teneō and recipiō (H-T).

continuit, equestrī proeliō: note the asyndeton (AG 601 c) (H-T), as so often in Caesar (Walpole).

equestrī proeliō: “with cavalry skirmishing” (Kelsey).



genus hoc erat pugnae: “the following was the kind of battle” (Anthon); “their method of fighting

(Kelsey) was as follows” (H-T); “the following was the method of [cavalry] fighting [racticed by the

Germans]” (Moberly). The tactics here described were not really original with the Germans, but a

common device among many ancient peoples (L-E).

quō sē exercuerant: “in which they were trained” (A-G); “to which they had trained themselves”

(Anthon).

equitum: partitive genitive (AG 346) dependent on mīlia.

totidem numerō peditēs: sc. erant (Kelsey): “the same number of infantry”; numerō is ablative

of specification (AG 418) with totidem (Harkness).

vēlōcissimī: “the fastest” (Kelsey).

quōs ex omnī cōpiā…dēlēgerant: “whom the horsemen had individually selected from the

whole army” (Anthon). Cōpiā = multitūdine (Harkness), “multitude,” “number” (M-T), “troop”

(Walpole).

hīs, hōs, hī: all refer to these selected peditēs (Harkness).

versābantur: sc. equitēs: “associated themselves” (Kelsey).

singulī singulōs: sc. equitēs…peditēs: i.e., one apiece (A-G): “each [horseman selecting] one

[foot soldier]” (Anthon). This idiom repeats the distributive, the first singulī being merely

equivalent to quisque (M-T). Singulōs agrees with quōs (Kelsey). These pairs were generally

composed of close friends (L-E). This mixed arrangement produced what Caesar admires in the

British chariots (4. 33), mōbilitātem equitum, stabilitātem peditum (“ease of movement for the

horsemen, stability for the foot-soldiers”) (Moberly).



suae salūtis causā: “for his own protection” (Anthon).

cum hīs: sc dēlectīs peditibus (Spencer).

sī quid erat dūrius: “if anything occurred of more than ordinary danger” (Anthon); “if there was

anything at all untoward” (Walpole); “if things were harder than usual” (M-T); “if there was

anything unusually difficult” (Harkness); “if there was anything too hard [for the cavalry to

accomplish on their own]” (L-E); “if their friends were at all hard pressed” (Moberly). If the

danger was unusually great at any particular point (Spencer).

concurrēbant: “they ran to their assistance / support” (Anthon).

sī quī: = sī quis (Anthon), the indefinite pronoun (Hodges).

equō dēciderat: “had fallen off of his horse” (Kelsey). Dēciderat is indicative of indefinite

frequency, according to the usual rule in Caesar (M-T). Equō is ablative of place from which

(understand dē equō) or ablative of separation (AG 402).

circumsistēbant: “stood around [to defend him]” (Anthon); “they would gather round him”

(Kelsey).

sī quō erat…prōdeundum: “if it was necessary to advance to any place” (Harkness). Erat

prōdeundum is passive periphrastic expressing necessity (AG 500.3). Sī quō is the adverb of sī

quis, just as quō of quis or quī (Hodges).

longius: “farther than usual” (Anthon); “rather far” (Hodges).

celerius: “with greater speed than ordinary” (Anthon); “with special swiftness” (Kelsey); “quite

rapidly” (L-E). Note the various options one has for translating a comparative adverb.



recipiendum: “if it was necessary to retreat.” The use of the impersonal gerundive belongs to

intransitive verbs (as prōdeundum above). But recipere is transitive, the ordinary expression for

“to retreat” being sē recipere. In early Latin, however, recipere was used without an object, as it

is here (M-T).

exercitātiōne: “from constant practice” (Anthon).

iubīs sublevātī equōrum: “being supported by the manes of the horses” (Anthon); “supporting

themselves…” (Kelsey). Running along by the horses and holding on by their manes, they could

keep up with them (Hodges). Iubīs is ablative of means (AG 410).

ut…cursum adaequārent: understand equōrum with cursum: “that they kept up with the

running” of the horses” (Kelsey); “that they could equal their speed, (Anthon); “that they kept up

with the full gallop” (Moberly). Tacitus (Ger. 6) says: “They fight in combination [infantry and

cavalry] and the foot soldiers, picked out of the entire body of young men and placed in front of

the line, are able to keep up with the cavalry in speed.” This method of fighting, peculiar to the

Germans, seemed so advantageous to Caesar that he employed it himself on occasion, notably at

the battle of Pharsalia (A-G). Caesar afterwards employed German horsemen as mercenaries, and

they rendered him very effective service, as at the siege of Alesia (Kelsey).



BOOK 1, Chapter 49:

Ubi eum castrīs sē tenēre Caesar intellēxit, nē diūtius commeātū prohibērētur, ultrā eum

locum, quō in locō Germānī cōnsēderant, circiter passūs DC ab hīs, castrīs idōneum locum

dēlēgit aciēque triplicī īnstrūctā ad eum locum vēnit. Prīmam et secundam aciem in armīs esse,

tertiam castra mūnīre iussit. [Hic locus ab hoste circiter passūs DC, utī dictum est, aberat.] Eō

circiter hominum XVĪ mīlia expedīta cum omnī equitātū Ariovistus mīsit, quae cōpiae nostrōs

terrērent et mūnītiōne prohibērent. Nihilō sētius Caesar, ut ante cōnstituerat, duās aciēs hostem

prōpulsāre, tertiam opus perficere iussit. Mūnītīs castrīs duās ibi legiōnēs relīquit et partem

auxiliōrum, quattuor reliquās legiōnēs in castra maiōra redūxit.

Caesar fortifies a second camp beyond Ariovistus, reopening the road to insure his line of

communications (Kelsey).

eum: “that he,” i.e., Ariovistus (Harkness), the subject of tenēre (Hodges), while sē is its object

(Kelsey).

nē diūtius commeātū prohibērētur: as described in Chapter 48, Ariovistus was in a position to

cut off Caesar completely from his base of supplies by a further advance (L-E). It is a question

for military men to decide, whether Caesar should have allowed Ariovistus to march past his

camp, and cut off his communication with the quarter from which his supplies were to come. It is

probable that his object, in delaying a general action, was to accustom his men, in the

meanwhile, by a succession of slight encounters, to the looks of so formidable a foe, as well as to

their manner of fighting (Anthon). Purpose clause (AG 531), depending on dēlēgit and vēnit

(Hodges). Commeātū is ablative of separation (AG 381) with prohibērētur.



ultrā eum locum: “beyond the place,” from the point of view of the camp of Caesar, and between

Ariovistus’ camp and the road along which Caesar’s supplies from the south came (L-E). Keep in

mind the recent movements of the two armies. At the beginning of Chapter 48 they were within

six miles of each other. Ariovistus then passed the camp of Caesar, and took up a position in his

rear. Caesar now retraces his steps, and secures a position in his rear, to prevent the enemy from

cutting off his supplies (Harkness).

locum, quō in loco: repetitions of this kind are frequent in Caesar (Spencer). Notice that locus is

used five times in as many lines, neatness of style being sacrificed to clearness of expression (M-T).

Similarly, in the previous chapter he used castra four times in as many lines (Hodges).

castrīs idōneum: “suitable for a camp” (Kelsey), about two and one-half miles south of his other

camp (L-E). The adjective idōneus takes the dative (AG 384).

aciēque triplicī instructā: “the army being drawn up in three lines” (Spencer). Usually the army

marched in column, but on this occasion it had to expect an attack at any moment and therefore it

marched in battle formation (Walker), the triplex aciēs. When a legion was arranged in triple

line, four cohorts of hastātī stood in the front row, three cohorts of prīncipēs in the second, and

three cohorts of triāriī or pīlānī in the third (Hodges). (As Caesar nowhere makes use of the

terms hastātī, prīncipēs, triāriī, and pīlānī, it is doubtful whether in his day the lines were

distinguished by these names (Spencer)). The three maniples of a cohort were probably stationed

side by side, the first centuries ahead of the second. If the century contained sixty men, the

arrangement was very likely fifteen front and four deep. Thus each cohort would have a depth of

eight man and a front of forty-five. According to a late writer each soldier had a right-and-left

space of three feet in the rank, and the ranks were six feet apart. So, if we allow seven or eight

feet between the maniples and a few feet between the centuries of a maniple, a cohort would



occupy a rectangle about 150 feet by 45 feet. The space between cohorts may have been equal to

the width of a cohort. If so, the legion would occupy a space of more than one thousand feet

from right to left. In action the soldiers doubtless moved farther apart, filling the space between

the cohorts and presenting an unbroken front to the enemy (Hodges).

vēnit: Caesar at first advanced towards the German camp as if to offer battle as usual, then

moving to the right he marched past Ariovistus to the site chosen for the new camp (L-E).

secundam aciem in armīs esse, tertiam: the first and second groups were “in arms” to repel the

expected attack (L-E). Note the asyndeton (AG 640).

castra mūnīre: “to fortify the camp” (H-T); “to build a [fortified] camp” (M-T). The spade and

pickaxe were as familiar to the Roman soldier as the sword or javelin. Caesar had one larger

camp about two miles east of the Germans, and a smaller one rather more than half a mile to the

south of them (A-G).

circiter hominum XVĪ mīlia expedīta: = hominum mīlia expedītōrum (Harkness): “light armed

troops numbering about sixteen thousand” (L-E). Expedīta (“unencumbered,” hence “ready to

fight”) agrees grammatically with mīlia, but logically with hominum (Hodges). Hominum =

peditum (L-E). The light-armed troops carried nothing but their arms, and were extremely rapid

in their movements (Spencer).

quae cōpiae nostrōs terrērent: “that these forces might frighten our troops”; relative purpose

clause (AG 531) (Harkness).

mūnītiōne: the abstract substantive is used with the force of a verbal substantive (mūniendō) (M-T).



nihilō sētius: “nevertheless,” “nonetheless” (L-E). Nihilō is ablative of degree of difference (AG

414) (Hodges). Sētius (sēcius), “less, in a lesser degree,” used only with negatives (L-E), is the

comparative of sēcus (M-T).

opus: = mūnitiōnem castrōrum (Hodges), “the fortification” (Walpole).

mūnītīs castrīs: “when the camp was formed,” a natural expression, since no Roman force ever

rested, even for a single night, without throwing up an earth-wall and ditch round their encamp-

ment (Moberly).

ibi: “therein” (Walpole).

auxiliōrum: the auxiliaries were the troops sent by foreign kings and states in alliance with

Rome (Spencer).

castra maiōra: i.e., the first camp, north of Ariovistus (M-T). Thus Caesar had two camps,

castra maiōra with four legions, and castra minōra with two (Harkness). Caesar had been at the

“larger” main camp for nearly two weeks. The two camps were about two and one-half miles

apart, with the camp of Ariovistus between them (Hodges), and both were on somewhat higher

ground. Caesar’s object in establishing the smaller camp was to keep open the road to Vesontio,

and so maintain communication with his base of supplies (Kelsey).

redūxit: although Caesar’s forces were divided, he had regained the control of the communi-

cations and was in a position to fall upon Ariovistus’s flank if he should attack either of the

Roman camps (Walker).



BOOK 1, Chapter 50:

Proximō diē īnstitūtō suō Caesar ex castrīs utrīsque cōpiās suās rēdūxit paulumque ā

maiōribus castrīs prōgressus aciem īnstrūxit hostibusque pugnandī potestātem fēcit. Ubi nē tum

quidem eōs prōdīre intellēxit, circiter merīdiem exercitum in castra redūxit. Tum dēmum

Ariovistus partem suārum cōpiārum, quae castra minōra oppugnāret, mīsit. Ācriter utrimque

usque ad vesperum pugnātum est. Sōlis occāsū suās cōpiās Ariovistus multīs et inlātīs et acceptīs

vulneribus in castra redūxit. Cum ex captīvīs quaereret Caesar quam ob rem Ariovistus proeliō

nōn dēcertāret, hanc reperiēbat causam, quod apud Germānōs ea cōnsuētūdō esset ut mātrēs

familiae eōrum sortibus et vāticinātiōnibus dēclārārent utrum proelium committī ex ūsū esset

necne; eās ita dīcere: nōn esse fās Germānōs superāre, sī ante novam lūnam proeliō

contendissent.

The first day’s fighting proves to be indecisive; the superstitious Germans want to wait for the

new moon (Stock).

proximō diē: ablative of time when (AG 423.1).

īnstitūtō suō: “according to his previous practice” (A-G); “in accordance with his custom” (H-T);

“in accordance with his plan” (Hodges). Institūtum here refers to a custom or practice, in

accordance with some settled resolution or design (Anthon). Ablative of accordance (AG 418 a).

paulumque…prōgressus: Caesar had failed to secure a battle in the position most favorable to

himself; therefore he now offered battle in a position equally favorable to both armies (Walker).

ā maiōribus castrīs: “from the larger camp,” i.e., the first one pitched (Anthon).



pugnandī potestātem fēcit: “he offered battle” (Hodges), literally, “he gave an opportunity of

fighting” (Kelsey)

tum: note its emphatic position surrounded by nē…quidem (A-G): “not even then.”

prōdīre: “come forth [to battle]” (Anthon); “to come out” of their encampment for the purpose

of fighting (Spencer).

merīdiem: probably for medidiem, from medius and diēs (M-T).

exercitum in castra redūxit: Caesar’s main object in forming two different camps was to gain

possession of the road both north and south; so that Ariovistus could not escape without fighting.

Besides this, such an arrangement tempted the Germans strongly to an attack on the entrench-

ments, which would be sure to give an advantage to the Romans. Lastly, it gave an opportunity

for the stratagem to be described in Chapter 51 (Moberly).

tum dēmum: “then at length” (H-T).

quae castra minōra oppugnāret: quae = ut ea (L-E): “to attack / storm the smaller camp”

(Harkness); relative purpose clause (AG 531) (A-G).

ācriter utrimque…pugnātum est: “fiercely the battle raged on both sides” (Kelsey); “both

sides fought fiercely” (Walker). Dio Cassius (38, 48) informs us that Ariovistus came near taking

the camp of the Romans on this occasion. He adds that the German leader, elated with his

success, disregarded the predictions of the German women, and came to an action with Caesar

(Anthon). Pugnātum est is impersonal passive of an intransitive verb (AG 208 g).

ad vesperum: vesper is a word of two declensions, with genitives vesperis and vesperī. In

classical prose the ablatives vesperī, vespere (the former perhaps a locative), and accusative



vesperum, are most common (M-T).

sōlis occāsū: “at sunset” (H-T); occāsū is ablative of time when (AG 423.1).

multīs inlātīs et acceptīs vulneribus: “many wounds having been inflicted as well as received”

(Hodges).

quam ob rem…nōn dēcertāret: “why (literally, “for what reason” (Kelsey)) Ariovistus did not

offer a general engagement” (Harkness); “…would not fight a decisive battle.” Ariovistus had

used only a part of his forces (Kelsey). Subjunctive in an indirect question (AG 574) dependent

on quaereret.

proeliō dēcertāret: “fight it out in a [pitched] battle” (Hodges); “…in a general engagement”

(Anthon); “fight a general and decisive battle” (Walker). Proeliō, without epithet, is loosely regarded

as an instrumental ablative (AG 409) (M-T), i.e., a regular “battle” in which the whole army takes

part (Spencer).

quod apud Germānōs ea cōnsuētūdō esset: “whereas there was this custom among the

Germans” (Walker). A substantive quod clause (AG 571) in apposition with and explaining hanc

causam (Hodges); the subjunctive is due to implied indirect discourse (Walker):

ut… dēclārārent: subjunctive in a substantive result clause (AG 571) which stands in apposition

to ea cōnsuētūdō: “that the matrons indicated whether or not it was advantageous to engage in

battle” (L-E).

mātrēs familiae: “matrons,” “married women” (Kelsey). Tacitus (Ger. 8) states that the ancient

Germans believed there was something sacred and prophetic in the female sex, and that,

therefore, they disdained not their advice, but placed the greatest confidence in them and their



predictions. He speaks of Veleda and Aurinia in particular, as having been held in the highest

veneration (Anthon).

sortibus: “by casting lots” (L-E). Tacitus (Germ. 10) describes this method of divination: slips

cut from a fruit free, and inscribed with mystic words (runes), were shaken together on a white

cloth, and the omen was drawn from the words on the first three taken up haphazard by the

priest, or (according to Tacitus) the paterfamiliās (M-T). The Germans made frequent use of lots

in divining the future (Harkness).

vāticinātiōnibus: “auguries” (Anthon); “divination” (H-T), “prophetic utterances,” inspired by

eddies of rivers and whirling and noises of currents (Kelsey); possibly the mere prophetic

impressions analogous to “second sight” (A-G).

utrum…necne: “whether…or not”; used in double or alternative questions (AG 335) (L-E).

ex ūsū esset: “it would be of advantage” (Harkness); “it would be expedient” (Kelsey). Indirect

question (AG 574).

nōn esse fās: “that it was not fated” (A-G); “that it was not right” (Harkness); “that it was not the

will of heaven.” Fās denotes what is in accordance with the divine law and the rules of religion

(Anthon), as distinct from iūs, “human law” (M-T). Indirect discourse dependent on dīcere (Kelsey).

superāre: “should be victorious” (Kelsey).

ante novam lūnam: a common superstition among semi-civilized peoples (cf. Tacitus, Ger. 11).

This “new moon” fell on Sept. 18 in 58 B.C. The Germans considered the days of the new moon

and full moon lucky days, and so, were wont to begin important undertakings on these days (L-E).

The Greeks had the same notion, as shown by the refusal of the Spartans to march to the help of



the Athenians at Marathon until after the full moon (L-E). The ancient German superstition about

the influence of the moon still lingers in many places, particulary in respect to commencing

certain farming operations “in the old of the moon” (Kelsey). For simple nations the first new

light of the moon is most cheering and joyful. From its appearance they obtain the order of the

months, and, in the absence of astronomical obsservations, that of the whole civil and religious

year (Moberly).

sī…proeliō contendissent: “if they should fight.” Contendissent stands for contenderint (future

perfect) in the direct form (Walker).



BOOK 1, Chapter 51:

Postrīdiē eius diēī Caesar praesidiō utrīsque castrīs quod satis esse vīsum est relīquit,

ālāriōs omnēs in cōnspectū hostium prō castrīs minōribus cōnstituit, quod minus multitūdine

mīlitum legiōnāriōrum prō hostium numerō valēbat, ut ad speciem ālāriīs ūterētur; ipse triplicī

īnstrūctā aciē usque ad castra hostium accessit. Tum dēmum necessāriō Germānī suās cōpiās

castrīs ēdūxērunt generātimque cōnstituērunt paribus intervāllīs, Harūdēs, Marcomanōs,

Tribocōs, Vangionēs, Nemētēs, Sedusiōs, Suēbōs, omnemque aciem suam raedīs et carrīs

circumdedērunt, nē qua spēs in fugā relinquerētur. Eō mulierēs imposuērunt, quae ad proelium

proficīscentēs mīlitēs passīs manibus flentēs implōrābant nē sē in servitūtem Rōmānīs trāderent.

Taking advantage of their superstition, Caesar forces an engagement (Kelsey).

postrīdiē eius diēī: September 10 is a probably date (L-E); the date was about September 14

(Kelsey).

praesidiō utrīsque castrīs: “as a garrison for each camp” (Kelsey); double dative construction:

praesidiō is dative of purpose (AG 382), and castrīs, dative of reference.

quod satis esse vīsum est: “which seemed to be sufficient”; the antecedent is praesidiō (L-E).

ālāriōs: the “auxiliaries” as distinguished from the legionary (Roman) troops. They were usually

stationed on the wings (ālae) of the line of battle (A-G) when drawn up in order of battle (Anthon).

Leaving in each camp a small Roman force, Caesar drew up his ālāriī before the smaller camp in

such a manner as to make it appear that the two legions were there still (Moberly).



in cōnspectū hostium: to conceal the fact that the two legions had been withdrawn. At a

distance the Germans could not tell the difference between auxiliaries and legionaires. Mean-

while the two legions marched out by the rear gate of the camp and secretly joined the four other

legions in the larger camp. By this clever ruse, Caesar concealed his weakness in legionaires and

concentrated those he had for the battle that he was determined to force (L-E).

prō castrīs minōribus: “before the smaller camp” (Anthon).

quod: sc. id as antecedent; object of relīquit (Kelsey).

minus multitūdine mīlitum legiōnāriōrum…valēbat: “was not strong in the number of

legionary soldiers” (H-T); “was weaker in respect to his force…” (Kelsey); “was less strong

[than he wished]…” (M-T). Multitūdine is ablative of specification (AG 418) (Walker).

prō hostium numerō: “considering the number of the enemy” (Anthon); “in proportion to…,”

“in comparison with…” (Hodges).

ut…ālāriīs ūterētur: “that he might make use of the auxiliaries” (Anthon). Ūterētur takes

ablative (AG 410).

ad speciem: “for [the sake of] appearance” (Anthon); “for show,” i.e., to impress the enemy by a

show of numbers (Harkness); “to make a show [of strength] (M-T),” as if the two legions were

still there, while in fact they had joined the other force at the greater camp (A-G). Caesar did this

in order to hide from the enemy his weakness in heavy infantry; Ariovistus would take the

ālāriōs for legiōnāriōs (Kelsey).

triplicī aciē: of the legionaries alone. The six legions in battle array (triplicī aciē) presented a

front of more than a mile in length (A-G). There were probably only two cohorts in the rear line,



for the reason that one cohort was drawn off for the guard duty indicated earlier (praesidiō

castrīs) (Kelsey).

necessāriō: “of necessity” (Kelsey); an adverb, originally ablative absolute of adjective, “it

being necessary” (M-T). The necessity seems to have come from the fact that the tactics of the

Germans demanded more room than a crowded stronghold could give. Rarely in ancient warfare

was a fortified camp assailed. The usual way was to form two battle lines between the fortified

camps (A-G). The Germans did not entrench their camps. As Caesar was evidently about to

attack them, and as there was no room for a battle-line in their camp, they had to come out.

Caesar probably had to make the attack uphill, but there was a great advantage in forcing the

enemy to fight at a time when they believed they could not conquer (Walker).

castrīs: sc. ē; ablative of place from which (AG 428 g).

generātim: = per gentēs (Spencer): “by nations,” i.e., by tribes (Anthon), the soldiers of each

tribe being formed into a body by themselves (Kelsey). The idea was that kinsmen would fight

better side by side (Stock). About 150 years later, Tacitus speaks thus of the Germans: “And

what most stimulates their courage is, that their squadrons or battalions, instead of being formed

by chance or by a fortuitous gathering, are composed of families and clans. Close by them, too

are those dearest to them, so that they hear the shrieks of women, the cries of infants. They are to

every man the most sacred witnesses of his bravery, they are his most generous applauders. The

soldier brings his wounds to mother and wife, who shrink not from counting or even demanding

them, and who administer both food and encouragement to the combatants” (Walker).

Marcomanōs: the “march-men” or “border-folk.” They may have lived anywhere (Stock).

Tribocōs: placed near Strassburg (Stock).



Vangionēs: placed near Worms (Stock).

Nemētēs: placed near Speier on the Rhine (Stock).

Sedusiōs: their whereabout is quite uncertain (Stock).

Suēbōs: a generic name; it lives on still in the term Swabian (Schwabe) (Stock).

cōnstituērunt: the Germans faced west, the Romans east. There were probably about 50,000

men under Caesar and a much larger number under Ariovistus (L-E).

paribus intervāllīs: “at equal intervals” (Harkness); ablative of attendant circumstances (AG

420, 496 note 1) (Walpole).

raedīs et carrīs: “with carriages and wagons” (Harkness). Both of these are Gallic terms. The

raeda (rhēda) was a kind of four-wheeled chariot for travelling (probably covered, like gypsy

wagons (Kelsey)), and was introduced among, and much used by, the Romans also. The raedae

appear to have carried the families of the Germans, the two-wheeled carrī carried their baggage

and provisions (Anthon).

circumdedērunt: “hemmed in” (Kelsey). The carts and wagons were probably set in a great

semicircle, enclosing the troops’ rear and flanks (Hodges).

nē qua spēs in fugā relinquerētur: “that no hope might be left in flight”; negative purpose

clause (AG 531). Qua is the indefinite adjective (aliqua); the prefix ali- is dropped when it

follows nē.

eō: = in eīs (Spencer): “on these” (Anthon); “thereon,” i.e., on the carts and wagons” (A-G).

passīs manibus: “with outstretched hands.” Passīs is from pandō, not pateor (H-T). Some MSS

read passīs crīnibus, “with disshevelled locks” (Spencer).



proficīscentēs: sc. mīlitēs (Harkness): “[the men] as they advanced”; the object of implōrābant

(A-G).

nē…trāderent: substantive result clause (AG 563) dependent on implōrābant.

in servitūtem: Tacitus (Ger. 8) says that the Germans feared slavery for their women more than

for themselves, and that the safest hostages to take from them were noble women (Stock).

sē: “them,” i.e., the women (Harkness).



BOOK 1, Chapter 52:

Caesar singulīs legiōnibus singulōs lēgātōs et quaestōrem praefēcit, utī eōs testēs suae

quisque virtūtis habēret; ipse ā dextrō cornū, quod eam partem minimē firmam hostium esse

animadverterat, proelium commīsit. Ita nostrī ācriter in hostēs signō datō impetum fēcērunt

itaque hostēs repente celeriterque prōcurrērunt, ut spatium pīla in hostēs coiciendī nōn darētur.

Reiectīs pīlīs comminus gladiīs pugnātum est. At Germānī celeriter ex cōnsuētūdine suā

phalange factā impetūs gladiōrum excēpērunt. Repertī sunt complūrēs nostrī quī in phalangās

īnsilīrent et scūta manibus revellerent et dēsuper vulnerārent. Cum hostium aciēs ā sinistrō cornū

pulsa atque in fugam coniecta esset, ā dextrō cornū vehementer multitūdine suōrum nostram

aciem premēbant. Id cum animadvertisset P. Crassus adulēscēns, quī equitātuī praeerat, quod

expedītior erat quam iī quī inter aciem versābantur, tertiam aciem labōrantibus nostrīs subsidiō

mīsit.

A close and furious conflict ensues (L-E).

singulīs legiōnibus singulōs lēgātōs et quaestōrem praefēcit: “Caesar set one lieutenant in

command of each legion, and [in one case] the quaestor” (Stock). Caesar had six legions. On this

occasion, having only five lēgātī, he also appointed his quartermaster (quaestor) to that one of

the six legions which was intended to be under his own special command (A-G). The quaestor,

whose name is not mentioned, appears again on a level with the lēgātī in Book 4, Chapter 13.

We may assume that he was M. Crassus (oldest son of M. Crassus the triumvir). It was an

innovation of Caesar’s to make the lēgātus have special charge of a legion (Stock). Caesar felt so

keenly the evil of the command being divided among six tribunes that he detailed one of his



lēgātī nominally to assist the tribunes. After this time, we find the lēgātus as the regular

commander of a legion, with the six tribunes under him (A-G).

quaestōrem: properly, a civil and finance officer, but available for command (Moberly). It was

normally his business to manage the public accounts, take care of the supplies of provisions and

money, to sell the booty acquired by conquest, etc. (Spencer).

eōs: = lēgātōs et quaestōrem (Anthon).

testēs: “as witnesses” (Kelsey).

suae quisque virtūtis: notice the order of words, which is regular (Hodges).

ā dextrō cornū: “from / on the right wing,” i.e., of his own army (Anthon), the enemy’s left

which was occupied by the Harudes (Moberly). It was Caesar’s usual practice to open a battle

with his right wing. He goes on to mention a special reason for doing so on this occasion (L-E).

eam partem: that would be the enemy’s left (A-G), opposite the Roman right (Kelsey).

minimē firmam: “weakest,” literally, “least strong” (Anthon).

proelium commīsit: i.e., gave the signal for battle, in general (M-T).

ita…ācriter…ut: “so fiercely that…” (A-G). Ita (qualifying ācriter (Kelsey)) signals an

upcoming result clause (AG 537).

signō datō: i.e., by trumpeters (Walker).

itaque…repente celeriterque: itaque = et ita (Harkness); ita qualifies repente and celeriter

(M-T): “and so suddenly and rapidly” (Anthon).



spatium: when spatium is used by itself, it generally refers to time rather than to space. When it

refers to space some word is often put with it to mark this, like intermissō spatiō (of time), and

intermissō locī spatiō (of space) (Stock).

pīla…coniciendī: a gerund with a direct object (pīla) (A-G). Owing to the speed of the enemy’s

advance, the Romans lost this advantage (spatium nōn darētur). This fact may in part account for

the length of the battle (L-E). The gerund is seldom used with a direct object except in its

genitive case (M-T); the gerundive construction (pīlōrum coniciendōrum) is no doubt avoided

because it would give an offensive accumulation of syllables (H-T).

reiectīs pīlīs: “their javelins being flung aside”; the pīla were intended only for casting, and

would be an encumbrance in a hand-to-hand encounter (Walker). Some MSS. have relictīs pīlīs,

“their javelins being left behind.”

comminus: “at close quarters” (Kelsey); “hand to hand”; cf. ēminus, “from a distance” (M-T).

This was the favorite method of fighting with the Roman soldier. The short sword (gladius) of the

Romans was a better weapon for hand-to-hand fighting than the long sword of the Germans (L-E).

gladiīs: “swordsmen”; there is a tendency in military language to confound the man with his

weapon (Stock).

ex cōnsuētūdine: “in accordance with their custom” (Kelsey).

phalange factā: “adopting the phalanx formation”, hence singular. Of course, as the Germans

fought by tribes (generātim), there were as many phalanxes as there were tribes or nations

(Spencer). From Dio Cassius we learn that these German phalanxes were composed of three or

four hundred men each with their shields locked together all round them. Their dense formation

rendered it impossible to shake them, while the plate-armor of shields made them impervious to



blows (Stock). This defensive formation had been adopted also by the Helvetians (see Chapter

24) (Kelsey).

impetūs gladiōrum excēpērunt: the Germans apparently did not hurl their javelins, but relied

upon their shields and swords; the German sword was longer than the Roman, and single-edged

(Kelsey).

complūrēs nostrī: sc. mīlitēs: “very many of our soldiers” (Harkness); “many men on our side”

(Kelsey); “soldiers of ours in many instances,” with complūrēs thus equivalent to an adverb like

identidem (M-T).

quī in phalangās īnsilīrent…revellerent…vulnerārent: subjunctive in a relative clause of

characteristic (AG 535): “who consented to leap upon the phalanxes…(etc.)” (Walpole).

Phalangās is a Greek accusative plural (AG 44 b) (Stock); some MSS. have in phalangem

(Stock). If the Romans had been able to begin the battle with the customary volley of javelins,

this solid array of shields would have been broken up as in the battle with the Helvetii (see

Chapter 25) (Walker). As it was, these soldiers sprang bodily upon the “shield-wall” (L-E), tore

away the shields which the enemy held above their heads, and then stabbed downwards

(dēsuper) (Anthon), striking at the heads of the men, which were bare (Stock); the usual practice

of the Roman soldier was to push the enemy’s shield upward with his own, and thrust underneath

(Hodges). The soldiers who did this kept moving about on the top of the shields which formed a

kind of roof beneath them (Anthon). Kraner considers et dēsuper vulnerārent to be the addition

of a reader who, confusing the phalanx order with that of the Roman testūdō, supposed that the

soldiers leapt on the roof of shields, and tearing them up, struck at the men beneath. But the

shields formed a wall, not a roof (M-T). Such a defensive arrangement would be suicidal as a

mode of resisting an attack with swords, although it might answer as against javelins (Moberly).



cum: “though” (Walker); a cum concessive clause with subjunctive (AG 549).

ā sinistrō cornū: “on their left wing,” which was the weakest part of the German line (Walker).

ā dextrō cornū: alluding again to the German army (Anthon).

premēbant: notice the change of the verb’s number through the influence of the preceding

words multitūdine suōrum (M-T).

P. Crassus: son of Marcus Crassus, the triumvir with Caesar and Pompey (Harkness). His

movement on the present occasion gained the day for the Romans (Anthon). He next appears in

the Dē Bellō Gallicō at the head of an important expedition against the Aquitanians (A-G). He

left Caesar in 55 B.C. and took an active part at Rome in securing the election of his father and

Pompey to the consulship that year (Stock). Both he and his father lost their lives in the

expedition against the Parthians. (Anthon).

adulēscēns: “the younger,” in the same way we say colloquially “young so-and-so” (Stock); like

our term “junior” (A-G), properly a person that is growing up, a person from fifteen to thirty

years of age (Spencer); used here to distinguish him from his father (A-G), or possibly from his

elder brother, mentioned in Book 5 as Caesar’s legate and in Book 6 as quaestor (Hodges). Many

of Caesar’s best officers were young men (L-E).

equitātuī: dative with praeerat (AG 370). Some MSS. read equitātū, an old form of dative

(Anthon).

quod expedītior erat: “because he was more clear [of the enemy]” (Moberly); “because he was

more disengaged” (Harkness); “because he was freer to act” (Walker) i.e., not entangled in the

mêlée, and therefore better able to discern the need of reinforcing the left wing (M-T). Crassus



and the cavalry were posted behind the Roman left wing, out of the way of the German cavalry,

for whom they were no match. They were taking no part in the battle, but were waiting to pursue

the enemy when the legions should win the victory (Walker).

iī quī…versābantur: i.e., the officers of the legions (Kelsey).

inter aciem: “in action” (Kelsey). Here aciēs means the actual fighting; immediately below it

means a division of the army (M-T).

tertiam aciem: the line of reserves, kept for just such emergencies (A-G).

labōrantibus nostrīs subsidiō: “to the assistance of our hard-pressed men” (L-E). The double

dative construction: subsidiō is dative of purpose (AG 382), nostrīs is dative of reference.



BOOK 1, Chapter 53:

Ita proelium restitūtum est, atque omnēs hostēs terga vertērunt nec prius fugere

dēstitērunt quam ad flūmen Rhēnum mīlia passuum ex eō locō circiter L pervēnērunt. Ibi

perpaucī aut vīribus cōnfīsī trānāre contendērunt aut lintribus inventīs sibi salūtem repperērunt.

In hīs fuit Ariovistus, quī nāviculam dēligātam ad rīpam nactus eā profūgit; reliquōs omnēs

cōnsecūtī equitēs nostrī interfēcērunt. Duae fuērunt Ariovistī uxōrēs, ūna Suēba nātiōne, quam

domō sēcum ēdūxerat, altera Nōrica, rēgis Voccīonis soror, quam in Galliā dūxerat ā frātre

missam: utraque in eā fugā periit; duae fīliae hārum altera occīsa, altera capta est. C. Valerius

Procillus, cum ā custōdibus in fugā trīnīs catēnīs vīnctus traherētur, in ipsum Caesarem hostēs

equitātū insequentem incīdit. Quae quidem rēs Caesarī nōn minōrem quam ipsa victōria

voluptātem attulit, quod hominem honestissimum prōvinciae Galliae, suum familiārem et

hospitem, ēreptum ex manibus hostium sibi restitūtum vidēbat neque eius calamitāte dē tantā

voluptāte et grātulātiōne quicquam fortūna dēminuerat. Is sē praesente dē sē ter sortibus

cōnsultum dīcēbat, utrum ignī statim necārētur an in aliud tempus reservārētur: sortium beneficiō

sē esse incolumem. Item M. Metius repertus et ad eum reductus est.

Caesar defeats the Germans and pursues them to the Rhine. Procillus and Metius are recovered

(M-T).

proelium restitūtum est, atque omnēs hostēs terga vertērunt: “first the battle was restored,

and then (atque) the enemy were entirely put to flight” (Moberly).

proelium restitūtum est: “the tide of battle was turned” (Hodges), contrasted with labōrantibus

at the end of Chapter 52 (A-G). The language implies that the Roman left wing was ceasing to



fight when the reserves were sent to its aid (Kelsey).

omnēs hostēs: as the Germans had no reserves, they fled en masse when the phalanx was broken

(L-E). Omnēs is emphatic (Walpole).

terga vertērunt: the line of wagons (see Chapter 51) might hinder their flight, but could not

entirely prevent it. It is possible, too, that during the battle the Germans had advanced so far that

there was space enough for flight between the wagons and the German line (Walker).

prius fugere dēstitērunt quam: “they did not cease to flee until”; prius and quam are separated

by tmesis (AG 640) (Anthon).

Rhēnum: the nearest point on this river was a little below Bâle, somewhat more than five miles

distant from the supposed place of the engagement (A-G).

mīlia passuum L: A flight and pursuit of fifty miles seems improbable (Kelsey), but some MSS.

read quīnquāgintā chiefly on the strength of a passage in Plutarch’s Life of Caesar, which says

that the flight extended over three hundred to four hundred stadia, i.e., forty to fifty miles. Most

editions have quīnque or quīndecim instead of quīnquāgintā (Harkness), which perhaps better

satisfies the geographical conditions. If we adopt the reading quīnquāgintā, we must assume that

the Germans did not make directly for the Rhine, but rather fled down the banks of the Ill,

meeting the Rhine near Rheinau (M-T). If this battle was fought between Ostheim and Gemar,

on the left bank of the Fecht, the distance to the Rhine at its nearest point was twelve or fifteen

miles. Some authorities think that Caesar mistook the Ill for the Rhine (Hodges).

vīribus cōnfīsī: “relying on their strength” (H-T). Vīribus is ablative (AG 431) (L-E), dependent

on cōnfīsī, a deponent participle (AG 190 b) (M-T).



trānāre contendērunt: “by great effort swam across” (A-G); “managed to swim over” (Moberly).

lintribus inventīs: “by means of boats which chanced to be at hand,” literally, “by boats [that

were] found” (Harkness).

salūtem repperērunt: “reached a place of safety” (Moberly).

inventīs, repperērunt: Inveniō means “to find without seeking, to meet with accidentally,”

while reperiō means “to find by seeking, to obtain by effort.” This sentence is a good illustration

of the use of these two synonyms (Harkness).

in hīs fuit Ariovistus: he died soon after in Germany, either of his wounds, or through chagrin at

his defeat. See Book 5, Chapter 29: Magnō esse Germānīs dolōrī Ariovistī mortem (Anthon).

Four years later we hear that the Germans desired to avenge his death (Walker).

nactus: “coming upon” (Kelsey); deponent participle of nancīscor.

eā: “with this,” i.e., with the nāvicula (Harkness); ablative of means (AG 409) (Walker).

reliquōs omnēs: 80,000 are said to have perished in the battle and retreat, according to Plutarch

(Hodges).

cōnsecūtī…interfēcērunt: “our cavalry pursued and killed.”

duae fuērunt Ariovistī uxōrēs: the Germans in general, according to Tacitus (Ger. 18), had but

one wife each. In the case of their chieftains, however, who were anxious to strengthen and

enlarge their power by family alliances, more than one wife was allowed (Anthon).

Suēba nātiōne: “a Suebian by nation” (Harkness); “a Swabian by descent” (L-E); “…by birth”

(Kelsey). For character and customs of the Suevi see Book 4, Chapters 1-3 (A-G). Nātiōne is

ablative of specification (AG 418) (Walker).



dūxerat: sc. in mātrimōnium: “had married” (H-T).

ā frātre missam: “sent by her brother [for this purpose, viz. to marry Ariovistus]” (L-E).

utraque in eā fugā periit: sparing women and children was no part of Caesar’s military code

(Moberly).

duae fīliae hārum: sc. uxōrum; in apposition with altera, altera (Harkness): “of their two

daughters, one was slain, the other captured.” This nominative absolute is a Greek construction,

instead of the partitive genitive (H-T); it is the general nominative (duae fīliae) being

immediately broken into two particular ones (altera…altera) (Moberly).

occīsa: sc. est (Kelsey).

C. Valerius Procillus: see Chapter 47 (A-G).

trīnīs catēnīs vīnctus: “bound with three [sets of] manacles” (A-G); “bound with a triple chain”

(Anthon). When the noun is already plural in sense, like catēnae, or has no singular, the

distributive numeral is appropriate (Stock). Don’t confuse the principal parts of vīnciō, vincō,

and vīvō (Kelsey).

traherētur: “was being dragged along” (Kelsey).

in ipsum Caesarem…incīdit: “fell in with Caesar himself” (Anthon); “fell into the hands of

Caesar himself” (Harkness); “fell in the way of” (Kelsey); “was casually overtaken by Caesar

himself” (Moberly).

hostēs: the object of īnsequentem (Kelsey): “who was pursuing the enemy” (L-E).

equitātū: ablative of means (AG ) rather than accompaniment; hence without cum (Harkness).



quae quidem rēs: quae rēs = et illa rēs, referring to the rescue of his faithful friend Procillus

(Harkness). Quidem adds emphasis to quae: “and it was this circumstance that….” (M-T).

voluptātem attulit: these generous words do credit to Caesar’s heart and let us into the secret of

his wonderful influence over all who came into close contact with him (L-E).

honestissimum: “very honorable,” not “honest” in the narrower sense (Hodges).

hospitem: “guest-friend” (Kelsey). Between a Roman and a foreigner, a compact of private

hospitium gave each a claim on the other’s hospitality, protection, and good services. The bond

was consecrated by religious ceremony, and was often hereditary (M-T).

ēreptum, restitūtum: sc. esse to both (Kelsey). The former of these participles is adjectival to

the latter: “restored to him safe from the hands of the enemy” (Moberly).

neque…quicquam fortūna dēminuerat: “nor had fortune at all diminished,” more literally,

“and fortune had not taken away anything from” (Anthon). Quicquam is adverbial accusative

(AG 390 c) (A-G).

eius calamitāte: a euphemism for morte (H-T): “by his death” (Harkness); “by his destruction”

(Kelsey); “by any harm to him”; “by his distress / suffering” (Spencer). Eius refers to Procillus

(A-G).

dē tantā voluptāte: “from the general pleasure” (Moberly); “from the great joy” (Spencer);

“from the great satisfaction” (Walker).

grātulātiōne: in a passive sense (Walpole): “[reason for] thankfulness” (Kelsey); “occasion of

congratulation” (M-T); “rejoicing” (Spencer).



sē praesente: “in his presence” (A-G); “while he was standing by” (L-E), construed with

cōnsultum (Harkness). Notice the repetition of the pronoun sē in two different constructions, this

ablative absolute (AG 419) and the prepositional phrase dē sē that immediately follows it,

instead of the terser but less emphatic dē sē praesente (M-T).

ter sortibus cōnsultum: sc. esse: “that the lots were thrice consulted” (Kelsey); “that

consultation had been held three times,” “that the gods had been consulted three times”

(Hodges). Cōnsultum is impersonal (Harkness), literally, “it was consulted”; sortibus is ablative

of means (AG 409) (Hodges). It was the regular usage of the Germans to consult the lots three

times (A-G). Probably three was a sacred and mystical number with the Germans, as it was

among several other ancient nations (H-T). Tacitus (Ger. 8) describes the German mode of

divining by lots as follows: “They cut a twig from a fruit tree, and divide it into small pieces,

which, distinguished by certain marks, are thrown randomly upon a white garment. Then the

priest of the canton, if the occasion be public; if private, the master of the family; after an

invocation of the gods, with his eyes lifted up to heaven, thrice takes out each piece, and, as they

come up, interprets their signification according to the marks fixed upon them. If the result prove

unfavorable they are no more consulted on the same affair that day; if propitious, a confirmation

by omens is still required” (Anthon).

utrum…necārētur…an…reservārētur: “[as to] whether he should be killed…or should be

saved up…” (Hodges). Indirect double question (AG 575), but the subjunctive is actually due to

the fact that, in direct discourse, it was a deliberative subjunctive, necētur (AG 443) (A-G).

sortium beneficiō: “by the favor of the lots” (Anthon). The lots had decided that he should be

reserved for later (Hodges) rather than burned to death on the spot.



sē esse incolumem: “that he was unharmed” (Kelsey).

M. Metius: see Chapter 47 (Kelsey).

eum: = Caesarem (Kelsey).

The site of the battle with Ariovistus is still uncertain. The account of Caesar’s march would

seem to point to some place from thirty to fifty miles beyond Belfort, and accordingly it has been

located by some near Cernay and by others near Gemar, twenty miles farther down the valley.

Perhaps it may have been even nearer the gap than Cernay. The country is nearly the same in all

that region, and a few miles can make no difference. The great point is that for the first time a

Roman army ventured beyond one of the natural bounds of Gaul into the valley of the Rhine and

defeated a German horde on its own ground, as it were. The campaign against Ariovistus settled

the question of sovereignty over Gaul for several centuries to come. The Germans did not gain

possession of it until after the fall of the western Roman empire (A-G).



BOOK I, Chapter 54:

Hōc proeliō trāns Rhēnum nūntiātō, Suēbī, quī ad rīpās Rhēnī vēnerant, domum revertī

coepērunt; quōs ubi [Ubii] quī proximī Rhēnum incolunt perterritōs sēnsērunt, īnsecūtī magnum

ex iīs numerum occīdērunt. Caesar ūnā aestāte duōbus maximīs bellīs cōnfectīs mātūrius paulō

quam tempus annī postulābat in hīberna in Sēquanōs exercitum dēdūxit; hībernīs Labiēnum

praeposuit; ipse in citeriōrem Galliam ad conventūs agendōs profectus est.

Caesar places his army in winter quarters amongst the Sequani, under his legate Labienus. He

himself returns into Cisalpine Gaul (M-T).

Suēbī: see Chapter 37; perhaps the Suebi mentioned in Chapter 41 were a detachment only, the

advance-guard of the migration (Hodges).

domum: accusative of place to which, without a preposition (AG 428 k).

quōs: = et illōs, i.e., the Suebi (Kelsey).

Ubiī: these people lived on the right bank of the Rhine (Spencer) near modern Cologne, and

were the deadly enemies of the Suevi, and therefore generally in alliance with the Romans (see

Book 4, Chapter 3) (A-G). They were ultimately transferred by Agrippa with their own consent

to the Gallic side of the Rhine (Stock). The common text has ubi in place of Ubiī, and the

advocates for the former insist that Ubiī must be an erroneous reading, because the people of that

name were too far removed from the seat of war. A strong argument in favor of the reading Ubiī,

however, may be obtained from Chapter 37 of this book, where the Treveri, the immediate



neighbors of the Ubii, came to Caesar with the intelligence, that the Suevi were endeavoring to

cross the Rhine in their vicinity (Anthon).

Rhēnum: sc. ad (Anthon); governed by proximī (A-G): “next to the Rhine,” i.e., on the banks of

that river (Anthon).

perterritōs: sc. esse (Kelsey).

ūnā aestāte: ablative of time within which (AG 424). The defeat of the Helvetians took place

near the end of June, that of Ariovistus the second week in September (Kelsey). Usually only one

campaign was conducted each year (L-E).

duōbus maximīs bellīs: a powerful blow had been struck at free Gaul in the victory of the

Helvetii, and the onward march of the Germans had been checked by the victory over Ariovistus.

(Hodges). With not more than 35,000 soldiers, including cavalry and light-armed troops, Caesar

in two campaigns, completed in a single season (ūnā aestāte), had practically annihilated

fighting forces several times as large as his own, and had destroyed, or rendered docile, two

hostile populations aggregating several hundred thousand persons. History affords no more

striking instance of a victory of military organization, discipline, and generalship over numbers,

barbaric courage, and brute force (Kelsey). These victories had been won by a man of middle

age, whose previous military experience had been comparatively slight (Hodges).

mātūrius paulō: “a little earlier”; the decisive battle with Ariovistus was fought somewhere

about the 10th of September (A-G). The army needed rest after such arduous labors (L-E). Paulō

is ablative of degree of difference (AG 414).

tempus annī: “the season of the year” (Anthon).



in hīberna: sc. castra (Hodges): “into winter-quarters.” The winter-quarters of the Romans were

strongly fortified, and furnished, particularly under the emperors, with every accommodation for

the convenience and comfort of the soldiers, much like a city, with storehouses, workshops, an

infirmary, etc. Hence from them many towns in Europe are supposed to have had their origins; in

England particularly, those whose names ended in –cester, -chester, or –caster (from castrum)

(Anthon).

in Sēquanōs: the region in which the battle was fought had probably formed a part of the

Sequanian territory but had been ceded to Ariovistus (Kelsey). The quartering of the army on

Gallic soil signified Caesar’s intention to assume a protectorate over Gaul, and thus brought

about the Belgic uprising of the following year (Walker). It is the Latin idiom to repeat the

preposition or case implying motion towards in expressions like this. In English we use it only

once, i.e., “into winter quarters amongst the Sequani” (M-T). The Latin idiom requires in

Sēquanōs, not in Sēquanōs, to designate the place “into which” the army was led (Harkness);

accusative of end, or limit, of motion (AG 426.2) (Hodges).

hībernīs: dative governed by praeposuit (AG 370) (Hodges): “he placed Labienus in charge of

the winter-quarters” (Kelsey). This was probably at Vesontio, which possessed great advantages

as a military base, as explained in Chapter 38 (Kelsey).

Labiēnum: he held the rank of prōpraetor (L-E).

in citeriōrem Galliam: “Hither” or “Nearer Gaul,” i.e., Gaul south of the Alps, or, the northern

part of the Italian peninsula, otherwise called Gallia Cisalpīna (Anthon).

ad conventūs agendōs: “to hold the proconsular courts” which Caesar held each year in

Cisalpine Gaul (L-E). The governors of provinces generally devoted the summer to their military



operations and the winter to the civil part of their administration, which consisted in presiding

over the courts of justice (conventūs), hearing petitions, regulating taxes (Anthon), and

exercising a controlling influence over public affairs (Harkness). Caesar wished to be nearer

Rome, the better to look after his political interests there (Hodges).

332



Allen-Greenough, 49 / 308Anthon, 277Harkness, 210Harper-Tolman, 112 / 365Hodges, 90 / 307Kelsey, 127Lowe-Ewing, 189Merryweather-Tancock, 47 / 113Moberly, 238Spencer, 207Stock, 64Walker, 160Walpole, 41 / 81



DICKINSON COLLEGE COMMENTARIES FOR...

Documents

Transcript of DICKINSON COLLEGE COMMENTARIES FOR...